Merge branch 'release/v6.0.0' into develop
This commit is contained in:
Julia Radzhabova
commit
09eba3c88b
|
|
@ -68,12 +68,6 @@ define([
|
|||
'use strict';
|
||||
|
||||
Common.UI.LoadMask = Common.UI.BaseView.extend((function() {
|
||||
var ownerEl,
|
||||
maskeEl,
|
||||
loaderEl;
|
||||
var timerId = 0;
|
||||
|
||||
maskeEl = $('<div class="asc-loadmask"></div>');
|
||||
return {
|
||||
options : {
|
||||
cls : '',
|
||||
|
|
@ -95,13 +89,15 @@ define([
|
|||
this.template = this.options.template || this.template;
|
||||
this.title = this.options.title;
|
||||
|
||||
ownerEl = (this.options.owner instanceof Common.UI.BaseView) ? $(this.options.owner.el) : $(this.options.owner);
|
||||
loaderEl = $(this.template({
|
||||
this.ownerEl = (this.options.owner instanceof Common.UI.BaseView) ? $(this.options.owner.el) : $(this.options.owner);
|
||||
this.loaderEl = $(this.template({
|
||||
id : this.id,
|
||||
cls : this.options.cls,
|
||||
style : this.options.style,
|
||||
title : this.title
|
||||
}));
|
||||
this.maskeEl = $('<div class="asc-loadmask"></div>');
|
||||
this.timerId = 0;
|
||||
},
|
||||
|
||||
render: function() {
|
||||
|
|
@ -113,6 +109,9 @@ define([
|
|||
// return;
|
||||
|
||||
// The owner is already masked
|
||||
var ownerEl = this.ownerEl,
|
||||
loaderEl = this.loaderEl,
|
||||
maskeEl = this.maskeEl;
|
||||
if (!!ownerEl.ismasked)
|
||||
return this;
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -125,7 +124,7 @@ define([
|
|||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// show mask after 500 ms if it wont be hided
|
||||
timerId = setTimeout(function () {
|
||||
me.timerId = setTimeout(function () {
|
||||
ownerEl.append(maskeEl);
|
||||
ownerEl.append(loaderEl);
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -144,16 +143,17 @@ define([
|
|||
},
|
||||
|
||||
hide: function() {
|
||||
if (timerId) {
|
||||
clearTimeout(timerId);
|
||||
timerId = 0;
|
||||
var ownerEl = this.ownerEl;
|
||||
if (this.timerId) {
|
||||
clearTimeout(this.timerId);
|
||||
this.timerId = 0;
|
||||
}
|
||||
if (ownerEl && ownerEl.ismasked) {
|
||||
if (ownerEl.closest('.asc-window.modal').length==0 && !Common.Utils.ModalWindow.isVisible())
|
||||
Common.util.Shortcuts.resumeEvents();
|
||||
|
||||
maskeEl && maskeEl.remove();
|
||||
loaderEl && loaderEl.remove();
|
||||
this.maskeEl && this.maskeEl.remove();
|
||||
this.loaderEl && this.loaderEl.remove();
|
||||
}
|
||||
delete ownerEl.ismasked;
|
||||
},
|
||||
|
|
@ -161,16 +161,18 @@ define([
|
|||
setTitle: function(title) {
|
||||
this.title = title;
|
||||
|
||||
if (ownerEl && ownerEl.ismasked && loaderEl){
|
||||
$('.asc-loadmask-title', loaderEl).html(title);
|
||||
if (this.ownerEl && this.ownerEl.ismasked && this.loaderEl){
|
||||
$('.asc-loadmask-title', this.loaderEl).html(title);
|
||||
}
|
||||
},
|
||||
|
||||
isVisible: function() {
|
||||
return !!ownerEl.ismasked;
|
||||
return !!this.ownerEl.ismasked;
|
||||
},
|
||||
|
||||
updatePosition: function() {
|
||||
var ownerEl = this.ownerEl,
|
||||
loaderEl = this.loaderEl;
|
||||
if (ownerEl && ownerEl.ismasked && loaderEl){
|
||||
loaderEl.css({
|
||||
top : Math.round(ownerEl.height() / 2 - (loaderEl.height() + parseInt(loaderEl.css('padding-top')) + parseInt(loaderEl.css('padding-bottom'))) / 2) + 'px',
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -275,19 +275,27 @@ define([
|
|||
this.bar.trigger('tab:dragstart', event.dataTransfer, this.bar.selectTabs);
|
||||
}, this),
|
||||
dragenter: $.proxy(function (e) {
|
||||
var event = e.originalEvent;
|
||||
if (!this.bar.isEditFormula) {
|
||||
this.bar.$el.find('.mousemove').removeClass('mousemove right');
|
||||
$(e.currentTarget).parent().addClass('mousemove');
|
||||
var event = e.originalEvent;
|
||||
var data = event.dataTransfer.getData("onlyoffice");
|
||||
event.dataTransfer.dropEffect = data ? 'move' : 'none';
|
||||
} else {
|
||||
event.dataTransfer.dropEffect = 'none';
|
||||
}
|
||||
}, this),
|
||||
dragover: $.proxy(function (e) {
|
||||
var event = e.originalEvent;
|
||||
if (event.preventDefault) {
|
||||
event.preventDefault(); // Necessary. Allows us to drop.
|
||||
}
|
||||
if (!this.bar.isEditFormula) {
|
||||
this.bar.$el.find('.mousemove').removeClass('mousemove right');
|
||||
$(e.currentTarget).parent().addClass('mousemove');
|
||||
} else {
|
||||
event.dataTransfer.dropEffect = 'none';
|
||||
}
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}, this),
|
||||
dragleave: $.proxy(function (e) {
|
||||
|
|
@ -349,14 +357,14 @@ define([
|
|||
}, this));
|
||||
addEvent(this.$bar[0], 'dragenter', _.bind(function (event) {
|
||||
var data = event.dataTransfer.getData("onlyoffice");
|
||||
event.dataTransfer.dropEffect = data ? 'move' : 'none';
|
||||
event.dataTransfer.dropEffect = (!this.isEditFormula && data) ? 'move' : 'none';
|
||||
}, this));
|
||||
addEvent(this.$bar[0], 'dragover', _.bind(function (event) {
|
||||
if (event.preventDefault) {
|
||||
event.preventDefault(); // Necessary. Allows us to drop.
|
||||
}
|
||||
event.dataTransfer.dropEffect = 'move';
|
||||
this.tabs[this.tabs.length - 1].$el.addClass('mousemove right');
|
||||
event.dataTransfer.dropEffect = !this.isEditFormula ? 'move' : 'none';
|
||||
!this.isEditFormula && this.tabs[this.tabs.length - 1].$el.addClass('mousemove right');
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}, this));
|
||||
addEvent(this.$bar[0], 'dragleave', _.bind(function (event) {
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -763,6 +763,8 @@ Common.Utils.loadConfig = function(url, callback) {
|
|||
else return 'error';
|
||||
}).then(function(json){
|
||||
callback(json);
|
||||
}).catch(function(e) {
|
||||
callback('error');
|
||||
});
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -1,28 +1,30 @@
|
|||
{
|
||||
"common.view.modals.txtCopy": "클립보드로 복사",
|
||||
"common.view.modals.txtEmbed": "퍼가기",
|
||||
"common.view.modals.txtEmbed": "개체 삽입",
|
||||
"common.view.modals.txtHeight": "높이",
|
||||
"common.view.modals.txtShare": "링크 공유",
|
||||
"common.view.modals.txtWidth": "너비",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.convertationErrorText": "변환 실패 ",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.convertationTimeoutText": "전환 시간 초과를 초과했습니다.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.convertationTimeoutText": "변환 시간을 초과했습니다.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.criticalErrorTitle": "오류",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.downloadErrorText": "다운로드하지 못했습니다.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.downloadErrorText": "다운로드 실패",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.downloadTextText": "문서 다운로드 중...",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorAccessDeny": "권한이없는 작업을 수행하려고합니다. <br> Document Server 관리자에게 문의하십시오.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorDefaultMessage": "오류 코드: %1",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorFilePassProtect": "이 문서는 암호로 보호되어있어 열 수 없습니다.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorFileSizeExceed": "파일의 크기가 서버에서 정해진 범위를 초과 했습니다. 문서 서버 관리자에게 해당 내용에 대한 자세한 안내를 받아 보시기 바랍니다.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "인터넷 연결이 복구 되었으며 파일에 수정 사항이 발생되었습니다. 작업을 계속 하시기 전에 반드시 기존의 파일을 다운로드하거나 내용을 복사해서 작업 내용을 잃어 버리는 일이 없도록 한 후에 이 페이지를 새로 고침(reload) 해 주시기 바랍니다.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorUserDrop": "파일에 지금 액세스 할 수 없습니다.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.notcriticalErrorTitle": "경고",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.scriptLoadError": "연결 속도가 느려, 일부 요소들이 로드되지 않았습니다. 페이지를 다시 새로 고침해주세요.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.textLoadingDocument": "문서 로드 중",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.textOf": "중",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.txtClose": "완료",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.textOf": "의",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.txtClose": "닫기",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.unknownErrorText": "알 수없는 오류.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "사용중인 브라우저가 지원되지 않습니다.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.waitText": "잠시만 기달려주세요...",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationView.txtDownload": "다운로드 ",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationView.txtEmbed": "퍼가기",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationView.txtEmbed": "개체 삽입",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationView.txtFullScreen": "전체 화면",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationView.txtShare": "공유"
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
|
@ -1,7 +1,10 @@
|
|||
{
|
||||
"common.view.modals.txtCopy": "Kopieer naar klembord",
|
||||
"common.view.modals.txtEmbed": "Invoegen",
|
||||
"common.view.modals.txtHeight": "Hoogte",
|
||||
"common.view.modals.txtShare": "Link delen",
|
||||
"common.view.modals.txtWidth": "Breedte",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.convertationErrorText": "Conversie is mislukt",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.convertationTimeoutText": "Time-out voor conversie overschreden.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.criticalErrorTitle": "Fout",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.downloadErrorText": "Download mislukt.",
|
||||
|
|
@ -9,6 +12,8 @@
|
|||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorAccessDeny": "U probeert een actie uit te voeren waarvoor u geen rechten hebt.<br>Neem contact op met de beheerder van de documentserver.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorDefaultMessage": "Foutcode: %1",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorFilePassProtect": "Het bestand is beschermd met een wachtwoord en kan niet worden geopend.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorFileSizeExceed": "De bestandsgrootte overschrijdt de limiet die is ingesteld voor uw server. <br>Neem contact op met uw Document Server-beheerder voor details.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "De internetverbinding is hersteld en de bestandsversie is gewijzigd. <br>Voordat u verder kunt werken, moet u het bestand downloaden of de inhoud kopiëren om er zeker van te zijn dat er niets verloren gaat, en deze pagina vervolgens opnieuw laden.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorUserDrop": "Toegang tot het bestand is op dit moment niet mogelijk.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Waarschuwing",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.scriptLoadError": "De verbinding is te langzaam, sommige componenten konden niet geladen worden. Laad de pagina opnieuw.",
|
||||
|
|
@ -17,7 +22,9 @@
|
|||
"DE.ApplicationController.txtClose": "Sluiten",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.unknownErrorText": "Onbekende fout.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "Uw browser wordt niet ondersteund.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.waitText": "Een moment geduld",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationView.txtDownload": "Downloaden",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationView.txtEmbed": "Invoegen",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationView.txtFullScreen": "Volledig scherm",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationView.txtShare": "Delen"
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
|
@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
|
|||
{
|
||||
"common.view.modals.txtCopy": "Skopírovať do schránky",
|
||||
"common.view.modals.txtEmbed": "Vložiť",
|
||||
"common.view.modals.txtHeight": "Výška",
|
||||
"common.view.modals.txtShare": "Zdieľať odkaz",
|
||||
"common.view.modals.txtWidth": "Šírka",
|
||||
|
|
@ -23,6 +24,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.ApplicationController.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "Váš prehliadač nie je podporovaný.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.waitText": "Prosím čakajte...",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationView.txtDownload": "Stiahnuť",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationView.txtEmbed": "Vložiť",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationView.txtFullScreen": "Celá obrazovka",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationView.txtShare": "Zdieľať"
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
|
@ -12,8 +12,11 @@
|
|||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorAccessDeny": "Ви намагаєтеся виконати дію, на яку у вас немає прав. <br> Будь ласка, зв'яжіться з адміністратором вашого Сервера документів.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorDefaultMessage": "Код помилки: %1",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorFilePassProtect": "Документ захищений паролем і його неможливо відкрити.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorFileSizeExceed": "Розмір файлу перевищує обмеження, встановлені для вашого сервера. <br> Для детальної інформації зверніться до адміністратора сервера документів.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "Підключення до Інтернету було відновлено, а версія файлу змінена. <br> Перш ніж продовжувати роботу, потрібно завантажити файл або скопіювати його вміст, щоб переконатися, що нічого не втрачено, а потім перезавантажити цю сторінку.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.errorUserDrop": "На даний момент файл не доступний.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Застереження",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.scriptLoadError": "З'єднання занадто повільне, деякі компоненти не вдалося завантажити. Перезавантажте сторінку.",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.textLoadingDocument": "Завантаження документа",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.textOf": "з",
|
||||
"DE.ApplicationController.txtClose": "Закрити",
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -715,8 +715,8 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Bitte warten...",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "Die Applkation hat geringte Fähigkeiten in IE9. Nutzen Sie IE10 oder höher.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Die aktuelle Zoom-Einstellung Ihres Webbrowsers wird nicht völlig unterstützt. Bitte stellen Sie die Standardeinstellung mithilfe der Tastenkombination Strg+0 wieder her.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Ihre Lizenz ist abgelaufen.<br>Bitte aktualisieren Sie Ihre Lizenz und laden Sie die Seite neu.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Sie haben das Limit für gleichzeitige Verbindungen in %1-Editoren erreicht. Dieses Dokument wird nur zum Anzeigen geöffnet.<br>Bitte wenden Sie sich an Ihren Administrator, um weitere Informationen zu erhalten.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Ihre Lizenz ist abgelaufen.<br>Bitte aktualisieren Sie Ihre Lizenz und laden Sie die Seite neu.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Sie haben das Benutzerlimit für %1-Editoren erreicht. Bitte wenden Sie sich an Ihren Administrator, um weitere Informationen zu erhalten.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Sie haben das Limit für gleichzeitige Verbindungen in %1-Editoren erreicht. Dieses Dokument wird nur zum Anzeigen geöffnet.<br>Bitte kontaktieren Sie unser Verkaufsteam, um persönliche Upgrade-Bedingungen zu erhalten.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "Sie haben das Benutzerlimit für %1-Editoren erreicht. Bitte kontaktieren Sie unser Verkaufsteam, um persönliche Upgrade-Bedingungen zu erhalten.",
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -771,11 +771,11 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Please, wait...",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "The application has low capabilities on IE9. Use IE10 or higher",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Your browser current zoom setting is not fully supported. Please reset to the default zoom by pressing Ctrl+0.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only.<br>Contact your administrator to learn more.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Your license has expired.<br>Please update your license and refresh the page.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact your administrator to learn more.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only.<br>Contact %1 sales team for personal upgrade terms.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact %1 sales team for personal upgrade terms.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only.<br>Contact your administrator to learn more.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact your administrator to learn more.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnProcessRightsChange": "You have been denied the right to edit the file.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtBeginning": "Beginning of document",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtGotoBeginning": "Go to the beginning of the document",
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -80,6 +80,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "XY (Dispersión)",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textStock": "De cotizaciones",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "Superficie",
|
||||
"Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "El archivo está siendo editado en otra aplicación. Puede continuar editándolo y guardarlo como una copia.",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "Abril",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "Agosto",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "Diciembre",
|
||||
|
|
@ -156,6 +157,10 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Desarrollado por",
|
||||
"Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tel.: ",
|
||||
"Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Versión ",
|
||||
"Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textBy": "Por:",
|
||||
"Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textMathCorrect": "Autocorrección matemática",
|
||||
"Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textReplace": "Reemplazar:",
|
||||
"Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "Autocorrección",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Chat.textSend": "Enviar",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Comments.textAdd": "Añadir",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Comments.textAddComment": "Añadir",
|
||||
|
|
@ -358,11 +363,33 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textShowDate": "Presentar fecha de la firma",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Preparación de la firma",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "Este campo es obligatorio",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "Carácter",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCode": "Valor HEX de Unicode",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "Signo de Copyright",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDCQuote": "Comillas dobles de cierre",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDOQuote": "Comillas dobles de apertura",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEllipsis": "Elipsis horizontal",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmDash": "Guión largo",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmSpace": "Espacio largo",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnDash": "Guión corto",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnSpace": "Espacio corto",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "Letra ",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBHyphen": "Guión sin ruptura",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBSpace": "Espacio de no separación",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textPilcrow": "Signo de antígrafo",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textQEmSpace": "1/4 Espacio largo",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRange": "Rango",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRecent": "Símbolos utilizados recientemente",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRegistered": "Signo de marca registrada",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "Comillas simples de cierre",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSection": "Signo de sección",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textShortcut": "Tecla de método abreviado",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSHyphen": "Guión virtual",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSOQuote": "Comillas simples de apertura",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSpecial": "Caracteres especiales",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSymbols": "Símbolos",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTitle": "Símbolo",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTradeMark": "Símbolo de marca comercial",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Todos los cambios no guardados de este documento se perderán.<br> Pulse \"Cancelar\" después \"Guardar\" para guardarlos. Pulse \"OK\" para deshacer todos los cambios no guardados.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Documento sin título",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Aviso",
|
||||
|
|
@ -388,6 +415,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorAccessDeny": "Usted no tiene permisos para realizar la acción que está intentando hacer.<br> Por favor, contacte con el Administrador del Servidor de Documentos.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "URL de imagen es incorrecto",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "Se ha perdido la conexión con servidor. El documento no puede ser editado ahora.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorCompare": "La característica de comparación de documentos no está disponible durante la coedición.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "No se consiguió guardar el documento. Por favor, compruebe los ajustes de conexión o póngase en contacto con su administrador.<br>Al hacer clic en el botón 'OK' se le solicitará que descargue el documento.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "Error externo.<br>Error de conexión de base de datos. Por favor póngase en contacto con soporte si el error se mantiene.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataEncrypted": "Se han recibido cambios cifrados, ellos no pueden ser descifrados.",
|
||||
|
|
@ -404,6 +432,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyExpire": "Descriptor de clave ha expirado",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeLoadFile": "La carga del documento ha fallado. Por favor, seleccione un archivo diferente.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeSaveFile": "Error de fusión.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorPasteSlicerError": "Las segmentaciones de tabla no pueden ser copiadas de un libro a otro.<br>Inténtalo de nuevo al seleccionar toda la tabla y las segmentaciones.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorProcessSaveResult": "Problemas al guardar",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorServerVersion": "La versión del editor ha sido actualizada. La página será recargada para aplicar los cambios.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorSessionAbsolute": "Sesión de editar el documento ha expirado. Por favor, recargue la página.",
|
||||
|
|
@ -451,15 +480,20 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "El número de columnas debe ser menos que %1.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "El número de filas debe ser menos que %1.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Anónimo",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "Aplicar a todas las ecuaciones",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "Visitar sitio web",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "Todos los cambios son guardados",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Cerrar",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Pulse para cerrar el consejo",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Contactar con equipo de ventas",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textConvertEquation": "Esta ecuación fue creada con una versión antigua del editor de ecuaciones que ya no es compatible. Para editarla, convierta la ecuación al formato ML de Office Math.<br>¿Convertir ahora?",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textCustomLoader": "Note, por favor, que según los términos de la licencia Usted no tiene derecho a cambiar el cargador.<br>Por favor, póngase en contacto con nuestro Departamento de Ventas para obtener una cotización.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textHasMacros": "El archivo contiene macros automáticas.<br>¿Quiere ejecutar macros?",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textLearnMore": "Más información",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "Cargando documento",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "%1 limitación de conexiones",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "Se ha alcanzado el límite de licencias",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textPaidFeature": "Función de pago",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textRemember": "Recordar mi elección",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "Forma",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "Modo estricto",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "Las funciones Anular/Rehacer se desactivan para el modo co-edición rápido.<br>Haga Clic en el botón \"modo estricto\" para cambiar al modo de co-edición estricta para editar el archivo sin la interferencia de otros usuarios y enviar sus cambios sólo después de guardarlos. Se puede cambiar entre los modos de co-edición usando los ajustes avanzados de edición.",
|
||||
|
|
@ -479,6 +513,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Título de diagrama",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "Establecer el modo de edición...",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtEndOfFormula": "Fin de fórmula inesperado",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "Introducir una fecha",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "Historia de carga falló",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "Página par",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Formas de flecha",
|
||||
|
|
@ -698,6 +733,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableInd": "El índice de la tabla no puede ser cero",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableOfContents": "Tabla de contenidos",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtTooLarge": "El número es demasiado grande para darle formato",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtTypeEquation": "Escribir una ecuación aquí.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtUndefBookmark": "Marcador no definido",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtXAxis": "Eje X",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtYAxis": "Eje Y",
|
||||
|
|
@ -715,11 +751,11 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Por favor, espere...",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "Este aplicación tiene baja capacidad en IE9. Utilice IE10 o superior",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "La configuración actual de zoom de su navegador no está soportada por completo. Por favor restablezca zoom predeterminado pulsando Ctrl+0.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Se ha excedido el número permitido de las conexiones simultáneas al servidor de documentos, y el documento se abrirá para sólo lectura.<br>Por favor, contacte con su administrador para recibir más información.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Usted ha alcanzado el límite de conexiones simultáneas con %1 editores. Este documento se abrirá sólo para su visualización.<br>Por favor, contacte con su administrador para recibir más información.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Su licencia ha expirado.<br>Por favor, actualice su licencia y después recargue la página.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Se ha excedido el número permitido de los usuarios simultáneos, y el documento se abrirá para sólo lectura.<br>Por favor, contacte con su administrador para recibir más información.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Esta versión de los editores %1 tiene ciertas limitaciones para el número de conexiones simultáneas al servidor de documentos.<br>Si necesita más, por favor, considere comprar una licencia comercial.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "Esta versión de editores %1 tiene ciertas limitaciones para usuarios simultáneos.<br>Si necesita más, por favor, considere comprar una licencia comercial.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Usted ha alcanzado el límite de usuarios para los editores de %1. Por favor, contacte con su administrador para recibir más información.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Usted ha alcanzado el límite de conexiones simultáneas con %1 editores. Este documento se abrirá sólo para su visualización.<br>Contacte con el equipo de ventas de %1 para conocer los términos de actualización personal.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "Usted ha alcanzado el límite de usuarios para los editores de %1. Contacte con el equipo de ventas de %1 para conocer los términos de actualización personal.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnProcessRightsChange": "El derecho de edición del archivo es denegado",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtBeginning": "Principio del documento",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtGotoBeginning": "Ir al principio de",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1155,6 +1191,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "Cerrando",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "Título",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "Ninguno",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textPlaceholder": "Marcador de posición",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "Mostrar como",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "Sistema",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTag": "Etiqueta",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1169,6 +1206,12 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Divisor de columnas",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "Espacio entre columnas",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Columnas",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "Establecer formato predeterminado para {0}: \"{1}\"",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "Establecer como predeterminado",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "Formatos",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "Idioma",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textUpdate": "Actualizar automáticamente",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "Fecha y hora",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Arriba",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Añadir comentario",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "Ajustes avanzados de marco",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1258,6 +1301,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipV": "Voltear verticalmente",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFollow": "Seguir movimiento",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "De archivo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "Desde almacenamiento",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "De URL",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "Juntar con lista anterior",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNest": "Tabla nido",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1484,8 +1528,8 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEditWarning": "La edición eliminará",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEncrypted": "Este documento ha sido",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtRequestedSignatures": "Este documento necesita",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSigned": "Las firmas válidas han sido",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSignedInvalid": "Algunos de los digitales",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSigned": "Se han añadido firmas válidas al documento. El documento está protegido frente a la edición.",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSignedInvalid": "Algunas de las firmas digitales del documento no son válidas o no han podido ser verificadas. El documento está protegido frente a la edición.",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtView": "Ver firmas",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.okButtonText": "Aplicar",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAlignGuides": "Activar guías de alineación",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1499,6 +1543,9 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strForcesave": "Siempre guardar en el servidor (de lo contrario guardar en el servidor al cerrar documento)",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strInputMode": "Activar jeroglíficos",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strLiveComment": "Activar opción de demostración de comentarios",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strMacrosSettings": "Ajustes de macros",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPaste": "Cortar, copiar y pegar",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPasteButton": "Mostrar el botón Opciones de pegado cuando se pegue contenido",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strResolvedComment": "Activar la visualización de los comentarios resueltos",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowChanges": "Cambios de colaboración en tiempo real",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strSpellCheckMode": "Activar corrección ortográfica",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1518,6 +1565,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Cada minuto",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textOldVersions": "Hacer que los archivos sean compatibles con versiones anteriores de MS Word cuando se guarden como DOCX",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "Ver todo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "Opciones de autocorrección",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "Modo de caché predeterminado",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "Centímetro",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitPage": "Ajustar a la página",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1529,8 +1577,15 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtMac": "como OS X",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "Nativo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "Ver Ningunos",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtProofing": "Revisión",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "Punto",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacros": "Habilitar todo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "Habilitar todas las macros sin notificación ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "Сorrección ortográfica",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacros": "Deshabilitar todo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacrosDesc": "Deshabilitar todas las macros sin notificación",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacros": "Mostrar notificación",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "Deshabilitar todas las macros con notificación",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "como Windows",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "Inferior centro",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "Inferior izquierdo",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1573,6 +1628,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitMargins": "Ajustar al margen",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFlip": "Volteo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "De archivo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromStorage": "Desde almacenamiento",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "De URL",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "Altura",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint270": "Girar 90° a la izquierda",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1603,6 +1659,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Ángulo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Flechas",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAspectRatio": "Bloquear relación de aspecto",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Autoajustar",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Tamaño inicial",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "Estilo inicial",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "abajo",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1640,6 +1697,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textPositionPc": "Posición Relativa",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelative": "en relación a",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelativeWH": "Relativo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textResizeFit": "Ajustar tamaño de la forma al texto",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRight": "Derecho",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightMargin": "Margen derecho",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightOf": "a la derecha de",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1648,6 +1706,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textShape": "Ajustes de forma",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSize": "Tamaño",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSquare": "Cuadrado",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTextBox": "Cuadro de texto",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Imagen - Ajustes avanzados",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleChart": "Gráfico- Ajustes avanzados",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleShape": "Forma - ajustes avanzados",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1924,6 +1983,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "Sin patrón",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFlip": "Volteo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "De archivo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromStorage": "Desde almacenamiento",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "De URL",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradient": "Gradiente",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Relleno degradado",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1938,6 +1998,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Radial",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotate90": "Girar 90°",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotation": "Rotación",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectImage": "Seleccionar imagen",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectTexture": "Seleccionar",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStretch": "Estirar",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStyle": "Estilo",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1977,8 +2038,8 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtContinueEditing": "Editar de todas maneras",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtEditWarning": "La edición eliminará",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtRequestedSignatures": "Este documento necesita",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSigned": "Las firmas válidas han sido",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSignedInvalid": "Algunos de los digitales",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSigned": "Se han añadido firmas válidas al documento. El documento está protegido frente a la edición.",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSignedInvalid": "Algunas de las firmas digitales del documento no son válidas o no han podido ser verificadas. El documento está protegido frente a la edición.",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Statusbar.goToPageText": "Ir a página",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Statusbar.pageIndexText": "Página {0} de {1}",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitPage": "Ajustar a la página",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2168,6 +2229,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "Página en blanco",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Columnas",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Comentario",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Fecha y hora",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Diagram",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "Controles de contenido",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "Quitar capitlización",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2246,7 +2308,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textPictureControl": "Imagen",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textPlainControl": "Texto sin formato",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textPortrait": "Vertical",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemoveControl": "Elimine el control de contenido",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemoveControl": "Eliminar control de contenido",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemWatermark": "Quitar marca de agua",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textRichControl": "Texto enriquecido",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textRight": "Derecho: ",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2284,6 +2346,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipControls": "Insertar controles de contenido",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopy": "Copiar",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopyStyle": "Copiar estilo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDateTime": "Insertar la fecha y hora actuales",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecFont": "Reducir tamaño de letra",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecPrLeft": "Reducir sangría",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDropCap": "Insertar letra capital",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2360,6 +2423,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": "Diagonal",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "Fuente",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "De archivo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromStorage": "Desde almacenamiento",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "De URL",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textHor": "Horizontal ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textImageW": "Marca de agua de imagen",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2369,6 +2433,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Color personalizado",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNone": "Ninguno",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textScale": "Escala",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textSelect": "Seleccionar Imagen",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textStrikeout": "Tachado",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textText": "Texto",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTextW": "Marca de agua de texto",
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -80,6 +80,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "Nuages de points (XY)",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textStock": "Boursier",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "Surface",
|
||||
"Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "Ce fichier a été modifié avec une autre application. Vous pouvez continuer à le modifier et l'enregistrer comme une copi.",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "avril",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "août",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "décembre",
|
||||
|
|
@ -113,6 +114,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "mar.",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "mer.",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textYears": "années",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Couleur personnalisée",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Pas de bordures",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Pas de bordures",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "Aucun style",
|
||||
|
|
@ -127,7 +129,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.UI.SearchDialog.textReplaceDef": "Saisissez le texte de remplacement",
|
||||
"Common.UI.SearchDialog.textSearchStart": "Entrez votre texte ici",
|
||||
"Common.UI.SearchDialog.textTitle": "Rechercher et remplacer",
|
||||
"Common.UI.SearchDialog.textTitle2": "Trouver",
|
||||
"Common.UI.SearchDialog.textTitle2": "Rechercher",
|
||||
"Common.UI.SearchDialog.textWholeWords": "Seulement les mots entiers",
|
||||
"Common.UI.SearchDialog.txtBtnHideReplace": "Cacher Remplacer",
|
||||
"Common.UI.SearchDialog.txtBtnReplace": "Remplacer",
|
||||
|
|
@ -155,6 +157,9 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Powered by",
|
||||
"Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tél.: ",
|
||||
"Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Version ",
|
||||
"Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textBy": "Par:",
|
||||
"Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textReplace": "Remplacer:",
|
||||
"Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "Correction automatique",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Chat.textSend": "Envoyer",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Comments.textAdd": "Ajouter",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Comments.textAddComment": "Ajouter",
|
||||
|
|
@ -357,10 +362,21 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textShowDate": "Afficher la date de signature à côté de la signature",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Mise en place de la signature",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "Ce champ est obligatoire.",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "Caractère",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCode": "Valeur hexadécimale Unicode",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "Signe Copyright",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDCQuote": "Fermer les guillemets",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDOQuote": "Ouvrir les guillemets",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "Police",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBHyphen": "tiret insécable",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBSpace": "Espace insécable",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRange": "Plage",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRecent": "Caractères spéciaux récemment utilisés",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRegistered": "Signe 'Registred'",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "Fermer l'apostrophe",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSection": "Signe de Section ",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSOQuote": "Ouvrir l'apostrophe",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSpecial": "symboles spéciaux",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTitle": "Symbole",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Toutes les modifications non enregistrées dans ce document seront perdus.<br> Cliquez sur \"Annuler\", puis \"Enregistrer\" pour les sauver. Cliquez sur \"OK\" pour annuler toutes les modifications non enregistrées.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Document sans nom",
|
||||
|
|
@ -408,7 +424,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorSessionAbsolute": "Votre session a expiré. Veuillez recharger la page.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorSessionIdle": "Le document n'a pas été modifié depuis trop longtemps. Veuillez recharger la page.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorSessionToken": "La connexion au serveur a été interrompue. Veuillez recharger la page.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorStockChart": "Ordre des lignes est incorrect. Pour créer un graphique boursier organisez vos données sur la feuille de calcul dans l'ordre suivant:<br> cours à l'ouverture, cours maximal, cours minimal, cours à la clôture.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorStockChart": "Ordre lignes incorrect. Pour créer un diagramme boursier, positionnez les données sur la feuille de calcul dans l'ordre suivant :<br>cours à l'ouverture, cours maximal, cours minimal, cours à la clôture.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorToken": "Le jeton de sécurité du document n’était pas formé correctement.<br>Veuillez contacter l'administrateur de Document Server.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorTokenExpire": "Le jeton de sécurité du document a expiré.<br>Veuillez contactez l'administrateur de votre Document Server.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorUpdateVersion": "La version du fichier a été changée. La page sera rechargée.",
|
||||
|
|
@ -450,15 +466,18 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "Le nombre de colonnes doivent être inférieure à %1.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "Le nombre de lignes doit être inférieure à %1.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Anonyme",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "Appliquer à toutes les équations",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "Visiter le site web",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "Toutes les modifications ont été enregistrées",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Fermer",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Cliquez pour fermer le conseil",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Contacter l'équipe de ventes",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textCustomLoader": "Veuillez noter que conformément aux clauses du contrat de licence vous n'êtes pas autorisé à changer le chargeur.<br>Veuillez contacter notre Service des Ventes pour obtenir le devis.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textLearnMore": "En savoir plus",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "Chargement du document",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "La limite de la licence est atteinte",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textPaidFeature": "Fonction payée",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textRemember": "Se souvenir de mon choix",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "Forme",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "Mode strict",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "Les fonctions annuler/rétablir sont désactivées pour le mode de co-édition rapide.<br>Cliquez sur le bouton \"Mode strict\" pour passer au mode de la co-édition stricte pour modifier le fichier sans interférence d'autres utilisateurs et envoyer vos modifications seulement après que vous les enregistrez. Vous pouvez basculer entre les modes de co-édition à l'aide de paramètres avancés d'éditeur.",
|
||||
|
|
@ -478,6 +497,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Titre du graphique",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "Définissez le mode d'édition...",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtEndOfFormula": "Fin de Formule Inattendue.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "Entrer une date.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "Chargement de histoire a échoué",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "Page paire",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Flèches figurées",
|
||||
|
|
@ -714,8 +734,8 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Veuillez patienter...",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "L'application est peu compatible avec IE9. Utilisez IE10 ou version plus récente",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Le paramètre actuel de zoom de votre navigateur n'est pas accepté. Veuillez rétablir le niveau de zoom par défaut en appuyant sur Ctrl+0.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Votre licence a expiré.<br>Veuillez mettre à jour votre licence et actualisez la page.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Vous avez dépassé le nombre maximal de connexions simultanées aux éditeurs %1. Ce document sera ouvert à la lecture seulement.<br>Contactez votre administrateur pour en savoir davantage.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Votre licence a expiré.<br>Veuillez mettre à jour votre licence et actualisez la page.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Vous avez dépassé le nombre maximal d’utilisateurs des éditeurs %1. Contactez votre administrateur pour en savoir davantage.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Vous avez dépassé le nombre maximal de connexions simultanées aux éditeurs %1. Ce document sera ouvert à la lecture seulement.<br>Contactez l’équipe des ventes %1 pour mettre à jour les termes de la licence.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "Vous avez dépassé le nombre maximal d’utilisateurs des éditeurs %1. Contactez l’équipe des ventes %1 pour mettre à jour les termes de la licence.",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1168,6 +1188,11 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Diviseur de colonne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "Espacement entre les colonnes",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Colonnes",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "Définir par défaut",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "Formats",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "Langue",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textUpdate": "Mettre à jour automatiquement",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "Date et heure",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Au-dessus",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Ajouter un commentaire",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "Paramètres avancés du cadre",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1257,6 +1282,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipV": "Retourner verticalement",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFollow": "Suivre le mouvement",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "D'un fichier",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "A partir de l'espace de stockage",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "D'une URL",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "Rejoindre la liste précédente. ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNest": "Tableau imbriqué",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1498,6 +1524,8 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strForcesave": "Toujours enregistrer sur le serveur ( sinon enregistrer sur le serveur lors de la fermeture du document )",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strInputMode": "Activer des hiéroglyphes",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strLiveComment": "Activer l'affichage des commentaires",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strMacrosSettings": "Réglages macros",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPaste": "Couper,copier et coller",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strResolvedComment": "Activer l'affichage des commentaires résolus",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowChanges": "Visibilité des modifications en co-édition",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strSpellCheckMode": "Activer la vérification de l'orthographe",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1517,6 +1545,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Chaque minute",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textOldVersions": "Rendre les fichiers compatibles avec les anciennes versions de MS Word lorsqu'ils sont enregistrés au format DOCX",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "Surligner toutes les modifications",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "Options de correction automatique",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "Mise en cache par défaut",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "Centimètre",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitPage": "Ajuster à la page",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1529,7 +1558,11 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "Natif",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "Surligner aucune modification",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "Point",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "Activer toutes les macros sans notification",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "Vérification de l'orthographe",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacros": "Désactiver tout",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacrosDesc": "Désactiver toutes les macros sans notification",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "Désactiver toutes les macros avec notification",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "comme Windows",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "En bas au centre",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "En bas à gauche",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1572,6 +1605,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitMargins": "Ajuster aux marges",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFlip": "Retournement",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "Depuis un fichier",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromStorage": "A partir de l'espace de stockage",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "D'une URL",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "Hauteur",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint270": "Faire pivoter à gauche de 90°",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1639,6 +1673,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textPositionPc": "Position relative",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelative": "par rapport à",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelativeWH": "Relatif",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textResizeFit": "Redimensionner la forme pour contenir le texte",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRight": "A droite",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightMargin": "Marge droite",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightOf": "à droite de",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1647,6 +1682,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textShape": "Paramètres de la forme",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSize": "Taille",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSquare": "Carré",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTextBox": "Zone de texte",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Image - Paramètres avancés",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleChart": "Graphique - Paramètres avancés",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleShape": "Forme - Paramètres avancés",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1923,6 +1959,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "Pas de modèles",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFlip": "Retournement",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "Depuis un fichier",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromStorage": "A partir de l'espace de stockage",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "D'une URL",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradient": "Dégradé",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Remplissage en dégradé",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1937,6 +1974,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Radial",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotate90": "Faire pivoter de 90°",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotation": "Rotation",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectImage": "Sélectionner l'image",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectTexture": "Sélectionner",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStretch": "Étirement",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStyle": "Style",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2166,6 +2204,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "Page Blanche ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Colonnes",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Commentaire",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Date et heure",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Graphique",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "Contrôles de contenu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "Lettrine",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2235,7 +2274,6 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsUsNormal": "US normale",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsWide": "Large",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "Couleur personnalisée",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Couleur personnalisée",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textNextPage": "Page suivante",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textNoHighlight": "Pas de surbrillance ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textNone": "Aucune",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2283,6 +2321,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipControls": "Insérer des contrôles de contenu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopy": "Copier",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopyStyle": "Copier le style",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDateTime": "Inserer la date et l'heure actuelle",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecFont": "Réduire la taille de la police",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecPrLeft": "Réduire le retrait",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDropCap": "Insérer une lettrine",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2359,6 +2398,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": "Diagonale",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "Police",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "Depuis un fichier",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromStorage": "A partir de l'espace de stockage",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "D'une URL",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textHor": "Horizontal",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textImageW": "Image en filigrane",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2368,6 +2408,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Couleur personnalisée",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNone": "Aucun",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textScale": "Échelle",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textSelect": "Sélectionner une image",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textStrikeout": "Barré",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textText": "Texte",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTextW": "Filigrane de texte",
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -750,8 +750,8 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Per favore, attendi...",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "L'applicazione è poco compatibile con IE9. Usa IE10 o più recente",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Le impostazioni correnti di zoom del tuo browser non sono completamente supportate. Per favore, ritorna allo zoom predefinito premendo Ctrl+0.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "La tua licenza è scaduta.<br>Si prega di aggiornare la licenza e ricaricare la pagina.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Hai raggiunto il limite per le connessioni simultanee agli editor %1. Questo documento verrà aperto in sola lettura.<br>Contatta l’amministratore per saperne di più.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "La tua licenza è scaduta.<br>Si prega di aggiornare la licenza e ricaricare la pagina.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Hai raggiunto il limite per gli utenti con accesso agli editor %1. Contatta l’amministratore per saperne di più.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Hai raggiunto il limite per le connessioni simultanee agli editor %1. Questo documento verrà aperto in sola lettura.<br>Contatta il team di vendita di %1 per i termini di aggiornamento personali.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "Hai raggiunto il limite per gli utenti con accesso agli editor %1. Contatta il team di vendita di %1 per i termini di aggiornamento personali.",
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -80,7 +80,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "点グラフ",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textStock": "株価チャート",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "表面",
|
||||
"Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "文書が別のアプリで使用されています。編集を続けて、コピーとして保存しますか。",
|
||||
"Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "文書が別のアプリで使用されています。編集を続けて、コピーとして保存できます。",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "四月",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "八月",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "十二月",
|
||||
|
|
@ -113,6 +113,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortThursday": "木",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "火",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "水",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textYears": "年",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "カスタム色を追加",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "罫線なし",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "罫線なし",
|
||||
|
|
@ -194,15 +195,20 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.Header.textCompactView": "ツールバーを隠す",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.textHideLines": "ルーラを隠す",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.textHideStatusBar": "ステータス・バーを隠す",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.textSaveBegin": "保存中",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.textSaveChanged": "更新された",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.textSaveEnd": "変更が保存された",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.textSaveExpander": "変更が保存された",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.textZoom": "拡大図",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.tipAccessRights": "文書のアクセス許可のの管理",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.tipDownload": "ファイルをダウンロード",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.tipGoEdit": "現在のファイルを編集する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.tipPrint": "印刷",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.tipRedo": "やり直す",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.tipSave": "保存する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.tipUndo": "元に戻す",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.tipViewSettings": "設定の表示",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.tipViewUsers": "ユーザーの表示と文書のアクセス権の管理",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.txtAccessRights": "アクセス権限の変更",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.txtRename": "名前の変更",
|
||||
"Common.Views.History.textCloseHistory": "履歴を閉じる",
|
||||
|
|
@ -210,6 +216,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.History.textHideAll": "詳細な変更を隠す",
|
||||
"Common.Views.History.textRestore": "復元する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.History.textShow": "展開する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.History.textShowAll": "詳細な変更を表示する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.textUrl": "画像URLの貼り付け",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.txtEmpty": "このフィールドは必須項目です",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.txtNotUrl": "このフィールドは「http://www.example.com」の形式のURLである必要があります。",
|
||||
|
|
@ -219,20 +226,26 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtMinText": "このフィールドの最小値は{0}です。",
|
||||
"Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtRows": "行数",
|
||||
"Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtTitle": "表のサイズ",
|
||||
"Common.Views.LanguageDialog.labelSelect": "文書の言語を選択する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.OpenDialog.closeButtonText": "ファイルを閉じる",
|
||||
"Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtEncoding": "エンコード",
|
||||
"Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "パスワードが正しくありません。",
|
||||
"Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtPassword": "パスワード",
|
||||
"Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtPreview": "下見",
|
||||
"Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtProtected": "パスワードを入力してファイルを開くと、ファイルの既存のパスワードがリセットされます。",
|
||||
"Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtTitle": "%1オプションの選択",
|
||||
"Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtTitleProtected": "保護ファイル",
|
||||
"Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtDescription": "この文書を保護するためのパスワードを設定してください",
|
||||
"Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "先に入力したパスワードと一致しません。",
|
||||
"Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtPassword": "パスワード",
|
||||
"Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtRepeat": "パスワードを再入力",
|
||||
"Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtTitle": "パスワードの設定",
|
||||
"Common.Views.PluginDlg.textLoading": "読み込み中",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Plugins.groupCaption": "プラグイン",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Plugins.strPlugins": "プラグイン",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Plugins.textLoading": "読み込み中",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Plugins.textStart": "スタート",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Plugins.textStop": "停止",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.hintAddPwd": "パスワードを使用して暗号化",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.hintPwd": "パスワードを変更か削除する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.hintSignature": "デジタル署名かデジタル署名行を追加",
|
||||
|
|
@ -241,6 +254,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.Protection.txtDeletePwd": "パスワード削除",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.txtEncrypt": "暗号化する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.txtInvisibleSignature": "デジタル署名を追加",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.txtSignature": "サイン",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.txtSignatureLine": "署名欄の追加",
|
||||
"Common.Views.RenameDialog.textName": "ファイル名",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.hintNext": "次の変更箇所",
|
||||
|
|
@ -249,12 +263,18 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromUrl": "URLからの文書",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniSettings": "比較設定",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strFast": "ファスト",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strFastDesc": "リアルタイムの共同編集です。すべての変更は自動的に保存されます。",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipAcceptCurrent": "今の変更を反映する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCoAuthMode": "共同編集モードを設定する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentRem": "コメントを削除する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentRemCurrent": "現在のコメントを削除する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCompare": "現在の文書を別の文書と比較する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipHistory": "バージョン履歴を表示する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipRejectCurrent": "現在の変更を元に戻します。",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipReview": "変更履歴",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipReviewView": "変更を表示するモードを選択してください",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipSetDocLang": "文書の言語を設定する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipSetSpelling": "スペル チェック",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipSharing": "文書のアクセス許可のの管理",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAccept": "同意する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptAll": "すべての変更を反映する",
|
||||
|
|
@ -272,6 +292,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtDocLang": "言語",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinal": "変更は承認",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinalCap": "最終版",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtHistory": "バージョン履歴",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtMarkup": "全ての変更（編集）",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtMarkupCap": "マークアップ",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtNext": "次の変更箇所",
|
||||
|
|
@ -282,6 +303,8 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtRejectAll": "すべての変更を元に戻す",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtRejectChanges": "変更を拒否する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtRejectCurrent": "現在の変更を元に戻します。",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtSharing": "共有する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtSpelling": "スペル チェック",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtTurnon": "変更履歴",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtView": "表示モード",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.textTitle": "変更の確認",
|
||||
|
|
@ -306,19 +329,28 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.SaveAsDlg.textLoading": "読み込み中",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SaveAsDlg.textTitle": "保存先のフォルダ",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SelectFileDlg.textLoading": "読み込み中",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SelectFileDlg.textTitle": "データ・ソースを選択する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.textBold": "太字",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.textCertificate": "証明書",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.textChange": "変更する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.textInputName": "署名者の名前を入力",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.textItalic": "斜体",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.textPurpose": "この文書にサインする目的",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.textSelect": "選択",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.textSelectImage": "画像を選択する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.textSignature": "署名は次のようになります",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.textTitle": "文書のサイン",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.textUseImage": "または画像を署名として使用するため、「画像の選択」をクリックしてください",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.tipFontName": "フォント名",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.tipFontSize": "フォントのサイズ",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textAllowComment": " 署名者が署名ダイアログにコメントを追加できるようにする",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfo": "署名者情報",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoEmail": "メール",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoName": "名前",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoTitle": "署名者の役職",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInstructions": "署名者への説明",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textShowDate": "署名欄に署名日を表示する",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "署名の設定",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "文字",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "著作権マーク",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDCQuote": "閉じ二重引用符",
|
||||
|
|
@ -337,7 +369,10 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRecent": "最近使用した記号",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRegistered": "商標記号",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "閉じ一重引用符",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSection": "節記号",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textShortcut": "ショートカットキー",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSOQuote": "開始単一引用符",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSpecial": "特殊文字",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSymbols": "記号",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTitle": "記号",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTradeMark": "商標記号",
|
||||
|
|
@ -361,6 +396,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.downloadMergeTitle": "ダウンロード中",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTextText": "ドキュメントのダウンロード中...",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTitleText": "ドキュメントのダウンロード中",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorAccessDeny": "権限のない操作をしようとしています。<br>ドキュメント・サーバー管理者に連絡してください。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "画像のURLが正しくありません",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "サーバーとの接続が失われました。今、文書を編集することができません。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "文書を保存できませんでした。接続設定を確認するか、管理者にお問い合わせください。<br>OKボタンをクリックするとドキュメントをダウンロードするように求められます。",
|
||||
|
|
@ -372,7 +408,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingDownloadas": "文書の処理中にエラーが発生しました。<br>PCにファイルのバックアップを保存するように「としてダウンロード」を使用してください。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingSaveas": "文書の処理中にエラーが発生しました。<br>PCにファイルのバックアップを保存するように「名前を付けて保存」を使用してください。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorEmailClient": "メールクライアントが見つかりませんでした。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorFilePassProtect": "ドキュメントがパスワードで保護されているため開くことができません",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorFilePassProtect": "文書がパスワードで保護されているため開くことができません",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorForceSave": "文書の保存中にエラーが発生しました。PCにファイルを保存するように「としてダウンロード」を使用し、または後で再試行してください。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyEncrypt": "不明なキーの記述子",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyExpire": "署名キーは期限切れました。",
|
||||
|
|
@ -419,10 +455,12 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "行数は%1より小さくなければなりません。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "匿名",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "全ての数式に適用する",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "ウェブサイトを訪問する",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "変更が保存された",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "閉じる",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "ヒントを閉じるためにクリックください",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "営業部を連絡する",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textCustomLoader": "ライセンスの条件によっては、ローダーを変更する権利がないことにご注意ください。<br>見積もりについては、営業部門にお問い合わせください。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textLearnMore": "詳細はこちら",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "ドキュメントを読み込んでいます",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "%1 接続の制限",
|
||||
|
|
@ -485,6 +523,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonInformation": "［情報］ボタン",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonMovie": "［ムービー］ボタン",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonReturn": "［戻る］ボタン",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonSound": "音のボタン",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_arc": "円弧",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentArrow": "曲げ矢印",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentConnector5": "カギ線コネクタ",
|
||||
|
|
@ -605,6 +644,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_round2SameRect": "同じ辺の角を丸める矩形",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_roundRect": "角丸四角形",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rtTriangle": "直角三角形",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_smileyFace": "絵文字",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_spline": "曲線",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star10": "十芒星",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star12": "十二芒星",
|
||||
|
|
@ -617,11 +657,14 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star7": "七芒星",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star8": "八芒星",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_sun": "太陽形",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_textRect": "テキストボックス",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_trapezoid": "台形",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_triangle": "三角形",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_upArrow": "上矢印",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_upArrowCallout": "上矢印吹き出し",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_upDownArrow": "上下の矢印",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_verticalScroll": "縦スクロール",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_wave": "波",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_wedgeEllipseCallout": "円形吹き出し",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_wedgeRectCallout": "長方形の吹き出し",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_wedgeRoundRectCallout": "角丸長方形の吹き出し",
|
||||
|
|
@ -643,11 +686,14 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Normal": "正常",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Quote": "引用",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Subtitle": "小見出し",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Title": "タイトル",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtSyntaxError": "構文間違い",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableOfContents": "目次",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtTooLarge": "数値が大きすぎて書式設定できません。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtTypeEquation": "こちらで数式を入力してください",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtXAxis": "X 軸",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtYAxis": "Y 軸",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtZeroDivide": "ゼロ除算",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.unknownErrorText": "不明なエラー",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "お使いのブラウザがサポートされていません。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.uploadDocFileCountMessage": "アップロードされた文書がありません",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1018,6 +1064,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textHidden": "隠しブックマーク",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textLocation": "位置",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textName": "名前",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textSort": "並べ替え",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textTitle": "ブックマーク",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.txtInvalidName": "ブックマーク名には、文字、数字、アンダースコアのみを使用でき、先頭は文字である必要があります",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAdd": "ラベルを追加",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1032,20 +1079,24 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textEquation": "数式",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textExamples": " 例：表 2-A 、図 1.IV",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textExclude": "ラベルを図表番号から除外する",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textFigure": "図",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textFigure": "図形",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textHyphen": "ハイフン",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textInsert": "挿入する",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textLabel": "ラベル",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textLongDash": "長いダッシュ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textNumbering": "番号付け",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textPeriod": "期間",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textTable": "表",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textTitle": "図表番号の挿入",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textCol": "列",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textDown": "カーソルより下",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textLeft": "左に",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textRight": "右に",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textRow": "行",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textTitle": "複数を挿入する",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textUp": "カーソルより上",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textCol": "列全体を削除",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textLeft": "左方向にシフト",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textRow": "行全体を削除",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textTitle": "セルを削除する",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.textAdvanced": "詳細設定の表示",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1067,6 +1118,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTitle": "グラフ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTopAndBottom": "上と下",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textChar": "文字レベル",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textShow": "変更を表示する",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textTitle": "比較設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.strGeneral": "一般的",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAdd": "追加",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1086,8 +1138,12 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textFormat": "日付の表示形式",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "言語",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "ロック",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "タイトル",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "なし",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textPlaceholder": "プレースホルダ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "として示す",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "システム",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTag": "タグ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTitle": "コンテンツ コントロール設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textUnchecked": "［チェックしない］記号",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textUp": "上",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1098,6 +1154,8 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "列の区切り線",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "列の間隔",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "列",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "{0}に既定の形式を設定：\"{1}\"",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "既定に設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "形式",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "言語",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textUpdate": "自動的に更新",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1124,7 +1182,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.direct270Text": "270度回転",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.direct90Text": "90度回転",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.directHText": "水平",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.directionText": "文字の方向",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.directionText": "文字列の方向",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.editChartText": "データ バーの編集",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.editFooterText": "フッターの編集",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.editHeaderText": "ヘッダーの編集",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1164,6 +1222,9 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.splitCellsText": "セルの分割...",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.splitCellTitleText": "セルの分割",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.strDelete": "署名の削除",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.strDetails": "サインの詳細",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.strSetup": "署名の設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.strSign": "サイン",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.styleText": "スタイルようにフォーマッティングする",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.tableText": "テーブル",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textAlign": "整列",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1203,12 +1264,17 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate": "回転させる",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate270": "逆時計方向に90度回転",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate90": "時計方向に90度回転",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSeparateList": "リストの分離",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSettings": "設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSeveral": "複数の行/列",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignBottom": "下揃え",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignCenter": "中央揃え",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignLeft": "左揃え",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignMiddle": "上下中央揃え",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignRight": "右揃え",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignTop": "上揃え",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textStartNewList": "新しいリストを開始する",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textStartNumberingFrom": "計数値の設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textTOC": "目次",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textTOCSettings": "目次設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUndo": "元に戻す",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1401,9 +1467,13 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtBtnAccessRights": "アクセス許可の変更",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtRights": "権利を持っている者",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strEncrypt": "パスワードを使って",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strProtect": "文書を保護",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strSignature": "サインを使って",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEdit": "文書を編集する",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEditWarning": "編集すると、文書から署名が削除されます。<br>続行しますか？",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSignedInvalid": "文書のデジタル署名の一部が無効であるか、検証できませんでした。 文書は編集できないように保護されています。",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtView": "署名の表示",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.okButtonText": "適用",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAlignGuides": "配置ガイドターンにします。",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAutoRecover": "自動バックアップをターンにします。",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1432,11 +1502,12 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoSave": "自動保存",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textCompatible": "互換性",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textDisabled": "無効",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textForceSave": "サーバーに保存する",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "1 分ごと",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textOldVersions": " DOCXとして保存する場合は、MS Wordの古いバージョンと互換性のあるファイルにします",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "全ての表示",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "オートコレクト設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "規定のキャッシュ モード",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "既定のキャッシュ モード",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "センチ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitPage": "ページに合わせる",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitWidth": "幅を合わせる",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1454,6 +1525,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "スペル チェック",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacros": "全てを無効にする",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacrosDesc": "マクロを無効にして、通知しない",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacros": "通知を表示する",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "マクロを無効にして、通知する",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "Windowsのような",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "左下",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1462,6 +1534,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomRight": "右下",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textDiffFirst": "先頭ページのみ別指定\t",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textDiffOdd": "奇数/偶数ページ別指定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textFrom": "から始まる",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textHeaderFromBottom": "下からのフッター位置",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textHeaderFromTop": "上からのヘッダー位置",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textInsertCurrent": "現在の位置に挿入",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1522,6 +1595,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "整列",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "代替テキスト",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "説明",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "タイトル",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "角",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "矢印",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAspectRatio": "縦横比の一定",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1572,12 +1646,15 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textShape": "図形の設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSize": "サイズ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSquare": "四角の",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTextBox": "テキストボックス",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "画像 - 詳細設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleChart": "グラフー詳細設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleShape": "図形 - 詳細設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTop": "トップ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTopMargin": "上余白",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textVertical": "縦",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textVertically": "縦に",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWeightArrows": "線&矢印",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWidth": "幅",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWrap": "折り返しの種類と配置",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWrapBehindTooltip": "背面",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1608,6 +1685,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Links.mniInsFootnote": "フットノートの挿入",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.mniNoteSettings": "ノートの設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.textContentsRemove": "目次の削除",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.textContentsSettings": "設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.textGotoFootnote": "脚注へ移動",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.textUpdateAll": "テーブル全体の更新",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.textUpdatePages": "ページ番号の変更のみ",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1630,6 +1708,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtLikeText": "テキストのように",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNewBullet": "新しい行頭文字",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "なし",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSize": "サイズ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSymbol": "記号",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTitle": "リストの設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtType": "タイプ",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1694,6 +1773,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textApplyTo": "変更適用",
|
||||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textContinue": "継続的",
|
||||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textCustom": "ユーザー設定のマーク",
|
||||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textDocument": "全ての文書",
|
||||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textEachPage": "ページごとに振り直し",
|
||||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textEachSection": "セクションごとに振り直し",
|
||||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textFootnote": "脚注",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1704,6 +1784,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textNumFormat": "数の書式",
|
||||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textPageBottom": "ページの下部",
|
||||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textSection": "現在のセクション",
|
||||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textStart": "から始まる",
|
||||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textTextBottom": "テキストより下",
|
||||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textTitle": "ノートの設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1819,6 +1900,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.RightMenu.txtMailMergeSettings": "差し込み印刷の設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.RightMenu.txtParagraphSettings": "段落の設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.RightMenu.txtShapeSettings": "図形の設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.RightMenu.txtSignatureSettings": "サインの設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "表の設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "テキストアートの設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "背景色",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1827,6 +1909,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "塗りつぶし",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "前景色",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strPattern": "パターン",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strShadow": "影を表示する",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strSize": "サイズ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strStroke": "画数",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strTransparency": "不透明度",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1853,6 +1936,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "放射状",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotate90": "90度回転",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotation": "回転",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectImage": "画像の選択",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectTexture": "選択",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStretch": "ストレッチ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStyle": "スタイル",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1880,10 +1964,16 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtWood": "木",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strDelete": "署名の削除",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strDetails": "署名の詳細",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strInvalid": "不正な署名",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strRequested": "必要な署名",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strSetup": "署名の設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strSign": "サイン",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strSignature": "サイン",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strSigner": "署名者",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtContinueEditing": "無視して編集する",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtEditWarning": "編集すると、文書から署名が削除されます。<br>続行しますか？",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSignedInvalid": "文書のデジタル署名の一部が無効であるか、検証できませんでした。 文書は編集できないように保護されています。",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Statusbar.goToPageText": "ページに移動",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Statusbar.pageIndexText": "{1}から{0}ページ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitPage": "ページに合わせる",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1912,11 +2002,16 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textLevels": "レベル",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textNone": "なし",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textRadioLevels": "アウトライン・レベル",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textRadioStyles": "選択されたスタイル",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textStyle": "スタイル",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textStyles": "スタイル",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textTitle": "目次",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtClassic": "クラシック",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtCurrent": "現在",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtModern": "現代",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtOnline": "オンライン",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtSimple": "簡単な",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtStandard": "標準",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteColumnText": "列の削除",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteRowText": "行の削除",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteTableText": "表の削除",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1952,6 +2047,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "選択したスタイルを適用する罫線を選択してください。 ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "テンプレートから選択する",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textTotal": "合計",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textWidth": "幅",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.tipAll": "外部の罫線と全ての内部の線",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.tipBottom": "外部の罫線（下）だけを設定します。",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.tipInner": "内部の線だけを設定します。",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1975,6 +2071,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "セルの間隔を指定する",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "代替テキスト",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "説明",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "タイトル",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "テキスト",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "自動的にセルのサイズを変更する",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "セルの背景色",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2073,12 +2170,18 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsPagebreak": "区切り",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsShape": "図形",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsSymbol": "記号",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsTable": "表",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsTextart": "ワードアート",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsTextbox": "テキストボックス",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnMargins": "余白",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnPageOrient": "印刷の向き",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnPageSize": "サイズ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnWatermark": "透かし",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgAlign": "整列",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgBackward": "背面へ移動",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgForward": "前面へ移動",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgGroup": "グループ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgWrapping": "折り返し",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.mniCustomTable": "ユーザー設定の表の挿入",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.mniDrawTable": "罫線を引く",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditControls": "コントロールの設定",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2185,6 +2288,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipHighlightColor": "強調表示の色",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipImgAlign": "オブジェクトを配置する",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipImgGroup": "グループ・オブジェクト",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipImgWrapping": "文字列の折り返し",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipIncFont": "フォントサイズの増分",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipIncPrLeft": "インデントを増やす",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertChart": "グラフの挿入",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2259,7 +2363,12 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLayout": "レイアウト",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "カスタム色を追加",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNone": "なし",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textScale": "規模",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textSelect": "画像を選択",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textText": "テキスト",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTextW": "テキスト透かし",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTitle": "透かし設定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTransparency": "半透明",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textUnderline": "下線",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.tipFontName": "フォント名",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.tipFontSize": "フォントのサイズ"
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -24,15 +24,28 @@
|
|||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textRight": "Still opp høyre",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShd": "Bakgrunnsfarge",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTabs": "Bytt faner",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textArea": "Areal",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textBar": "Søyle",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textCharts": "Diagrammer",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textColumn": "Kolonne",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "april",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "august",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "desember",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortApril": "apr",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortAugust": "Aug",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Legg til ny egendefinert farge",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ExtendedColorDialog.addButtonText": "Legg til",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ExtendedColorDialog.textCurrent": "Nåværende",
|
||||
"Common.UI.SearchDialog.textMatchCase": "Følsom for store og små bokstaver",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Window.cancelButtonText": "Avbryt",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Window.closeButtonText": "Lukk",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Window.textConfirmation": "Bekreftelse",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Window.textError": "Feil",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Window.textWarning": "Advarsel",
|
||||
"Common.Utils.Metric.txtCm": "cm",
|
||||
"Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "adresse:",
|
||||
"Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textBy": "Av:",
|
||||
"Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "Autokorrektur",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Comments.textAdd": "Legg til",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Comments.textAddComment": "Tilføy",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Comments.textAddCommentToDoc": "Tilføy kommentar til",
|
||||
|
|
@ -41,6 +54,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.Comments.textClose": "Lukk",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Comments.textComments": "Kommentarer",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Comments.textHintAddComment": "Legg til kommentar",
|
||||
"Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textTitle": "Handlinger for Kopier, Klipp ut og Lim inn",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textClose": "Lukk",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "Diagramredigering",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textClose": "Lukk",
|
||||
|
|
@ -52,8 +66,10 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.Header.tipViewUsers": "Vis brukere og administrer tilgangsrettigheter",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.txtAccessRights": "Endre tilgangsrettigheter",
|
||||
"Common.Views.History.textCloseHistory": "Lukk loggen",
|
||||
"Common.Views.History.textHide": "Lukk",
|
||||
"Common.Views.OpenDialog.closeButtonText": "Lukk filen",
|
||||
"Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtTitle": "Velg %1 alternativer",
|
||||
"Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "Bekreftet passord er ikke identisk",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.hintPwd": "Endre eller slett passord",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.hintSignature": "Legg til digital signatur eller signaturlinje",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.txtAddPwd": "Angi passord",
|
||||
|
|
@ -62,14 +78,17 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.Protection.txtInvisibleSignature": "Legg til digital signatur",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.txtSignatureLine": "Legg til signaturlinje",
|
||||
"Common.Views.RenameDialog.textName": "Filnavn",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniSettings": "Innstillinger for sammenlikning",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strFast": "Hurtig",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipAcceptCurrent": "Godta endringen",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCompare": "Sammenlikn dette dokumentet med et annet",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAccept": "Godta",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptAll": "Godta alle endringer",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptChanges": "Godta endringer",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptCurrent": "Godta endringen",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtChat": "Chat",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtClose": "Lukk",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCompare": "Sammenlikn",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinal": "Alle endringer er godtatt",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtMarkup": "Alle endringer (Redigering)",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtOriginal": "Alle endringer er avvist (Forhåndsvisning)",
|
||||
|
|
@ -85,6 +104,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.textCertificate": "Sertifikat",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.textChange": "Endre",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textAllowComment": "Tillat at den som signerer legger til en kommentar i signaturdialogen",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "Bokstav",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Alle ulagrede endringer i dokumentet vil ikke bli lagret.<br>Klikk \"Avbryt\" og så \"Lagre\" for å lagre endringene. Klikk \"OK\" for å forkaste alle ulagrede endringer.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Advarsel",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorTitle": "Feil",
|
||||
|
|
@ -92,15 +112,18 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingDownloadas": "Det oppstod en feil ved arbeid med dokumentet. <br>Bruk 'Last ned som...' opsjonen til å lagre en kopi av dokumentet til din lokale datamaskin.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingSaveas": "Det oppstod en feil ved arbeid med dokumentet.<br>Bruk opsjonen 'Lagre som...' til å lagre en kopi av dokumentet til din lokale datamaskin.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorForceSave": "Det skjedde en feil ved lagring av filen. Bruk opsjonen 'Lagre som...' til å lagre filen til din lokale datamaskin eller prøv igjen senere.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorViewerDisconnect": "Mistet nettverksforbindelse. Du kan fremdeles se dokumentet,<br>men vil ikke kunne laste ned eller skrive det ut før nettverksforbindelsen er gjenopprettet og siden oppdatert.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Advarsel",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.openErrorText": "Det har skjedd en feil ved åpning av filen",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.requestEditFailedTitleText": "Tilgang nektet",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.saveErrorText": "Det har skjedd en feil ved lagring av filen",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Anonym",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "Bruk på alle likninger",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "Besøk webside",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "Alle endringer er lagret",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Lukk",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Klikk for å lukke tipset",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Kontakt salgsavdelingen",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtAbove": "over",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtBasicShapes": "Basisformer",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtBelow": "under",
|
||||
|
|
@ -108,11 +131,30 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtButtons": "Knapper",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtCallouts": "Henvisninger",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtCharts": "Diagram",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtChoose": "Velg et punkt.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtCurrentDocument": "Gjeldende dokument",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Diagramtittel",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "Partallside",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Pilfigurer",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtSection": "-Seksjon",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBackPrevious": "Tilbake- eller forrigeknapp",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBeginning": "Startknapp",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBlank": "Tom knapp",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_arc": "Bue",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentArrow": "Buet pil",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentUpArrow": "Oppadbuet pil",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bevel": "Skrå",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_can": "Kan",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_chevron": "Vinkel",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_circularArrow": "Sirkulær pil",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cloud": "Sky",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_corner": "Hjørne",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cube": "Kube",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_diagStripe": "Diagonal linje",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_diamond": "Diamant",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lineWithArrow": "Pil",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_spline": "Kurve",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Caption": "Bildetekst",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableOfContents": "Innholdsfortegnelse",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtBeginning": "Starten av dokumentet",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Advarsel",
|
||||
|
|
@ -148,11 +190,21 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_OpenOpen": "Klammeparantes",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_SquareDouble": "Klammeparantes",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_UppLim": "Klammeparantes",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDifferential_1": "Differensial",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDifferential_2": "Differensial",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDifferential_3": "Differensial",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDifferential_4": "Differensial",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Cos": "cosinus funksjon",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Cot": "Cotangens funksjon",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Custom_2": "Cos 2x",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralDouble": "Dobbeltintegral",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralDoubleCenterSubSup": "Dobbeltintegral",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralDoubleSubSup": "Dobbeltintegral",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd": "Samprodukt",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_CenterSub": "Samprodukt",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_CenterSubSup": "Samprodukt",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_Sub": "Samprodukt",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_SubSup": "Samprodukt",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Ln": "Naturlig logaritme",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_1_2": "1x2 tom matrise",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_1_3": "1x3 tom matrise",
|
||||
|
|
@ -171,6 +223,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_DeltaEquals": "Delta er lik",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtRadicalRoot_3": "Kubikkrot",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_about": "Omtrent",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_additional": "Komplement",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_aleph": "Alef",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_alpha": "Alfa",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_approx": "Nesten lik",
|
||||
|
|
@ -190,18 +243,45 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textAdd": "Legg til",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textBookmarkName": "Bokmerk navnet",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textClose": "Lukk",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textCopy": "Kopier",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textDelete": "Slett",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textTitle": "Bokmerker",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.txtInvalidName": "Bokmerkets navn kan bare inneholde bokstaver, tall og streker, og skal begynne med bokstaven",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAdd": "Legg til merkelapp",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAfter": "Etter",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textBefore": "Før",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textCaption": "Bildetekst",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textChapter": "Kapittel starter med stil",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textColon": "kolon",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDash": "tankestrek",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDelete": "Slett merkelapp",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textCol": "Kolonner",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textDown": "Under markøren",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textUp": "Over markøren",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textCol": "Slett hele kolonnen",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textRow": "Slett raden",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textTitle": "Slett celler",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.textChartType": "Endre diagramtype",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.textEditData": "Rediger data",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.textOriginalSize": "Standard størrelse",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtBehind": "Bak",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtInFront": "Foran",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTitle": "Diagram",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textChar": "Bokstavnivå",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Innstillinger for sammenlikning",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAdd": "Legg til",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAppearance": "Utseende",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textApplyAll": "Bruk på alle",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textBox": "Avgrensningsboks",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textCheckbox": "Avkrysningsboks",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textColor": "Farge",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDate": "Datoformat",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDelete": "Slett",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Innstillinger for innholdskontroll",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.tipChange": "Endre symbol",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.txtLockDelete": "Innholdskontroll kan ikke slettes",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Kolonner",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "Dato og tidspunkt",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Over",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Tilføy kommentar",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedTableText": "Avanserte tabell-innstillinger",
|
||||
|
|
@ -230,10 +310,14 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrange": "Ordne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeForward": "Flytt fremover",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeFront": "Plasser fremst",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCells": "Celler",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textContentControls": "Innholdskontroll",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textContinueNumbering": "Fortsett nummerering",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCopy": "Kopier",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCrop": "Beskjære",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCut": "Klipp ut",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textDistributeRows": "Fordel rader",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textEditControls": "Innstillinger for innholdskontroll",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textEditWrapBoundary": "Rediger ombrytningsgrense",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignBottom": "Still opp bunn",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignCenter": "Still opp senter",
|
||||
|
|
@ -243,6 +327,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignTop": "Still opp topp",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textTOC": "Innholdsfortegnelse",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textTOCSettings": "Innstillinger for innholdsfortegnelsen",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.toDictionaryText": "Legg til ordbok",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddBottom": "Legg til bunnramme",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddFractionBar": "Legg til brøkstrek",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddHor": "Legg til horisontal linje",
|
||||
|
|
@ -263,6 +348,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteCharsAndSeparators": "Slett de omsluttende tegnene og seperatorer",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteEq": "Slett ligning",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteGroupChar": "Slett bokstav",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtEmpty": "(Tomt)",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionLinear": "Endre til lineær brøk",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionSkewed": "Endre til skjev brøk",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionStacked": "Endre til stablet brøk",
|
||||
|
|
@ -285,15 +371,21 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textColumn": "Kolonne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textExact": "Nøyaktig",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Venstre",
|
||||
"DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textValueError": "Det finnes allerede en gjenstand med samme verdi.",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCloseMenuCaption": "Lukk menyen",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCreateNewCaption": "Opprett ny",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnReturnCaption": "Tilbake til dokument",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRightsCaption": "Tilgangsrettigheter...",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSettingsCaption": "Avanserte innstillinger...",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnToEditCaption": "Rediger dokument",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.okButtonText": "Bruk",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddAuthor": "Legg til forfatter",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddText": "Legg til tekst",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAppName": "Applikasjon",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAuthor": "Forfatter",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "Endre tilgangsrettigheter",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtComment": "Kommentar",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtCreated": "Opprettet",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSymbols": "Symboler",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtBtnAccessRights": "Endre tilgangsrettigheter",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strSignature": "Med signatur",
|
||||
|
|
@ -302,6 +394,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.okButtonText": "Bruk",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strFast": "Hurtig",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strForcesave": "Lagre alltid til tjeneren (eller lagre til tjeneren når dokumentet lukkes)",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPaste": "Klipp ut, kopier og lim inn",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strZoom": "Standard zoom-verdi",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.text10Minutes": "Hvert 10. minutt",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.text30Minutes": "Hvert 30. minutt",
|
||||
|
|
@ -310,21 +403,31 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAlignGuides": "Hjelpelinjer",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoRecover": "Automatisk gjenoppretting",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoSave": "Autolagre",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textCompatible": "Kompatibilitet",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textDisabled": "Deaktivert",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Hvert minutt",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "Vis alt",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "Alternativer for autokorrektur...",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "Centimeter",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtInch": "Tomme",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtInput": "Alternativ inndata",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtMac": "som OS X",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "Aktiver alle makroer uten varsling",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacros": "Deaktiver alt",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacrosDesc": "Deaktiver alle makroer uten varsling",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacros": "Vis varsling",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "Deaktiver alle makroer med et varsel",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "som Windows",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "Bunn senter",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "Margin bunn",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomPage": "Nederst på siden",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomRight": "Bunn høyre",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textDiffFirst": "Ulik førsteside",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textDiffOdd": "Ulike odde- og parsider",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textDisplay": "Vis",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtBeginning": "Starten av dokumentet",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtBookmarks": "Bokmerker",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCrop": "Beskjære",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEdit": "Rediger",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEditObject": "Rediger objekt",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textOriginalSize": "Standard størrelse",
|
||||
|
|
@ -336,6 +439,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beskrivelse",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Vinkel",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Piler",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Autotilpass",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Startstørrelse",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "Startstil",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "under",
|
||||
|
|
@ -346,6 +450,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Senter",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCharacter": "Tegn",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textColumn": "Kolonne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textKeepRatio": "Konstant størrelsesforhold",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Venstre",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOriginalSize": "Standard størrelse",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Tillat overlapping",
|
||||
|
|
@ -360,10 +465,16 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipSupport": "Tilbakemelding og støtte",
|
||||
"DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtDeveloper": "UTVIKLERMODUS",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.capBtnBookmarks": "Lag bokmerke",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.capBtnCaption": "Bildetekst",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.capBtnInsContents": "Innholdsfortegnelse",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.mniDelFootnote": "Slett alle fotnoter",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.tipBookmarks": "Opprett et bokmerke",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.tipInsertHyperlink": "Tilføy lenke",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Automatisk",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Senter",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Justering",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "Punkt",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "Farge",
|
||||
"DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textAttachDocx": "Legg ved som DOCX",
|
||||
"DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textAttachPdf": "Legg ved som PDF",
|
||||
"DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textFileName": "Filnavn",
|
||||
|
|
@ -375,6 +486,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textEditData": "Rediger mottagerliste",
|
||||
"DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textSendMsg": "Alle meldinger er klargjort og vil bli sendt innen kort tid.<br>Dette vil avhenge av hastigheten på din epost-tjener.<br>Du kan fortsette å jobbe med dokumentet eller lukke det. Når oppgaven er fullført vil du få en melding om dette på din registrerte epost-adresse.",
|
||||
"DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtFromToError": "\"Fra\"-verdien må være mindre enn \"Til\"-verdien",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Navigation.txtCollapse": "Lukk alt",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Navigation.txtDemote": "Degrader",
|
||||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textApply": "Bruk",
|
||||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textApplyTo": "Bruk endringer på",
|
||||
|
|
@ -397,21 +509,30 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Store bokstaver",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strBorders": "Linjer & Fyll",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLeftText": "Venstre",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingAfter": "Etter",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingBefore": "Før",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Oppstilling",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAtLeast": "Minst",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Bakgrunnsfarge",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBodyText": "Grunnleggende tekst",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Linjefarge",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "Trykk på diagram eller bruk knappene for å velge kanter og bruke valgt stil på dem",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "Linjestørrelse",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Bunn",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCentered": "Sentrert",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCharacterSpacing": "Tegnavstand",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textDefault": "Standard fane",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Venstre",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(ingen)",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTabCenter": "Senter",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTabLeft": "Venstre",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTabPosition": "Tabulator posisjon",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtAutoText": "Auto",
|
||||
"DE.Views.RightMenu.txtChartSettings": "Diagram innstillinger",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Bakgrunnsfarge",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Endre autofigur",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Farge",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textColor": "Fyllfarge",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textDirection": "Retning",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtBehind": "Bak",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtBrownPaper": "Gråpapir",
|
||||
|
|
@ -429,12 +550,17 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteColumnText": "Slett kolonne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteRowText": "Slett rad",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteTableText": "Slett tabell",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textAddFormula": "Legg til formel",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textBackColor": "Bakgrunnsfarge",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textBanded": "Bundet",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textBorderColor": "Farge",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textBorders": "Linjestil",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textCellSize": "Cellestørrelse",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textColumns": "Kolonner",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textDistributeRows": "Fordel rader",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Accent": "Lesetegn",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Colorful": "Fargerik",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Dark": "Mørk",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Oppstilling",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Oppstilling",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Tillat avstand mellom cellene",
|
||||
|
|
@ -444,6 +570,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Bakgrunnsfarge",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "under",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Linjefarge",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "Trykk på diagram eller bruk knappene for å velge kanter og bruke valgt stil på dem",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBordersBackgroung": "Linjer & Bakgrunn",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "Linjestørrelse",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Bunn",
|
||||
|
|
@ -463,9 +590,15 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.txtCm": "Centimeter",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.txtInch": "Tomme",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strColor": "Farge",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textColor": "Fyllfarge",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textDirection": "Retning",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnAddComment": "Legg til kommentar",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "Tom side",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Kolonner",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Kommentar",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Dato og tidspunkt",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Diagram",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "Innholdskontroller",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsImage": "Bilde",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsPagebreak": "Brudd",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsTable": "Tabell",
|
||||
|
|
@ -476,16 +609,20 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textAutoColor": "Automatisk",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textBold": "Fet",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textBottom": "Bunn:",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textCheckboxControl": "Avkrysningsboks",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsCustom": "Egendefinerte kolonner",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsLeft": "Venstre",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textContPage": "Sammenhengende side",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textDateControl": "Dato",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textEditWatermark": "Egendefinert vannmerke",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textEvenPage": "Partallside",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsNarrow": "Smal",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "Legg til ny egendefinert farge",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Legg til ny egendefinert farge",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageMarginsCustom": "Egendefinerte marginer",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageSizeCustom": "Egendefinert sidestørrelse",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuDelete": "Slett stil",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuDeleteAll": "Slett alle brukerdefinerte formateringer",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Samarbeid",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Fil",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textTitleError": "Feil",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignCenter": "Still opp senter",
|
||||
|
|
@ -496,13 +633,22 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipClearStyle": "Fjern formatering",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipColorSchemas": "Endre fargeoppsett",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopy": "Kopier",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopyStyle": "Kopier stil",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecFont": "Reduser skriftstørrelsen",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecPrLeft": "Reduser innrykk",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipEditHeader": "Rediger topptekst eller bunntekst",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipImgAlign": "Still opp objekter",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkers": "Kulepunkt",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSendForward": "Flytt fremover",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtMarginAlign": "Juster i forhold til marg",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtObjectsAlign": "Juster valgte objekter",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtPageAlign": "Juster i forhold til side",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme3": "Spiss",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme4": "Aspekt",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme5": "Borgerlig"
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme5": "Borgerlig",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme6": "Mengde",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Auto",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textBold": "Fet",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": "Diagonal",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Legg til ny egendefinert farge"
|
||||
}
|
||||
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load diff
|
|
@ -560,8 +560,8 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Aguarde...",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "O aplicativo tem baixa capacidade no IE9. Usar IE10 ou superior",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "A configuração de zoom atual de seu navegador não é completamente suportada. Redefina para o zoom padrão pressionando Ctrl+0.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Sua licença expirou.<br>Atualize sua licença e refresque a página.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Você atingiu o limite de conexões simultâneas para editores %1. Este documento será aberto apenas para visualização.<br>Entre em contato com seu administrador para saber mais.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Sua licença expirou.<br>Atualize sua licença e refresque a página.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Você atingiu o limite de usuários para editores %1. Entre em contato com seu administrador para saber mais.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Você atingiu o limite de conexões simultâneas para editores %1. Este documento será aberto apenas para visualização.<br>Entre em contato com a equipe de vendas da %1 para obter os termos de atualização pessoais.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "Você atingiu o limite de usuários para editores %1.<br>Entre em contato com a equipe de vendas da %1 para obter os termos de atualização pessoais.",
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -80,7 +80,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "Точечная",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textStock": "Биржевая",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "Поверхность",
|
||||
"Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "Документ используется другим приложением. Вы можете продолжить редактирование и сохранить его как копию.",
|
||||
"Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "Файл редактируется в другом приложении. Вы можете продолжить редактирование и сохранить его как копию.",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "Апрель",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "Август",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "Декабрь",
|
||||
|
|
@ -750,8 +750,8 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Пожалуйста, подождите...",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "В IE9 приложение имеет низкую производительность. Используйте IE10 или более позднюю версию.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Текущее значение масштаба страницы в браузере поддерживается не полностью. Вернитесь к масштабу по умолчанию, нажав Ctrl+0.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Истек срок действия лицензии.<br>Обновите лицензию, а затем обновите страницу.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Вы достигли лимита на одновременные подключения к редакторам %1. Этот документ будет открыт только на просмотр.<br>Свяжитесь с администратором, чтобы узнать больше.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Истек срок действия лицензии.<br>Обновите лицензию, а затем обновите страницу.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Вы достигли лимита на количество пользователей редакторов %1.<br>Свяжитесь с администратором, чтобы узнать больше.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Вы достигли лимита на одновременные подключения к редакторам %1. Этот документ будет открыт на просмотр.<br>Напишите в отдел продаж %1, чтобы обсудить индивидуальные условия лицензирования.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "Вы достигли лимита на одновременные подключения к редакторам %1.<br>Напишите в отдел продаж %1, чтобы обсудить индивидуальные условия лицензирования.",
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -49,6 +49,9 @@
|
|||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaDeleted": "<b>Odstránený odsek</b>",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaFormatted": "Formátovaný odsek",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaInserted": "<b>Vložený odsek</b>",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveFromDown": "<b>Presunuté nadol:</b>",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveFromUp": "<b>Presunuté nahor:</b>",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveTo": "<b>Presunuté:</b>",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textPosition": "Pozícia",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textRight": "Zarovnať doprava",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShape": "Tvar",
|
||||
|
|
@ -60,17 +63,53 @@
|
|||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textStrikeout": "Prečiarknuť",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSubScript": "Dolný index",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSuperScript": "Horný index",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableChanged": "<b>Nastavenia tabuľky zmenené</b>",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsAdd": "<b>Riadky tabuľky pridané</b>",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsDel": "<b>Riadky tabuľky odstránené</b>",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTabs": "Zmeniť tabuľky",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textUnderline": "Podčiarknuť",
|
||||
"Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textWidow": "Ovládanie okien",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textArea": "Plošný graf",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textBar": "Pruhový graf",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textCharts": "Grafy",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textColumn": "Stĺpec",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textLine": "Čiara/líniový graf",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textPie": "Koláčový graf",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "Bodový graf",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textStock": "Akcie/burzový graf",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "Povrch",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "apríl",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "august",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "december",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textFebruary": "február",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textJanuary": "január",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textJuly": "júl",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textJune": "jún",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textMarch": "marec",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textMay": "máj",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textNovember": "november",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textOctober": "október",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textSeptember": "september",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortApril": "apr.",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortAugust": "aug.",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortDecember": "dec.",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFebruary": "feb.",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFriday": "pi",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJanuary": "jan.",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJuly": "júl",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJune": "jún",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMarch": "mar.",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMay": "máj",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMonday": "po",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortNovember": "nov.",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortOctober": "okt.",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSaturday": "so",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSeptember": "sep.",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSunday": "ne",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortThursday": "št",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "út",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "st",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Pridať novú vlastnú farbu",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Bez orámovania",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Bez orámovania",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "Žiadne štýly",
|
||||
|
|
@ -113,6 +152,8 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Poháňaný ",
|
||||
"Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tel.:",
|
||||
"Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Verzia",
|
||||
"Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textBy": "Od:",
|
||||
"Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "Automatická oprava",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Chat.textSend": "Poslať",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Comments.textAdd": "Pridať",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Comments.textAddComment": "Pridať komentár",
|
||||
|
|
@ -143,9 +184,9 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textClose": "Zatvoriť",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textSave": "Uložiť a Zatvoriť",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textTitle": "Príjemcovia hromadnej korešpondencie",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.labelCoUsersDescr": "Dokument v súčasnosti upravuje niekoľko používateľov.",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.labelCoUsersDescr": "Používatelia, ktorí súbor práve upravujú:",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.textAdvSettings": "Pokročilé nastavenia",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.textBack": "Prejsť do Dokumentov",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.textBack": "Otvoriť umiestnenie súboru",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.textSaveBegin": "Ukladanie...",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.textSaveChanged": "Modifikovaný",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Header.textSaveEnd": "Všetky zmeny boli uložené",
|
||||
|
|
@ -176,6 +217,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtTitle": "Veľkosť tabuľky",
|
||||
"Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtTitleSplit": "Rozdeliť bunku",
|
||||
"Common.Views.LanguageDialog.labelSelect": "Vybrať jazyk dokumentu",
|
||||
"Common.Views.OpenDialog.closeButtonText": "Zatvoriť súbor",
|
||||
"Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtEncoding": "Kódovanie",
|
||||
"Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "Heslo je nesprávne.",
|
||||
"Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtPassword": "Heslo",
|
||||
|
|
@ -189,18 +231,27 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.Plugins.textLoading": "Nahrávanie",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Plugins.textStart": "Začať/začiatok",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Plugins.textStop": "Stop",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.hintAddPwd": "Šifrovať heslom",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.hintPwd": "Zmeniť alebo odstrániť heslo",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.hintSignature": "Pridajte riadok digitálneho podpisu alebo podpisu",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.txtAddPwd": "Pridajte heslo",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.txtChangePwd": "Zmeniť heslo",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.txtDeletePwd": "Odstrániť heslo",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.txtEncrypt": "Šifrovať",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.txtInvisibleSignature": "Pridajte digitálny podpis",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.txtSignature": "Podpis",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.txtSignatureLine": "Pridať riadok na podpis",
|
||||
"Common.Views.RenameDialog.textName": "Názov súboru",
|
||||
"Common.Views.RenameDialog.txtInvalidName": "Názov súboru nemôže obsahovať žiadny z nasledujúcich znakov:",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.hintNext": "K ďalšej zmene",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.hintPrev": "K predošlej zmene",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromFile": "Dokument zo súboru",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromStorage": "Dokument z úložiska",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromUrl": "Dokument z URL",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniSettings": "Nastavenia porovnávania",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strFast": "Rýchly",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipAcceptCurrent": "Akceptovať aktuálnu zmenu",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCompare": "Porovnať súčasný dokument s iným",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipRejectCurrent": "Odmietnuť aktuálnu zmenu",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipReview": "Sledovať zmeny",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipReviewView": "Vyberte režim, v ktorom chcete zobraziť zmeny",
|
||||
|
|
@ -210,11 +261,15 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptAll": "Akceptovať všetky zmeny",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptChanges": "Akceptovať zmeny",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptCurrent": "Akceptovať aktuálnu zmenu",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtChat": "Rozhovor",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtClose": "Zatvoriť",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCoAuthMode": "Režim spoločnej úpravy",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCompare": "Porovnať",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtDocLang": "Jazyk",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinal": "Všetky zmeny prijaté (ukážka)",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinalCap": "Posledný",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtMarkup": "Všetky zmeny (upravované)",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtMarkupCap": "Vyznačenie",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtNext": "Nasledujúci",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtOriginal": "Všetky zmeny boli zamietnuté (ukážka)",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtPrev": "Predchádzajúci",
|
||||
|
|
@ -239,6 +294,9 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textCancel": "Zrušiť",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textClose": "Zatvoriť",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textEdit": "OK",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textOpenAgain": "Znova otvoriť",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SaveAsDlg.textLoading": "Načítavanie",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SelectFileDlg.textLoading": "Načítavanie",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.textBold": "Tučné",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.textCertificate": "Certifikát",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignDialog.textChange": "Zmeniť",
|
||||
|
|
@ -260,8 +318,14 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoTitle": "Názov signatára",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInstructions": "Pokyny pre signatára",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textShowDate": "Zobraziť dátum podpisu v riadku podpisu",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Nastavenia Podpisu",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Nastavenia podpisu",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "Toto pole sa vyžaduje",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "Symbol",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "Znak autorských práv",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDCQuote": "Uzatvárajúca úvodzovka",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "Písmo",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textQEmSpace": "Medzera 1/4 Em",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "Uzatvárajúca úvodzovka",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Všetky neuložené zmeny v tomto dokumente sa stratia. <br> Kliknutím na tlačidlo \"Zrušiť\" a potom na \"Uložiť\" ich uložíte. Kliknutím na \"OK\" zahodíte všetky neuložené zmeny.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Nepomenovaný dokument",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Upozornenie",
|
||||
|
|
@ -271,6 +335,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textReplaceSkipped": "Nahradenie bolo uskutočnené. {0} výskytov bolo preskočených.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textReplaceSuccess": "Vyhľadávanie bolo uskutočnené. Nahradené udalosti: {0}",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.warnDownloadAs": "Ak budete pokračovať v ukladaní v tomto formáte, všetky funkcie okrem textu sa stratia.<br>Ste si istý, že chcete pokračovať?",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.warnDownloadAsRTF": "Ak budete pokračovať v ukladaní tohto formátu, časť z formátovania sa môže stratiť.<br>Ste si istí, že chcete pokračovať?",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTextText": "Načítavanie zmien...",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTitleText": "Načítavanie zmien",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.convertationTimeoutText": "Prekročený čas konverzie.",
|
||||
|
|
@ -286,13 +351,16 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "Serverové pripojenie sa stratilo. Práve teraz nie je možné dokument upravovať.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "Dokument sa nepodarilo uložiť. Prosím, skontrolujte nastavenia pripojenia alebo kontaktujte správcu.<br>Po kliknutí na tlačidlo 'OK' sa zobrazí výzva na prevzatie dokumentu.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "Externá chyba.<br>Chyba spojenia databázy. Prosím, kontaktujte podporu ak chyba pretrváva. ",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataEncrypted": "Boli prijaté zašifrované zmeny, nemožno ich dekódovať.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataRange": "Nesprávny rozsah údajov.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorDefaultMessage": "Kód chyby: %1",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingDownloadas": "Pri práci s dokumentom došlo k chybe.<br>Použite voľbu \"Stiahnuť ako...\" a uložte si záložnú kópiu súboru na svoj počítač.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingSaveas": "Pri práci s dokumentom došlo k chybe.<br>Použite voľbu \"Uložiť ako...\" a uložte si záložnú kópiu súboru na svoj počítač.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorFilePassProtect": "Dokument je chránený heslom a nie je možné ho otvoriť.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorForceSave": "Pri ukladaní súboru sa vyskytla chyba. Ak chcete súbor uložiť na pevný disk počítača, použite možnosť 'Prevziať ako' alebo to skúste znova neskôr.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyEncrypt": "Neznámy kľúč deskriptoru",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyExpire": "Kľúč deskriptora vypršal",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeLoadFile": "Načítavanie zlyhalo",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeLoadFile": "Načítavanie zlyhalo. Vyberte iný súbor.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeSaveFile": "Zlúčenie zlyhalo.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorProcessSaveResult": "Ukladanie zlyhalo.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorServerVersion": "Verzia editora bola aktualizovaná. Stránka sa opätovne načíta, aby sa vykonali zmeny.",
|
||||
|
|
@ -339,13 +407,15 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "Počet stĺpcov musí byť menší ako %1.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "Počet riadkov musí byť menší ako %1.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Anonymný",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "Použiť na všetky rovnice",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "Navštíviť webovú stránku",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "Všetky zmeny boli uložené",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Zatvoriť",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Kliknutím zavrite tip",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Kontaktujte predajcu",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textLearnMore": "Viac informácií",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "Načítavanie dokumentu",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "ONLYOFFICE obmedzenie pripojenia",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "Bol dosiahnutý limit licencie",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "Tvar",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "Prísny režim",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "Funkcie späť/zopakovať sú vypnuté pre rýchly spolueditačný režim.<br>Kliknite na tlačítko \"Prísny režim\", aby ste prešli do prísneho spolueditačného režimu a aby ste upravovali súbor bez rušenia ostatných užívateľov a odosielali vaše zmeny iba po ich uložení. Pomocou Rozšírených nastavení editoru môžete prepínať medzi spolueditačnými režimami.",
|
||||
|
|
@ -360,24 +430,95 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtButtons": "Tlačidlá",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtCallouts": "Popisky obrázku",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtCharts": "Grafy",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtChoose": "Zvolte položku.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtCurrentDocument": "Aktuálny dokument",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Názov grafu",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "Nastaviť režim úprav ...",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "Zadajte dátum.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "Načítavanie histórie zlyhalo",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "Párna stránka",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Šipky",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtFirstPage": "Prvá strana",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtFooter": "Päta stránky",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtHeader": "Hlavička",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtHyperlink": "Hypertextový odkaz",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtLines": "Riadky",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtMainDocOnly": "Chyba! Iba hlavný dokument.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtMath": "Matematika",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtNeedSynchronize": "Máte aktualizácie",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtNoText": "Chyba! V dokumente nie je žiaden text špecifikovaného štýlu.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtOddPage": "Nepárna strana",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtOnPage": "na strane",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtRectangles": "Obdĺžniky",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtSameAsPrev": "Rovnaký ako predchádzajúci",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtSection": "-Sekcia",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtSeries": "Rady",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBackPrevious": "Tlačítko Späť alebo Predchádzajúci",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBeginning": "Tlačítko Začiatok",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBlank": "Prázdne tlačítko",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonDocument": "Tlačítko Dokument",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonEnd": "Tlačítko Koniec",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonHelp": "Tlačítko Nápoveda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_arc": "Oblúk",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentArrow": "Ohnutá šípka",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentUpArrow": "Šípka ohnutá hore",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bevel": "Skosenie",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_blockArc": "Časť kruhu",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bracePair": "Dvojitá zátvorka",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_can": "Môže",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_chevron": "Chevron",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_circularArrow": "okrúhla šípka",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cloud": "Cloud",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_corner": "Roh",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cube": "Kocka",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedConnector3": "Zakrivený konektor",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedConnector3WithArrow": "Konektor v tvare zakrivenej šípky",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedConnector3WithTwoArrows": "Konektor v tvare zakrivenej dvojitej šípky",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedDownArrow": "Šípka zahnutá nadol",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedLeftArrow": "Šípka zahnutá doľava",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedRightArrow": "Šípka zahnutá doprava",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedUpArrow": "Šípka zahnutá nahor",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_decagon": "Desaťuhoľník",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_diagStripe": "Priečny prúžok",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_diamond": "Diamant",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_dodecagon": "Dvanásťuhoľník",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_donut": "Šiška",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_doubleWave": "Dvojitá vlnovka",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_downArrow": "Šípka dole",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipse": "Elipsa",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipseRibbon": "Pruh zahnutý nadol",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipseRibbon2": "Pruh zahnutý nahor",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartAlternateProcess": "Vývojový diagram: Vystriedať proces",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPunchedCard": "Vývojový diagram: Karta",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_frame": "Rámček",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_heart": "Srdce",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_irregularSeal1": "Výbuch 1",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_irregularSeal2": "Výbuch 2",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftArrow": "Ľavá šípka",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_line": "Čiara",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lineWithArrow": "Šípka",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lineWithTwoArrows": "Dvojitá šípka",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathDivide": "Rozdelenie",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathEqual": "Rovná sa",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathMinus": "Mínus",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathNotEqual": "Nerovná sa",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_noSmoking": "Symbol \"Nie\"",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ribbon": "Spodný pruh",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_spline": "Krivka",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star10": "10-cípa hviezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star12": "12-cípa hviezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star16": "16-cípa hviezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star24": "24-cípa hviezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star32": "32-cípa hviezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star4": "4-cípa hviezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star5": "5-cípa hviezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star6": "6-cípa hviezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star7": "7-cípa hviezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star8": "8-cípa hviezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_sun": "Slnko",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtStarsRibbons": "Hviezdy a stuhy",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Caption": "Popis",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_footnote_text": "Poznámka pod čiarou",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_1": "Nadpis 1",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_2": "Nadpis 2",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_3": "Nadpis 3",
|
||||
|
|
@ -408,6 +549,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Vaša licencia vypršala.<br>Prosím, aktualizujte si svoju licenciu a obnovte stránku.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Táto verzia aplikácie %1 editors má určité obmedzenia pre súbežné pripojenia k dokumentovému serveru. <br> Ak potrebujete viac, zvážte aktualizáciu aktuálnej licencie alebo zakúpenie komerčnej.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.warnProcessRightsChange": "Bolo vám zamietnuté právo upravovať súbor.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtBeginning": "Začiatok dokumentu",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Statusbar.textHasChanges": "Boli sledované nové zmeny",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Statusbar.textTrackChanges": "Dokument je otvorený so zapnutým režimom sledovania zmien.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Statusbar.tipReview": "Sledovať zmeny",
|
||||
|
|
@ -420,6 +562,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFontSizeErr": "Zadaná hodnota je nesprávna.<br>Prosím, zadajte číselnú hodnotu medzi 1 a 100.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFraction": "Zlomky",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFunction": "Funkcie",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textInsert": "Vložiť",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textIntegral": "Integrály",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textLargeOperator": "Veľké operátory",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textLimitAndLog": "Limity a logaritmy",
|
||||
|
|
@ -749,11 +892,37 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_zeta": "Zéta",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Viewport.textFitPage": "Prispôsobiť na stranu",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Viewport.textFitWidth": "Prispôsobiť na šírku",
|
||||
"DE.Views.AddNewCaptionLabelDialog.textLabel": "Štítok:",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textAdd": "Pridať",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textBookmarkName": "Názov záložky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textClose": "Zatvoriť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textCopy": "Kopírovať",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textDelete": "Vymazať",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textGetLink": "Získať odkaz",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textGoto": "Ísť na",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textLocation": "Umiestnenie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textTitle": "Záložky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.txtInvalidName": "Názov záložky môže obsahovať iba písmená, číslice a podčiarknutia a mal by začínať písmenom",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAdd": "Pridať štítok",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAfter": "Za",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textBefore": "Pred",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textCaption": "Popis",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textChapter": "Kapitola začína so štýlom",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textColon": "Dvojbodka ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDash": "spojovník",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDelete": "Vymaž označenie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textEquation": "Rovnica",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textExamples": "Príklady: Tabuľka 2-A, Obrázok 1.IV",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textExclude": "Vylúčiť značku z titulku",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textFigure": "Pozícia",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textInsert": "Vložiť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textLabel": "Štítok",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textCol": "Stĺpce",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textDown": "Pod kurzorom",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textUp": "Nad kurzorom",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textCol": "Vymaž celý stĺpec",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textRow": "Vymaž celý riadok",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textTitle": "Odstrániť bunky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.textAdvanced": "Zobraziť pokročilé nastavenia",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.textChartType": "Zmeniť typ grafu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.textEditData": "Upravovať dáta",
|
||||
|
|
@ -772,10 +941,37 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTight": "Tesný",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTitle": "Graf",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTopAndBottom": "Hore a dole",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textChar": "Úroveň grafického symbolu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Nastavenia porovnávania",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.strGeneral": "Všeobecné",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAdd": "Pridať",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAppearance": "Vzhľad",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textApplyAll": "Použiť na všetko",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textBox": "Ohraničovací rámik",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textChange": "Upraviť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textCheckbox": "Zaškrtávacie políčko",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textChecked": "Zaškrtnutý symbol",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textColor": "Farba",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textCombobox": "Zmiešaná schránka",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDate": "Formát dátumu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDelete": "Odstrániť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDisplayName": "Meno/názov na zobrazenie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDown": "Dole",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDropDown": "Rozbaľovací zoznam",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textFormat": "Zobraz dátum takto",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "Jazyk",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "žiadny",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Nastavenia kontroly obsahu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.tipChange": "Zmeniť symbol",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.txtLockDelete": "Kontrolu obsahu nemožno vymazať",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.txtLockEdit": "Obsah nie je možné upravovať",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textColumns": "Počet stĺpcov",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Rozdeľovač stĺpcov",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "Medzera medzi stĺpcami",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Stĺpce",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "Formáty",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "Jazyk",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "Dátum a čas",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Nad",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Pridať komentár",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "Pokročilé nastavenia rámčeka",
|
||||
|
|
@ -785,6 +981,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.alignmentText": "Zarovnanie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.belowText": "pod",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.breakBeforeText": "Zlom strany pred",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.bulletsText": "Odrážky a číslovanie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellAlignText": "Vertikálne zarovnanie bunky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellText": "Bunka",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.centerText": "Stred",
|
||||
|
|
@ -845,10 +1042,22 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeBackward": "Posunúť späť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeForward": "Posunúť vpred",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeFront": "Premiestniť do popredia",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCells": "Bunky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textContentControls": "Kontrola obsahu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textContinueNumbering": "Pokračovať v číslovaní",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCopy": "Kopírovať",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCrop": "Orezať",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCropFill": "Vyplniť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCropFit": "Prispôsobiť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCut": "Vystrihnúť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textDistributeCols": "Rozdeliť stĺpce",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textDistributeRows": "Rozložiť riadky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textEditControls": "Nastavenia kontroly obsahu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textEditWrapBoundary": "Upraviť okrajovú obálku",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipH": "Prevrátiť horizontálne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipV": "Prevrátiť vertikálne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "Zo súboru",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "Z úložiska",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "Z URL adresy ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNextPage": "Ďalšia stránka",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textPaste": "Vložiť",
|
||||
|
|
@ -863,6 +1072,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUndo": "Krok späť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textWrap": "Obtekanie textu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.tipIsLocked": "Túto časť momentálne upravuje iný používateľ.",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.toDictionaryText": "Pridať do slovníka",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddBottom": "Pridať spodné orámovanie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddFractionBar": "Pridať lištu zlomkov",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddHor": "Pridať vodorovnú čiaru",
|
||||
|
|
@ -885,6 +1095,9 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteEq": "Odstrániť rovnicu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteGroupChar": "Odstrániť znak",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteRadical": "Odstrániť odmocninu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDistribHor": "Rozložiť horizontálne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDistribVert": "Rozložiť vertikálne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtEmpty": "(Prázdne)",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionLinear": "Zmeniť na lineárny zlomok",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionSkewed": "Zmeniť na skosený zlomok",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionStacked": "Zmeniť na zložený zlomok",
|
||||
|
|
@ -987,7 +1200,10 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textWidth": "Šírka",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.tipFontName": "Písmo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "Bez orámovania",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnBackCaption": "Prejsť do Dokumentov",
|
||||
"DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textDisplayName": "Meno/názov na zobrazenie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textNameError": "Názov na zobrazenie nesmie byť prázdny.",
|
||||
"DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textValueError": "Položka s rovnakou hodnotou už existuje.",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnBackCaption": "Otvoriť umiestnenie súboru",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCloseMenuCaption": "Zatvoriť menu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCreateNewCaption": "Vytvoriť nový",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnDownloadCaption": "Stiahnuť ako...",
|
||||
|
|
@ -995,7 +1211,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnHistoryCaption": "História verzií",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnInfoCaption": "Informácie o dokumente...",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnPrintCaption": "Tlačiť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnProtectCaption": "Ochrániť/podpísať",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnProtectCaption": "Ochrániť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRecentFilesCaption": "Otvoriť nedávne...",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRenameCaption": "Premenovať ..",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenu.btnReturnCaption": "Späť k Dokumentu",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1010,23 +1226,34 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDescriptionText": "Vytvorte nový prázdny textový dokument, ktorý budete môcť štýlovať a formátovať po jeho vytvorení počas úpravy. Alebo si vyberte jednu zo šablón na spustenie dokumentu určitého typu alebo účelu, kde už niektoré štýly boli predbežne aplikované.",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDocumentText": "Nový textový dokument",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.noTemplatesText": "Neexistujú žiadne šablóny",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.okButtonText": "Použiť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddAuthor": "Pridať autora",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddText": "Pridať text",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAppName": "Aplikácia",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAuthor": "Autor",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "Zmeniť prístupové práva",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtComment": "Komentár",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtCreated": "Vytvorené",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtLoading": "Nahrávanie...",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyBy": "Naposledy upravil(a) ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyDate": "Naposledy upravené",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtOwner": "Vlastník",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPages": "Strany",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtParagraphs": "Odseky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPlacement": "Umiestnenie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtRights": "Osoby s oprávneniami",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSpaces": "Symboly s medzerami",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtStatistics": "Štatistiky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSubject": "Predmet",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSymbols": "Symboly",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtTitle": "Názov dokumentu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtTitle": "Názov",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtWords": "Slová",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtBtnAccessRights": "Zmeniť prístupové práva",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtRights": "Osoby s oprávneniami",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strProtect": "Ochrániť dokument",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strSignature": "Podpis",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEdit": "Upraviť dokument",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEditWarning": "Upravovanie odstráni z dokumentu podpisy<br>Ste si istí, že chcete pokračovať?",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.okButtonText": "Použiť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAlignGuides": "Zapnúť tipy zarovnávania",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAutoRecover": "Zapnúť automatickú obnovu",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1039,6 +1266,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strForcesave": "Vždy uložiť na server (inak uložiť na server pri zatvorení dokumentu)",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strInputMode": "Zapnúť hieroglyfy",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strLiveComment": "Zapnúť zobrazovanie komentárov",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPaste": "Vystrihni, skopíruj a vlep",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strResolvedComment": "Zapnúť zobrazenie vyriešených komentárov",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowChanges": "Zmeny spolupráce v reálnom čase",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strSpellCheckMode": "Zapnúť kontrolu pravopisu",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1052,10 +1280,13 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAlignGuides": "Nápoveda zarovnania",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoRecover": "Automatická obnova",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoSave": "Automatické ukladanie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textCompatible": "Kompatibilita",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textDisabled": "Zakázané",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textForceSave": "Uložiť na Server",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Každú minútu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "Zobraziť všetko",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "Možnosti automatickej opravy...",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "Prednastavený mód cache",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "Centimeter",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitPage": "Prispôsobiť na stranu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitWidth": "Prispôsobiť na šírku",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1067,7 +1298,12 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "Pôvodný",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "Zobraziť žiadne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "Bod",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacros": "Povoliť všetko",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "Povoliť všetky makrá bez oznámenia",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "Kontrola pravopisu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacros": "Zablokovať všetko",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacrosDesc": "Zablokovať všetky makrá bez upozornenia",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "Zablokovať všetky makrá s upozornením",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "ako Windows",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "Dole v strede",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "Dole vľavo",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1079,7 +1315,9 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textHeaderFromTop": "Hlavička/Záhlavie od vrchu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textOptions": "Možnosti",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textPageNum": "Vložiť číslo stránky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textPageNumbering": "Číslovanie strany",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textPosition": "Pozícia",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textPrev": "Pokračovať z predošlej sekcie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textSameAs": "Odkaz na predchádzajúci",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textTopCenter": "Hore v strede",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textTopLeft": "Hore vľavo",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1090,16 +1328,24 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Nastavenie hypertextového odkazu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textTooltip": "Popis",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textUrl": "Odkaz na",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtBeginning": "Začiatok dokumentu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtBookmarks": "Záložky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "Toto pole sa vyžaduje",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtNotUrl": "Toto pole by malo byť vo formáte 'http://www.example.com'",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textAdvanced": "Zobraziť pokročilé nastavenia",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCrop": "Orezať",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCropFill": "Vyplniť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCropFit": "Prispôsobiť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEdit": "Upraviť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEditObject": "Upraviť objekt",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitMargins": "Prispôsobiť na okraj",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFlip": "Prevrátiť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "Zo súboru",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromStorage": "Z úložiska",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "Z URL adresy ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "Výška",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHintFlipH": "Prevrátiť horizontálne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHintFlipV": "Prevrátiť vertikálne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textInsert": "Nahradiť obrázok",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textOriginalSize": "Predvolená veľkosť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textSize": "Veľkosť",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1119,8 +1365,10 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Popis",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Alternatívne textové zobrazenie informácií o vizuálnych objektoch, ktoré sa prečítajú ľuďom s poruchou videnia alebo kognitívnymi poruchami, aby sa im pomohlo lepšie porozumieť, aké informácie sú na obrázku, automatickom tvarovaní, grafe alebo tabuľke. ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Názov",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Uhol",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Šípky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAspectRatio": "Uzamknúť/zaistiť pomer strán ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Automatické prispôsobenie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Veľkosť začiatku",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "Štýl začiatku",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "pod",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1136,6 +1384,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textEndSize": "Veľkosť konca",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textEndStyle": "Štýl konca",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textFlat": "Plochý",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textFlipped": "Prevrátený",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textHeight": "Výška",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textHorizontal": "Vodorovný",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textJoinType": "Typ pripojenia",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1189,10 +1438,25 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtDeveloper": "VÝVOJÁRSKY REŽIM",
|
||||
"DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtTrial": "Skúšobný režim",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.capBtnBookmarks": "Záložka",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.capBtnCaption": "Popis",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.capBtnInsFootnote": "Poznámka pod čiarou",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.capBtnInsLink": "Hypertextový odkaz",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.confirmDeleteFootnotes": "Chcete odstrániť všetky poznámky pod čiarou?",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.mniDelFootnote": "Odstrániť všetky poznámky pod čiarou",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.mniInsFootnote": "Vložiť poznámku pod čiarou",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.textContentsSettings": "Nastavenia",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.textGotoFootnote": "Prejdite na Poznámky pod čiarou",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.tipBookmarks": "Vytvoriť záložku",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.tipInsertHyperlink": "Pridať odkaz",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Links.tipNotes": "Vložiť alebo editovať poznámky pod čiarou",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Automaticky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Stred",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "Vľavo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Úroveň",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Zarovnanie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "Odrážka",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "Farba",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "žiadne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.filePlaceholder": "PDF",
|
||||
"DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.okButtonText": "Poslať",
|
||||
"DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.subjectPlaceholder": "Téma",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1240,7 +1504,10 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtPrev": "K predchádzajúcemu záznamu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtUntitled": "Neoznačený",
|
||||
"DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.warnProcessMailMerge": "Spustenie zlúčenia zlyhalo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Navigation.txtCollapse": "Zbaliť všetko",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Navigation.txtEmptyItem": "Prázdne záhlavie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Navigation.txtExpand": "Rozbaliť všetko",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Navigation.txtExpandToLevel": "Rozšíriť na úroveň",
|
||||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textApply": "Použiť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textApplyTo": "Použiť zmeny na",
|
||||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textContinue": "Nepretržitý",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1261,7 +1528,10 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Nastavenia poznámok",
|
||||
"DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Upozornenie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textBottom": "Dole",
|
||||
"DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textLandscape": "Na šírku",
|
||||
"DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textLeft": "Vľavo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textNormal": "Normálny",
|
||||
"DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textOrientation": "Orientácia",
|
||||
"DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textRight": "Vpravo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textTitle": "Okraje",
|
||||
"DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textTop": "Hore",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1270,6 +1540,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textHeight": "Výška",
|
||||
"DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textTitle": "Veľkosť stránky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textWidth": "Šírka",
|
||||
"DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.txtCustom": "Vlastný",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strLineHeight": "Riadkovanie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strParagraphSpacing": "Riadkovanie medzi odstavcami",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strSomeParagraphSpace": "Nepridávať medzeru medzi odseky s rovnakým štýlom",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1288,7 +1559,10 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strBreakBefore": "Zlom strany pred",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strDoubleStrike": "Dvojité prečiarknutie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLeftText": "Vľavo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLineSpacing": "Riadkovanie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsRightText": "Vpravo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingAfter": "Za",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingBefore": "Pred",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepLines": "Zviazať riadky dohromady",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepNext": "Zviazať s nasledujúcim",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Vnútorné osadenie",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1297,20 +1571,31 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphIndents": "Odsadenie a umiestnenie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphPosition": "Umiestnenie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSmallCaps": "Malé písmená",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSomeParagraphSpace": "Nepridávať medzeru medzi odseky s rovnakým štýlom",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strStrike": "Prečiarknutie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSubscript": "Dolný index",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSuperscript": "Horný index",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strTabs": "Tabulátor",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Zarovnanie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAtLeast": "Najmenej",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Farba pozadia",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBodyText": "Základný text",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Farba orámovania",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "Kliknutím na diagram alebo pomocou tlačidiel vyberte orámovanie a aplikujte zvolený štýl",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "Veľkosť orámovania",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Dole",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCentered": "Vycentrované",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCharacterSpacing": "Medzery medzi písmenami",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textDefault": "Predvolený tabulátor",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "Efekty",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textExact": "presne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textFirstLine": "Prvý riadok",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textJustified": "Podľa okrajov",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "Vodítko",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Vľavo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLevel": "Úroveň",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "žiadny",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(žiadne)",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Pozícia",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemove": "Odstrániť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemoveAll": "Odstrániť všetko",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1331,6 +1616,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipOuter": "Nastaviť len vonkajšie orámovanie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipRight": "Nastaviť len pravé orámovanie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipTop": "Nastaviť len horné orámovanie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtAutoText": "Automaticky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "Bez orámovania",
|
||||
"DE.Views.RightMenu.txtChartSettings": "Nastavenia grafu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.RightMenu.txtHeaderFooterSettings": "Nastavenie hlavičky a päty",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1356,10 +1642,14 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textColor": "Vyplniť farbou",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textDirection": "Smer",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "Bez vzoru",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFlip": "Prevrátiť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "Zo súboru",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromStorage": "Z úložiska",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "Z URL adresy ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradient": "Prechod",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Výplň prechodom",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipH": "Prevrátiť horizontálne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipV": "Prevrátiť vertikálne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Obrázok alebo textúra",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Lineárny/čiarový",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Bez výplne",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1395,6 +1685,8 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strSign": "Podpísať",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strSignature": "Podpis",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strValid": "Platné podpisy",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtContinueEditing": "Aj tak uprav",
|
||||
"DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtEditWarning": "Upravovanie odstráni z dokumentu podpisy<br>Ste si istí, že chcete pokračovať?",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Statusbar.goToPageText": "Ísť na stranu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Statusbar.pageIndexText": "Strana {0} z {1}",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitPage": "Prispôsobiť na stranu",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1409,7 +1701,16 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textTitle": "Názov",
|
||||
"DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtEmpty": "Toto pole sa vyžaduje",
|
||||
"DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtNotEmpty": "Pole nesmie byť prázdne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textFormula": "Vzorec",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textBuildTable": "Zostaviť tabuľku obsahu z",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textLeader": "Vodítko",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textLevel": "Stupeň",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textLevels": "Stupne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textNone": "žiadny",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textStyle": "Štýl",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtClassic": "Klasický",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtCurrent": "Aktuálny",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtOnline": "Online",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteColumnText": "Odstrániť stĺpec",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteRowText": "Odstrániť riadok",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteTableText": "Odstrániť tabuľku",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1425,6 +1726,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellsText": "Rozdeliť bunku...",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellTitleText": "Rozdeliť bunku",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.strRepeatRow": "Opakovať ako riadok hlavičky v hornej časti každej stránky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textAddFormula": "Pridať vzorec",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textAdvanced": "Zobraziť pokročilé nastavenia",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textBackColor": "Farba pozadia",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textBanded": "Pruhovaný/pásikovaný",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1432,10 +1734,13 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textBorders": "Štýl orámovania",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textCellSize": "Veľkosť bunky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textColumns": "Stĺpce",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textDistributeCols": "Rozdeliť stĺpce",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textDistributeRows": "Rozložiť riadky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textEdit": "Riadky a stĺpce",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textEmptyTemplate": "Žiadne šablóny",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textFirst": "Prvý",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Hlavička",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Výška",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Trvať/posledný",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Riadky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Vyberte orámovanie, ktoré chcete zmeniť podľa vyššie uvedeného štýlu",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1452,6 +1757,9 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.tipRight": "Nastaviť len pravé vonkajšie orámovanie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.tipTop": "Nastaviť len horné vonkajšie orámovanie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.txtNoBorders": "Bez orámovania",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Accent": "Akcent",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Colorful": "Farebné",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Dark": "Tmavý",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Zarovnanie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Zarovnanie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Medzera medzi bunkami",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1543,9 +1851,13 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTemplate": "Šablóna",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTransform": "Transformovať",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TextArtSettings.txtNoBorders": "Bez čiary",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnAddComment": "Pridať komentár",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "Prázdná stránka",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Stĺpce",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Komentár",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Dátum a čas",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Graf",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "Kontroly obsahu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "Iniciála",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsEquation": "Rovnica",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsHeader": "Záhlavie/päta",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1564,9 +1876,12 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgGroup": "Skupina",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgWrapping": "Obal",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.mniCustomTable": "Vložiť vlastnú tabuľku",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.mniDrawTable": "Nakresli tabuľku",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditControls": "Nastavenia ovládacieho prvku",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditDropCap": "Nastavenie Iniciály",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditFooter": "Upraviť pätu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditHeader": "Upraviť hlavičku",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEraseTable": "Vymazať tabuľku",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHiddenBorders": "Skryté orámovania tabuľky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHiddenChars": "Formátovacie značky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromFile": "Obrázok zo súboru",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1575,13 +1890,18 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textAutoColor": "Automaticky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textBold": "Tučné",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textBottom": "Dole",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textCheckboxControl": "Zaškrtávacie políčko",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsCustom": "Vlastné stĺpce",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsLeft": "Vľavo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsOne": "Jeden",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsRight": "Vpravo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsThree": "Tri",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsTwo": "Dva",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textComboboxControl": "Zmiešaná schránka",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textContPage": "Súvislá/neprerušovaná strana",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textDateControl": "Dátum",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textDropdownControl": "Rozbaľovací zoznam",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textEditWatermark": "Vlastný vodoznak",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textEvenPage": "Párna stránka",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textInMargin": "V okraji",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsColumnBreak": "Vložiť stĺpcové zalomenie ",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1600,7 +1920,6 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsUsNormal": "US Štandard",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsWide": "Široký",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "Pridať novú vlastnú farbu",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Pridať novú vlastnú farbu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textNextPage": "Ďalšia stránka",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textNone": "Žiadny",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textOddPage": "Nepárna strana",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1617,6 +1936,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuUpdate": "Aktualizovať z výberu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textSubscript": "Dolný index",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Horný index",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Spolupráca",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Súbor",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Hlavná stránka",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Vložiť",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1655,6 +1975,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Vložiť obrázok",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Vložiť číslo stránky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Vložiť automatický tvar",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Vložiť symbol",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Vložiť tabuľku",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Vložiť text",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTextArt": "Vložiť Text Art",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1679,6 +2000,12 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipShowHiddenChars": "Formátovacie značky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSynchronize": "Dokument bol zmenený ďalším používateľom. Prosím, kliknite na uloženie zmien a opätovne načítajte aktualizácie.",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipUndo": "Krok späť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipWatermark": "Uprav vodoznak",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribHor": "Rozložiť horizontálne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribVert": "Rozložiť vertikálne",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtMarginAlign": "Zarovnať k okraju",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtObjectsAlign": "Zarovnať označené objekty",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtPageAlign": "Zarovnať ku strane",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme1": "Kancelária",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme10": "Medián",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme11": "Metro",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1699,5 +2026,21 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme6": "Dav",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme7": "Spravodlivosť",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme8": "Prietok",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "Zlieváreň"
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "Zlieváreň",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Automaticky",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textBold": "Tučné",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": "Diagonálny",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "Písmo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "Zo súboru",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromStorage": "Z úložiska",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "Z URL adresy ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textHor": "Vodorovný",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textImageW": "Vodoznak na obrázku",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textItalic": "Kurzíva",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLanguage": "Jazyk",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLayout": "Rozloženie",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Pridať novú vlastnú farbu",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNone": "žiadny",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.tipFontName": "Názov písma",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.tipFontSize": "Veľkosť písma"
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
|
@ -222,6 +222,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCompare": "Primerjaj trenutni dokument z drugim",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAccept": "Accept",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptAll": "Accept All Changes",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptChanges": "Sprejmi spremembe",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptCurrent": "Accept Current Changes",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtChat": "Pogovor",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtClose": "Close",
|
||||
|
|
@ -268,6 +269,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "Znak",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "Znak za Copyright ©",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "Ime pisave",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textQEmSpace": "1/4 prostora",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "All unsaved changes in this document will be lost.<br> Click \"Cancel\" then \"Save\" to save them. Click \"OK\" to discard all the unsaved changes.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Neimenovan dokument",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning",
|
||||
|
|
@ -317,6 +319,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.mailMergeLoadFileText": "Loading Data Source...",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.mailMergeLoadFileTitle": "Loading Data Source",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Opozorilo",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.openErrorText": "Prišlo je do težave med odpiranjem datoteke.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.openTextText": "Odpiranje dokumenta...",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.openTitleText": "Odpiranje dokumenta",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.printTextText": "Tiskanje dokumenta...",
|
||||
|
|
@ -324,6 +327,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.reloadButtonText": "Osveži stran",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.requestEditFailedMessageText": "Nekdo v tem trenutku ureja ta dokument. Prosim ponovno poskusite kasneje.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.requestEditFailedTitleText": "Dostop zavrnjen",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.saveErrorText": "Prišlo je do težave med shranjevanjem datoteke.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.savePreparingText": "Priprava za shranjevanje",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.savePreparingTitle": "Priprava za shranjevanje. Prosim počakajte...",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.saveTextText": "Shranjevanje dokumenta...",
|
||||
|
|
@ -344,6 +348,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "The Undo/Redo functions are disabled for the Fast co-editing mode.<br>Click the 'Strict mode' button to switch to the Strict co-editing mode to edit the file without other users interference and send your changes only after you save them. You can switch between the co-editing modes using the editor Advanced settings.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.titleServerVersion": "Urednik je bil posodobljen",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.titleUpdateVersion": "Različica spremenjena",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtAbove": "Nad",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtArt": "Your text here",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtBasicShapes": "Osnovne oblike",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtBookmarkError": "Težava! Zaznamek ni definiran",
|
||||
|
|
@ -382,6 +387,16 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_pie": "Tortni grafikon",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_plaque": "Podpiši",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_plus": "Plus",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star10": "10-kraka zvezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star12": "12-kraka zvezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star16": "16-kraka zvezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star24": "24-kraka zvezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star32": "32-kraka zvezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star4": "4-kraka zvezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star5": "5-kraka zvezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star6": "6-kraka zvezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star7": "7-kraka zvezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star8": "8-kraka zvezda",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_sun": "Sonce",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_textRect": "Polje z besedilom",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_upArrow": "Puščica: gor",
|
||||
|
|
@ -761,6 +776,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textName": "Ime",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textTitle": "Zaznamki",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAdd": "Dodaj oznako",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAfter": "po",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textBefore": "Pred",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDelete": "Izbriši oznako",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textInsert": "Vstavi",
|
||||
|
|
@ -770,6 +786,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textTitle": "Vstavi citat",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textCol": "Stolpci",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textRow": "Vrstice",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textUp": "Nad kazalcem",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textTitle": "Izbriši celice",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.textAdvanced": "Prikaži napredne nastavitve",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.textChartType": "Spremeni vrsto razpredelnice",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1167,6 +1184,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.txtTight": "Tesen",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.txtTopAndBottom": "Vrh in Dno",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Oblazinjenje besedila",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAbsoluteWH": "Absolutno",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Poravnava",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Puščice",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Začetna velikost",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1338,6 +1356,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strDoubleStrike": "Dvojno prečrtanje",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLeftText": "Levo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsRightText": "Desno",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingAfter": "po",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingBefore": "Pred",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepLines": "Linije ohrani skupaj",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepNext": "Ohrani z naslednjim",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1520,6 +1539,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.tipRight": "Nastavi le zunanjo desno mejo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.tipTop": "Nastavi le zunanjo zgornjo mejo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.txtNoBorders": "Ni mej",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Accent": "Preglas",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Colorful": "Pisano",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Dark": "Temen",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Poravnava",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1577,6 +1597,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipTableOuterCellAll": "Nastavi zunanjo mejo in meje za vse notranje celice",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipTableOuterCellInner": "Nastavi zunanjo mejo in vertikalne ter horizontalne črte za notranje celice",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipTableOuterCellOuter": "Nastavi zunanjo mejo tabele in zunanje meje za notranje celice",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.txtCm": "Centimeter",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.txtInch": "Palec",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "Ni mej",
|
||||
"DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.txtPercent": "Odstotek",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1612,6 +1633,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnPageOrient": "Usmerjenost",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnPageSize": "Velikost",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnWatermark": "Vodni žig",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgAlign": "Poravnava",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgBackward": "Premakni v ozadje",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgGroup": "Skupina",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.mniCustomTable": "Vstavi tabelo po more",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1669,6 +1691,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuUpdate": "Update from selection",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textSubscript": "Pripis",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Nadpis",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Skupinsko delo",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Datoteka",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Domov",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Vstavi",
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -193,6 +193,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.Plugins.textLoading": "Завантаження",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Plugins.textStart": "Початок",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Plugins.textStop": "Зупинитись",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.txtAddPwd": "Додати пароль",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Protection.txtInvisibleSignature": "Додати цифровий підпис",
|
||||
"Common.Views.RenameDialog.textName": "Ім'я файлу",
|
||||
"Common.Views.RenameDialog.txtInvalidName": "Ім'я файлу не може містити жодного з наступних символів:",
|
||||
|
|
@ -247,6 +248,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtRejectAll": "Відхилити усі зміни",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtRejectCurrent": "Відхилити поточну зміну",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textAdd": "Додати",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textAddReply": "Додати відповідь",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textCancel": "Скасувати",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textClose": "Закрити",
|
||||
"Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textEdit": "Гаразд",
|
||||
|
|
@ -366,8 +368,10 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtRectangles": "Прямокутники",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtSeries": "Серії",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonHome": "Кнопка Домівка",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_arc": "Дуга",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cloud": "Хмара",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_corner": "Кут",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cube": "Куб",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_spline": "Крива",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtStarsRibbons": "Зірки та стрічки",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_footnote_text": "Текст виноски",
|
||||
|
|
@ -750,8 +754,13 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textClose": "Закрити",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textCopy": "Копіювати",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textDelete": "Вилучити",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textGoto": "Перейти",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textHidden": "Приховані закладки",
|
||||
"DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textTitle": "Закладки",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAdd": "Додати мітку",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAfter": "Після",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDash": "тире",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textUp": "Над курсором",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textLeft": "Пересунути комірки ліворуч",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textTitle": "Вилучити комірки",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ChartSettings.textAdvanced": "Показати додаткові налаштування",
|
||||
|
|
@ -775,6 +784,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Налаштування порівняння",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAdd": "Додати",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textApplyAll": "Застосувати до всього",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textChange": "Редагувати",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textColor": "Колір",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDelete": "Вилучити",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDisplayName": "Ім'я для показу",
|
||||
|
|
@ -902,6 +912,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteEq": "Вилучити рівняння",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteGroupChar": "Вилучити символ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteRadical": "Вилучити корінь",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtEmpty": "(Пусто)",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionLinear": "Зміна до лінійної фракції",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionSkewed": "Зміна перекошеної фракції",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionStacked": "Зміна складеної фракції",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1032,6 +1043,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.noTemplatesText": "Немає шаблонів",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.okButtonText": "Застосувати",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddAuthor": "Додати автора",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddText": "Додати текст",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAppName": "Застосунок",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAuthor": "Автор",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "Змінити права доступу",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1339,6 +1351,8 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strDoubleStrike": "Подвійне перекреслення",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLeftText": "Лівий",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsRightText": "Право",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingAfter": "Після",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingBefore": "Перед",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepLines": "Тримайте лінії разом",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepNext": "Зберегати з текстом",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Набивання",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1381,6 +1395,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipOuter": "Встановити лише зовнішній край",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipRight": "Встановити лише праву межу",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipTop": "Встановити лише верхню межу",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtAutoText": "Авто",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "Немає кордонів",
|
||||
"DE.Views.RightMenu.txtChartSettings": "Налаштування діаграми",
|
||||
"DE.Views.RightMenu.txtHeaderFooterSettings": "Параметри заголовка та нижнього колонтитула",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1596,6 +1611,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnAddComment": "Додати коментар",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Колонки",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Коментар",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Дата та час",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Діаграма",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "Буквиця",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsEquation": "Рівняння",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1735,6 +1751,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipShowHiddenChars": "недруковані символи",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSynchronize": "Документ був змінений іншим користувачем. Будь ласка, натисніть, щоб зберегти зміни та перезавантажити оновлення.",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipUndo": "Скасувати",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtMarginAlign": "Вирівняти відносно поля",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme1": "Офіс",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme10": "Медіана",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme11": "Метро",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1756,6 +1773,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme7": "Власний",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme8": "Розпливатися",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "Ливарня",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Авто",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textBold": "Грубий",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textColor": "Колір тексту",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textItalic": "Курсив",
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -80,6 +80,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "XY（散射）",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textStock": "股票",
|
||||
"Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "平面",
|
||||
"Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "另一个应用正在编辑本文件。你仍然可以继续编辑此文件，你可以将你的编辑保存成另一个拷贝。",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "四月",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "八月",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "十二月",
|
||||
|
|
@ -113,6 +114,7 @@
|
|||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "星期二",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "我们",
|
||||
"Common.UI.Calendar.textYears": "年",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "添加新的自定义颜色",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "没有边框",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "没有边框",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "没有风格",
|
||||
|
|
@ -155,6 +157,10 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "技术支持",
|
||||
"Common.Views.About.txtTel": "电话：",
|
||||
"Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "版本",
|
||||
"Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textBy": "依据",
|
||||
"Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textMathCorrect": "数学自动修正",
|
||||
"Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textReplace": "替换:",
|
||||
"Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "自动修正",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Chat.textSend": "发送",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Comments.textAdd": "添加",
|
||||
"Common.Views.Comments.textAddComment": "发表评论",
|
||||
|
|
@ -357,11 +363,30 @@
|
|||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textShowDate": "在签名行中显示签名日期",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "签名设置",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "这是必填栏",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "字符",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCode": "Unicode十六进制值",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "版权所有标识",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDCQuote": "后双引号",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDOQuote": "前双引号",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEllipsis": "横向省略号",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmDash": "破折号",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnDash": "半破折号",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "字体 ",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBHyphen": "不换行连词符",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBSpace": "不换行空格",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textPilcrow": "段落标识",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRange": "范围",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRecent": "最近使用的符号",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRegistered": "注册商标标识",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "后单引号",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSection": "章节标识",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textShortcut": "快捷键",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSHyphen": "软连词符",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSOQuote": "前单引号",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSpecial": "特殊字符",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSymbols": "符号",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTitle": "符号",
|
||||
"Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTradeMark": "商标标识",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "本文档中的所有未保存的更改都将丢失。<br>单击“取消”，然后单击“保存”保存。单击“确定”以放弃所有未保存的更改。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "未命名的文档",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告",
|
||||
|
|
@ -387,6 +412,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorAccessDeny": "您正在尝试执行您没有权限的操作。<br>请联系您的文档服务器管理员.",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "图片地址不正确",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "服务器连接丢失。该文档现在无法编辑",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorCompare": "协作编辑状态下，无法使用文件比对功能。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "这份文件无法保存。请检查连接设置或联系您的管理员。<br>当你点击“OK”按钮,系统将提示您下载文档。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "外部错误。<br>数据库连接错误。如果错误仍然存在，请联系支持人员。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataEncrypted": "加密更改已收到，无法对其解密。",
|
||||
|
|
@ -403,6 +429,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyExpire": "密钥过期",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeLoadFile": "加载失败",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeSaveFile": "合并失败",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorPasteSlicerError": "无法将表格分法从一个工作表中复制到另一个。<br>请再试一次。可尝试选取整个表格和分法。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorProcessSaveResult": "保存失败",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorServerVersion": "该编辑版本已经更新。该页面将被重新加载以应用更改。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.errorSessionAbsolute": "文档编辑会话已过期。请重新加载页面。",
|
||||
|
|
@ -450,15 +477,20 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "列数必须小于%1。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "行数必须小于%1。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "匿名",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "应用到所有公式",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "访问网站",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "所有更改已保存",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "关闭",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "点击关闭提示",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "联系销售",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textConvertEquation": "这个公式是由一个早期版本的公式编辑器创建的。这个版本现在不受支持了。要想编辑这个公式，你需要将其转换成 Office Math ML 格式.<br>现在转换吗？",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textCustomLoader": "请注意，根据许可条款您无权更改加载程序。<br>请联系我们的销售部门获取报价。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textHasMacros": "这个文件带有自动宏。<br> 是否要运行宏？",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textLearnMore": "了解更多",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "文件加载中…",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "ONLYOFFICE开源版本",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textPaidFeature": "付费功能",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textRemember": "记住我的选择",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "形状",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "严格模式",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "对于快速的协同编辑模式，取消/重做功能是禁用的。< br >单击“严格模式”按钮切换到严格co-editing模式编辑该文件没有其他用户干扰和发送您的更改只后你拯救他们。您可以使用编辑器高级设置在编辑模式之间切换。",
|
||||
|
|
@ -478,6 +510,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "图表标题",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "设置编辑模式..",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtEndOfFormula": "意外的公式结尾",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "输入日期。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "历史加载失败",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "偶数页",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "图形箭头",
|
||||
|
|
@ -697,6 +730,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableInd": "表格索引不能为零",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableOfContents": "目录",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtTooLarge": "数字太大，无法设定格式",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtTypeEquation": "在这里输入公式。",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtUndefBookmark": "未定义书签",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtXAxis": "X轴",
|
||||
"DE.Controllers.Main.txtYAxis": "Y轴",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1154,6 +1188,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "锁定",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "标题",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "无",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textPlaceholder": "占位符",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "显示为",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "系统",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTag": "标签",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1168,6 +1203,12 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "列分隔符",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "列之间的间距",
|
||||
"DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "列",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "设置{0}：{1}的默认格式",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "设为默认",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "格式",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "语言",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textUpdate": "自动更新",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "日期、时间",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "以上",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "发表评论",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "框架高级设置",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1257,6 +1298,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipV": "垂直翻转",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFollow": "跟随移动",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "从文件导入",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "来自存储设备",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "从URL",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "联接上一个列表",
|
||||
"DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNest": "下一个表格",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1498,6 +1540,9 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strForcesave": "始终保存到服务器（否则在文档关闭时保存到服务器）",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strInputMode": "该又是象形文字",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strLiveComment": "打开评论的显示",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strMacrosSettings": "宏设置",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPaste": "剪切、拷贝、黏贴",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPasteButton": "在执行粘贴操作后显示“粘贴选项”按钮",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strResolvedComment": "打开已解决的注释的显示",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowChanges": "实时协作变更",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strSpellCheckMode": "打开拼写检查选项",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1517,6 +1562,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "每一分钟",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textOldVersions": "将文件保存为DOCX时，使其与较旧的MS-Word版本兼容",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "查看全部",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "自动修正选项...",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "默认缓存模式",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "厘米",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitPage": "适合页面",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1528,8 +1574,15 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtMac": "作为OS X",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "本地",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "无查看",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtProofing": "审订",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "点",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacros": "启动所有项目",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "启动所有不带通知的宏",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "拼写检查",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacros": "解除所有项目",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacrosDesc": "解除所有不带通知的宏",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacros": "显示通知",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "解除所有带通知的宏",
|
||||
"DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "作为Windows",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "底部中心",
|
||||
"DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "左下",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1572,6 +1625,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitMargins": "适合边距",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFlip": "翻转",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "从文件导入",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromStorage": "来自存储设备",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "从URL",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "高度",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint270": "逆时针旋转90°",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1602,6 +1656,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "角度",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "箭头",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAspectRatio": "锁定宽高比",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "自动适应",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "初始大小",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "初始风格",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "下面",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1639,6 +1694,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textPositionPc": "相对位置",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelative": "关系到",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelativeWH": "相对的",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textResizeFit": "调整形状以适应文本",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRight": "对",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightMargin": "右页边距",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightOf": "在 - 的右边",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1647,6 +1703,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textShape": "形状设置",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSize": "大小",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSquare": "正方形",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTextBox": "文本框",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "图片 - 高级设置",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleChart": "图 - 高级设置",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleShape": "形状 - 高级设置",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1702,9 +1759,11 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "预览",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "右",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "校准",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "项目点",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "颜色",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFont": "字体和符号",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtLikeText": "像文字一样",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNewBullet": "添加一个新的项目点",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "无",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSize": "大小",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSymbol": "符号",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1865,6 +1924,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "效果",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textExact": "精确",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textFirstLine": "第一行",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textHanging": "悬挂",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textJustified": "正当",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "前导符",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "左",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1920,6 +1980,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "无图案",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFlip": "翻转",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "从文件导入",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromStorage": "来自存储设备",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "从URL",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradient": "渐变",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "渐变填充",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1934,6 +1995,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "径向",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotate90": "旋转90°",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotation": "旋转",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectImage": "选取图片",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectTexture": "请选择",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStretch": "伸展",
|
||||
"DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStyle": "类型",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2163,6 +2225,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "空白页",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "列",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "批注",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "日期、时间",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "图表",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "内容控件",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "下沉",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2232,7 +2295,6 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsUsNormal": "美国标准",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsWide": "宽",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "添加新的自定义颜色",
|
||||
"Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "添加新的自定义颜色",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textNextPage": "下一页",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textNoHighlight": "无高亮",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.textNone": "无",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2280,6 +2342,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipControls": "插入内容控件",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopy": "复制",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopyStyle": "复制样式",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDateTime": "插入当前日期和时间",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecFont": "递减字体大小",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecPrLeft": "减少缩进",
|
||||
"DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDropCap": "插入下沉",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2356,6 +2419,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": " 斜线的",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "字体 ",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "从文件导入",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromStorage": "来自存储设备",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "从URL导入",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textHor": "水平的",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textImageW": "图像水印",
|
||||
|
|
@ -2365,6 +2429,7 @@
|
|||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "添加新的自定义颜色",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNone": "无",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textScale": "规模",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textSelect": "选择图像",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textStrikeout": "删除线",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textText": "文本",
|
||||
"DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTextW": "文本水印",
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,6 +14,7 @@
|
|||
{"src": "UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm", "name": "Show/hide nonprinting characters" },
|
||||
{"src": "UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm", "name": "Insert section breaks" },
|
||||
{ "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm", "name": "Insert headers and footers" },
|
||||
{"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertDateTime.htm", "name": "Insert date and time"},
|
||||
{"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm", "name": "Insert page numbers"},
|
||||
{ "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm", "name": "Insert footnotes" },
|
||||
{ "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm", "name": "Add bookmarks" },
|
||||
|
|
@ -47,6 +48,7 @@
|
|||
{"src": "UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm", "name": "Create table of contents" },
|
||||
{"src": "UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm", "name": "Use mail merge", "headername": "Mail Merge"},
|
||||
{ "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm", "name": "Insert equations", "headername": "Math equations" },
|
||||
{"src": "UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm", "name": "Use Math AutoCorrect" },
|
||||
{"src": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", "name": "Collaborative document editing", "headername": "Document co-editing"},
|
||||
{ "src": "HelpfulHints/Review.htm", "name": "Document Review" },
|
||||
{"src": "HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm", "name": "Compare documents"},
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -13,13 +13,13 @@
|
|||
<div class="search-field">
|
||||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>About Document Editor</h1>
|
||||
<p><b>Document Editor</b> is an <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">online</span> application that lets you look through
|
||||
<h1>About the Document Editor</h1>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Document Editor</b> is an <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">online</span> application that allows you to view through
|
||||
and edit documents<span class="onlineDocumentFeatures"> directly in your browser</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Using <b>Document Editor</b>, you can perform various editing operations like in any desktop editor,
|
||||
<p>Using the <b>Document Editor</b>, you can perform various editing operations like in any desktop editor,
|
||||
print the edited documents keeping all the formatting details or download them onto your computer hard disk drive
|
||||
as DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML files.</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">To view the current software version and licensor details in the <em>online version</em>, click the <img alt="About icon" src="../images/about.png" /> icon at the left sidebar.</span> <span class="desktopDocumentFeatures"> To view the current software version and licensor details in the <em>desktop version</em>, select the <b>About</b> menu item at the left sidebar of the main program window.</span></p>
|
||||
of your computer as DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML files.</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">To view the current software version and licensor details in the <em>online version</em>, click the <img alt="About icon" src="../images/about.png" /> icon on the left sidebar.</span> <span class="desktopDocumentFeatures"> To view the current software version and licensor details in the <em>desktop version</em>, select the <b>About</b> menu item on the left sidebar of the main program window.</span></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</html>
|
||||
|
|
@ -13,22 +13,23 @@
|
|||
<div class="search-field">
|
||||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Advanced Settings of Document Editor</h1>
|
||||
<p><b>Document Editor</b> lets you change its advanced settings. To access them, open the <b>File</b> tab at the top toolbar and select the <b>Advanced Settings...</b> option. You can also click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon on the right side of the editor header and select the <b>Advanced settings</b> option.</p>
|
||||
<h1>Advanced Settings of the Document Editor</h1>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Document Editor</b> allows you to change its advanced settings. To access them, open the <b>File</b> tab on the top toolbar and select the <b>Advanced Settings...</b> option. You can also click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon on the right side of the editor header and select the <b>Advanced settings</b> option.</p>
|
||||
<p>The advanced settings are:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Commenting Display</b> is used to turn on/off the live commenting option:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Turn on display of the comments</b> - if you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the <b>Comments</b> <img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> icon at the left sidebar.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Turn on display of the resolved comments</b> - this feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments were hidden in the document text. You can view such comments only if you click the <b>Comments</b> <img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> icon at the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the document text.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Turn on display of the comments</b> - if you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the <b>Comments</b> <img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> icon on the left sidebar.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Turn on display of the resolved comments</b> - this feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments were hidden in the document text. You can view such comments only if you click the <b>Comments</b> <img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> icon on the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the document text.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Spell Checking</b> is used to turn on/off the spell checking option.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Proofing</b> - used to automatically replace word or symbol typed in the <b>Replace:</b> box or chosen from the list by a new word or symbol displayed in the <b>By:</b> box.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Alternate Input</b> is used to turn on/off hieroglyphs.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Alignment Guides</b> is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects and allow you to position them on the page precisely.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Compatibility</b> is used to <em>make the files compatible with older MS Word versions when saved as DOCX</em>.</li>
|
||||
<li><span class="onlineDocumentFeatures"><b>Autosave</b> is used in the <em>online version</em> to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing.</span></li>
|
||||
<li><span class="desktopDocumentFeatures"><b>Autorecover</b> - is used in the <em>desktop version</em> to turn on/off the option that allows to automatically recover documents in case of the unexpected program closing.</span></li>
|
||||
<li><span class="desktopDocumentFeatures"><b>Autorecover</b> - is used in the <em>desktop version</em> to turn on/off the option that allows automatically recovering documents in case the program closes unexpectedly.</span></li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures"><b>Co-editing Mode</b> is used to select the display of the changes made during the co-editing:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>By default the <b>Fast</b> mode is selected, the users who take part in the document co-editing will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -45,7 +46,7 @@
|
|||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Default Zoom Value</b> is used to set the default zoom value selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 200%. You can also choose the <b>Fit to Page</b> or <b>Fit to Width</b> option.</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<b>Font Hinting</b> is used to select the type a font is displayed in Document Editor:
|
||||
<b>Font Hinting</b> is used to select the type a font is displayed in the Document Editor:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>Choose <b>As Windows</b> if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting.</li>
|
||||
<li>Choose <b>As OS X</b> if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -53,7 +54,7 @@
|
|||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Default cache mode</b> - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when an issue in the Google Chrome browser with the enabled hardware acceleration occurs.
|
||||
<p>Document Editor has two cache modes:</p>
|
||||
<p>The Document Editor has two cache modes:</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>In the <b>first cache mode</b>, each letter is cached as a separate picture.</li>
|
||||
<li>In the <b>second cache mode</b>, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -65,6 +66,14 @@
|
|||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Unit of Measurement</b> is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties windows for measuring elements parameters such as width, height, spacing, margins etc. You can select the <b>Centimeter</b>, <b>Point</b>, or <b>Inch</b> option.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Cut, copy and paste</b> - used to show the <b>Paste Options</b> button when content is pasted. Check the box to enable this feature.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Macros Settings</b> - used to set macros display with a notification.
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>Choose <b>Disable all</b> to disable all macros within the document;</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Show notification</b> to receive notifications about macros within the document;</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Enable all</b> to automatically run all macros within the document.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>To save the changes you made, click the <b>Apply</b> button.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,13 +14,13 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Collaborative Document Editing</h1>
|
||||
<p><b>Document Editor</b> offers you the possibility to work at a document collaboratively with other users. This feature includes:</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Document Editor</b> allows you to collaboratively work on a document with other users. This feature includes:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures">simultaneous multi-user access to the edited document</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures">simultaneous multi-user access to the document to be edited</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures">visual indication of passages that are being edited by other users</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures">real-time changes display or synchronization of changes with one button click</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures">chat to share ideas concerning particular document parts</li>
|
||||
<li>comments containing the description of a task or problem that should be solved (it's also possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the <em>online version</em>)</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures">real-time display of changes or synchronization of changes with one button click</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures">chat to share ideas concerning particular parts of the document</li>
|
||||
<li>comments with the description of a task or problem that should be solved (it's also possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the <em>online version</em>)</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<div class="desktopDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<h3>Connecting to the online version</h3>
|
||||
|
|
@ -28,34 +28,34 @@
|
|||
</div>
|
||||
<div class="onlineDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<h3>Co-editing</h3>
|
||||
<p><b>Document Editor</b> allows to select one of the two available co-editing modes:</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Document Editor</b> allows you to select one of the two available co-editing modes:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Fast</b> is used by default and shows the changes made by other users in real time.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Strict</b> is selected to hide other user changes until you click the <b>Save</b> <img alt="Save icon" src="../images/saveupdate.png" /> icon to save your own changes and accept the changes made by others.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Strict</b> is selected to hide changes made by other users until you click the <b>Save</b> <img alt="Save icon" src="../images/saveupdate.png" /> icon to save your own changes and accept the changes made by co-authors.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>The mode can be selected in the <a href="../HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Advanced Settings</a>. It's also possible to choose the necessary mode using the <img alt="Co-editing Mode icon" src="../images/coeditingmode.png" /> <b>Co-editing Mode</b> icon at the <b>Collaboration</b> tab of the top toolbar:</p>
|
||||
<p>The mode can be selected in the <a href="../HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Advanced Settings</a>. It's also possible to choose the required mode using the <img alt="Co-editing Mode icon" src="../images/coeditingmode.png" /> <b>Co-editing Mode</b> icon on the <b>Collaboration</b> tab of the top toolbar:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Co-editing Mode menu" src="../images/coeditingmodemenu.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p class="note">
|
||||
<b>Note</b>: when you co-edit a document in the <b>Fast</b> mode, the possibility to <b>Redo</b> the last undone operation is not available.
|
||||
</p>
|
||||
<p>When a document is being edited by several users simultaneously in the <b>Strict</b> mode, the edited text passages are marked with dashed lines of different colors. By hovering the mouse cursor over one of the edited passages, the name of the user who is editing it at the moment is displayed. The <b>Fast</b> mode will show the actions and the names of the co-editors once they are editing the text.</p>
|
||||
<p>The number of users who are working at the current document is specified on the right side of the editor header - <img alt="Number of users icon" src="../images/usersnumber.png" />. If you want to see who exactly are editing the file now, you can click this icon or open the <b>Chat</b> panel with the full list of the users.</p>
|
||||
<p>When a document is being edited by several users simultaneously in the <b>Strict</b> mode, the edited text passages are marked with dashed lines of different colors. By hovering the mouse cursor over one of the edited passages, the name of the user who is editing it at the moment is displayed. The <b>Fast</b> mode will show the actions and the names of the co-editors when they are editing the text.</p>
|
||||
<p>The number of users who are working on the current document is displayed on the right side of the editor header - <img alt="Number of users icon" src="../images/usersnumber.png" />. If you want to see who exactly is editing the file now, you can click this icon or open the <b>Chat</b> panel with the full list of the users.</p>
|
||||
<p>When no users are viewing or editing the file, the icon in the editor header will look like <img alt="Manage document access rights icon" src="../images/access_rights.png" /> allowing you to manage the users who have access to the file right from the document: invite new users giving them permissions to <em>edit</em>, <em>read</em>, <em>comment</em>, <em>fill forms</em> or <em>review</em> the document, or <em>deny</em> some users access rights to the file. Click this icon to manage the access to the file; this can be done both when there are no other users who view or co-edit the document at the moment and when there are other users and the icon looks like <img alt="Number of users icon" src="../images/usersnumber.png" />. It's also possible to set access rights using the <img alt="Sharing icon" src="../images/sharingicon.png" /> <b>Sharing</b> icon at the <b>Collaboration</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
|
||||
<p>As soon as one of the users saves his/her changes by clicking the <img alt="Save icon" src="../images/savewhilecoediting.png" /> icon, the others will see a note within the status bar stating that they have updates. To save the changes you made, so that other users can view them, and get the updates saved by your co-editors, click the <img alt="Save icon" src="../images/saveupdate.png" /> icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar. The updates will be highlighted for you to check what exactly has been changed.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can specify what changes you want to be highlighted during co-editing if you click the <b>File</b> tab at the top toolbar, select the <b>Advanced Settings...</b> option and choose between <b>none</b>, <b>all</b> and <b>last</b> real-time collaboration changes. Selecting <b>View all</b> changes, all the changes made during the current session will be highlighted. Selecting <b>View last</b> changes, only the changes made since you last time clicked the <img alt="Save icon" src="../images/saveupdate.png" /> icon will be highlighted. Selecting <b>View None</b> changes, changes made during the current session will not be highlighted.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can specify what changes you want to be highlighted during co-editing if you click the <b>File</b> tab on the top toolbar, select the <b>Advanced Settings...</b> option and choose between <b>none</b>, <b>all</b> and <b>last</b> real-time collaboration changes. Selecting <b>View all</b> changes, all the changes made during the current session will be highlighted. Selecting <b>View last</b> changes, only the changes made since you last time clicked the <img alt="Save icon" src="../images/saveupdate.png" /> icon will be highlighted. Selecting <b>View None</b> changes, changes made during the current session will not be highlighted.</p>
|
||||
<h3 id="chat">Chat</h3>
|
||||
<p>You can use this tool to coordinate the co-editing process on-the-fly, for example, to arrange with your collaborators about who is doing what, which paragraph you are going to edit now etc.</p>
|
||||
<p>The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the document content it is better to use comments which are stored until you decide to delete them.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can use this tool to coordinate the co-editing process on-the-fly, for example, to distribute tasks and paragraphs to be edited by the collaborators, etc.</p>
|
||||
<p>The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the document content, it is better to use comments which are stored until they are deleted.</p>
|
||||
<p>To access the chat and leave a message for other users,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Chat icon" src="../images/chaticon.png" /> icon at the left sidebar, or <br />
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Chat icon" src="../images/chaticon.png" /> icon on the left sidebar, or <br />
|
||||
switch to the <b>Collaboration</b> tab of the top toolbar and click the <img alt="Chat icon" src="../images/chat_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Chat</b> button,
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>enter your text into the corresponding field below,</li>
|
||||
<li>press the <b>Send</b> button.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven't read yet, the chat icon will look like this - <img alt="Chat icon" src="../images/chaticon_new.png" />.</p>
|
||||
<p>To close the panel with chat messages, click the <img alt="Chat icon" src="../images/chaticon.png" /> icon at the left sidebar or the <img alt="Chat icon" src="../images/chat_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Chat</b> button at the top toolbar once again.</p>
|
||||
<p>To close the panel with chat messages, click the <img alt="Chat icon" src="../images/chaticon.png" /> icon on the left sidebar or the <img alt="Chat icon" src="../images/chat_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Chat</b> button at the top toolbar once again.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h3 id="comments">Comments</h3>
|
||||
<p>It's possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the <em>online version</em>.</p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -64,28 +64,28 @@
|
|||
<li>select a text passage where you think there is an error or problem,</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
switch to the <b>Insert</b> or <b>Collaboration</b> tab of the top toolbar and click the <img alt="Comment icon" src="../images/comment_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Comment</b> button, or<br />
|
||||
use the <img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> icon at the left sidebar to open the <b>Comments</b> panel and click the <b>Add Comment to Document</b> link, or<br />
|
||||
use the <img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> icon on the left sidebar to open the <b>Comments</b> panel and click the <b>Add Comment to Document</b> link, or<br />
|
||||
right-click the selected text passage and select the <b>Add Сomment</b> option from the contextual menu,
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>enter the needed text,</li>
|
||||
<li>enter the required text,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Add Comment/Add</b> button.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>The comment will be seen on the <b>Comments</b> panel on the left. Any other user can answer to the added comment asking questions or reporting on the work he/she has done. For this purpose, click the <b>Add Reply</b> link situated under the comment, type in your reply text in the entry field and press the <b>Reply</b> button.</p>
|
||||
<p>The comment will be seen on the <b>Comments</b> panel on the left. Any other user can answer the added comment asking questions or reporting on the work he/she has done. For this purpose, click the <b>Add Reply</b> link situated under the comment, type in your reply in the entry field and press the <b>Reply</b> button.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you are using the <b>Strict</b> co-editing mode, new comments added by other users will become visible only after you click the <img alt="Save icon" src="../images/saveupdate.png" /> icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar.</p>
|
||||
<p>The text passage you commented will be highlighted in the document. To view the comment, just click within the passage. If you need to disable this feature, click the <b>File</b> tab at the top toolbar, select the <b>Advanced Settings...</b> option and uncheck the <b>Turn on display of the comments</b> box. In this case the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the <img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> icon.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can manage the added comments using the icons in the comment balloon or at the <b>Comments</b> panel on the left:</p>
|
||||
<p>You can manage the added comments using the icons in the comment balloon or on the <b>Comments</b> panel on the left:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>edit the currently selected comment by clicking the <img alt="Edit icon" src="../images/editcommenticon.png" /> icon,</li>
|
||||
<li>delete the currently selected comment by clicking the <img alt="Delete icon" src="../images/deletecommenticon.png" /> icon,</li>
|
||||
<li>close the currently selected discussion by clicking the <img alt="Resolve icon" src="../images/resolveicon.png" /> icon if the task or problem you stated in your comment was solved, after that the discussion you opened with your comment gets the resolved status. To open it again, click the <img alt="Open again icon" src="../images/resolvedicon.png" /> icon. If you want to hide resolved comments, click the <b>File</b> tab at the top toolbar, select the <b>Advanced Settings...</b> option, uncheck the <b>Turn on display of the resolved comments</b> box and click <b>Apply</b>. In this case the resolved comments will be highlighted only if you click the <img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> icon.</li>
|
||||
<li>close the currently selected discussion by clicking the <img alt="Resolve icon" src="../images/resolveicon.png" /> icon if the task or problem you stated in your comment was solved, after that the discussion you opened with your comment gets the resolved status. To open it again, click the <img alt="Open again icon" src="../images/resolvedicon.png" /> icon. If you want to hide resolved comments, click the <b>File</b> tab on the top toolbar, select the <b>Advanced Settings...</b> option, uncheck the <b>Turn on display of the resolved comments</b> box and click <b>Apply</b>. In this case the resolved comments will be highlighted only if you click the <img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> icon.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<h4>Adding mentions</h4>
|
||||
<p>When entering comments, you can use the <b>mentions</b> feature that allows to attract somebody's attention to the comment and send a notification to the mentioned user via email and <b>Talk</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>When entering comments, you can use the <b>mentions</b> feature that allows you to attract somebody's attention to the comment and send a notification to the mentioned user via email and <b>Talk</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>To add a mention enter the "+" or "@" sign anywhere in the comment text - a list of the portal users will open. To simplify the search process, you can start typing a name in the comment field - the user list will change as you type. Select the necessary person from the list. If the file has not yet been shared with the mentioned user, the <b>Sharing Settings</b> window will open. <b>Read only</b> access type is selected by default. Change it if necessary and click <b>OK</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>The mentioned user will receive an email notification that he/she has been mentioned in a comment. If the file has been shared, the user will also receive a corresponding notification.</p>
|
||||
<p>To remove comments,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Remove comment icon" src="../images/removecomment_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Remove</b> button at the <b>Collaboration</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Remove comment icon" src="../images/removecomment_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Remove</b> button on the <b>Collaboration</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>select the necessary option from the menu:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Remove Current Comments</b> - to remove the currently selected comment. If some replies have been added to the comment, all its replies will be removed as well.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
|
|||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>To close the panel with comments, click the <img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> icon at the left sidebar once again.</p>
|
||||
<p>To close the panel with comments, click the <img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> icon on the left sidebar once again.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</html>
|
||||
|
|
@ -15,33 +15,33 @@
|
|||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Compare documents</h1>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: this option is available in the <b>paid</b> <em>online version</em> only starting from <b>Document Server</b> v. <b>5.5</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you need to compare and merge two documents, you can use the document <b>Compare</b> feature. It allows to display the differences between two documents and merge the documents by accepting the changes one by one or all at once.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you need to compare and merge two documents, you can use the document <b>Compare</b> feature. It allows displaying the differences between two documents and merge the documents by accepting the changes one by one or all at once.</p>
|
||||
<p>After comparing and merging two documents, the result will be stored on the portal as a new version of the original file<!-- (in the <em>online version</em> of editors)-->. <!--In the desktop version, when you click the <b>Save</b> button, the dialog window will appear where you will be suggested to save a new file.--></p>
|
||||
<p>If you do not need to merge documents which are being compared, you can reject all the changes so that the original document remains unchanged.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h3 id="choosedocument">Choose a document for comparison</h3>
|
||||
<p>To compare two documents, open the original document that you need to compare and select the second document for comparison:</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Collaboration</b> tab at the top toolbar and press the <img alt="Compare button" src="../images/comparebutton.png" /> <b>Compare</b> button,</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Collaboration</b> tab on the top toolbar and press the <img alt="Compare button" src="../images/comparebutton.png" /> <b>Compare</b> button,</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
select one of the following options to load the document:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>the <b>Document from File</b> option will open the standard dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary <em>.docx</em> file and click the <b>Open</b> button.</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
the <b>Document from URL</b> option will open the window where you can enter a link to the file stored in a third-party web storage (for example, Nextcloud) if you have corresponding access rights to it. The link must be a <b>direct link for downloading the file</b>. When the link is specified, click the <b>OK</b> button.
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: The direct link allows to download the file directly without opening it in a web browser. For example, to get a direct link in Nextcloud, find the necessary document in the file list, select the <b>Details</b> option from the file menu. Click the <b>Copy direct link (only works for users who have access to this file/folder)</b> icon to the right of the file name at the details panel. To find out how to get a direct link for downloading the file in a different third-party web storage, please refer to the corresponding third-party service documentation.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: The direct link allows downloading the file directly without opening it in a web browser. For example, to get a direct link in Nextcloud, find the necessary document in the file list, select the <b>Details</b> option from the file menu. Click the <b>Copy direct link (only works for users who have access to this file/folder)</b> icon on the right of the file name on the details panel. To find out how to get a direct link for downloading the file in a different third-party web storage, please refer to the corresponding third-party service documentation.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures"> the <b>Document from Storage</b> option <!--(available in the <em>online version</em> only)--> will open the <b>Select Data Source</b> window. It displays the list of all the <em>.docx</em> documents stored on your portal you have corresponding access rights to. To navigate between the <b>Documents</b> module sections use the menu in the left part of the window. Select the necessary <em>.docx</em> document and click the <b>OK</b> button.</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures"> the <b>Document from Storage</b> option <!--(available in the <em>online version</em> only)--> will open the <b>Select Data Source</b> window. It displays the list of all the <em>.docx</em> documents stored on your portal you have corresponding access rights to. To navigate through the sections of the <b>Documents</b> module, use the menu on the left part of the window. Select the necessary <em>.docx</em> document and click the <b>OK</b> button.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>When the second document for comparison is selected, the comparison process will start and the document will look as if it was opened in the <b>Review</b> mode. All the changes are highlighted with a color, and you can view the changes, navigate between them, accept or reject them one by one or all the changes at once. It's also possible to change the display mode and see how the document looks before comparison, in the process of comparison, or how it will look after comparison if you accept all changes.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h3 id="displaymode">Choose the changes display mode</h3>
|
||||
<p>Click the <img alt="Display Mode button" src="../images/review_displaymode.png" /> <b>Display Mode</b> button at the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list:</p>
|
||||
<p>Click the <img alt="Display Mode button" src="../images/review_displaymode.png" /> <b>Display Mode</b> button on the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<b>Markup</b> - this option is selected by default. It is used to display the document <b>in the process of comparison</b>. This mode allows both to view the changes and edit the document.
|
||||
<b>Markup</b> - this option is selected by default. It is used to display the document <b>in the process of comparison</b>. This mode allows both viewing the changes and editing the document.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Compare documents - Markup" src="../images/compare_markup.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -55,24 +55,24 @@
|
|||
</ul>
|
||||
|
||||
<h3 id="managechanges">Accept or reject changes</h3>
|
||||
<p>Use the <img alt="To Previous Change button" src="../images/review_previous.png" /> <b>Previous</b> and the <img alt="To Next Change button" src="../images/review_next.png" /> <b>Next</b> buttons at the top toolbar to navigate among the changes.</p>
|
||||
<p>To accept the currently selected change you can:</p>
|
||||
<p>Use the <img alt="To Previous Change button" src="../images/review_previous.png" /> <b>Previous</b> and the <img alt="To Next Change button" src="../images/review_next.png" /> <b>Next</b> buttons on the top toolbar to navigate through the changes.</p>
|
||||
<p>To accept the currently selected change, you can:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Accept button" src="../images/review_accepttoptoolbar.png" /> <b>Accept</b> button at the top toolbar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Accept button" src="../images/review_accepttoptoolbar.png" /> <b>Accept</b> button on the top toolbar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the downward arrow below the <b>Accept</b> button and select the <b>Accept Current Change</b> option (in this case, the change will be accepted and you will proceed to the next change), or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Accept</b> <img alt="Accept button" src="../images/review_accept.png" /> button of the change pop-up window.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the <img alt="Accept button" src="../images/review_accepttoptoolbar.png" /> <b>Accept</b> button and select the <b>Accept All Changes</b> option.</p>
|
||||
<p>To reject the current change you can:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Reject button" src="../images/review_rejecttoptoolbar.png" /> <b>Reject</b> button at the top toolbar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Reject button" src="../images/review_rejecttoptoolbar.png" /> <b>Reject</b> button on the top toolbar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the downward arrow below the <b>Reject</b> button and select the <b>Reject Current Change</b> option (in this case, the change will be rejected and you will move on to the next available change), or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Reject</b> <img alt="Reject button" src="../images/review_reject.png" /> button of the change pop-up window.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the <img alt="Reject button" src="../images/review_rejecttoptoolbar.png" /> <b>Reject</b> button and select the <b>Reject All Changes</b> option.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h3 id="comparisonnotes">Additional info on the comparison feature</h3>
|
||||
<h5>Method of the comparison</h5>
|
||||
<h5>Method of comparison</h5>
|
||||
<p>Documents are compared <b>by words</b>. If a word contains a change of at least one character (e.g. if a character was removed or replaced), in the result, the difference will be displayed as the change of the entire word, not the character.</p>
|
||||
<p>The image below illustrates the case when the original file contains the word 'Characters' and the document for comparison contains the word 'Character'.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Compare documents - method" src="../images/compare_method.png" /></p>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
|
|||
<td>Open 'File' panel</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>Alt</kbd>+<kbd>F</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>⌥ Option</kbd>+<kbd>F</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td>Open the <b>File</b> panel to save, download, print the current document, view its info, create a new document or open an existing one, access Document Editor help or advanced settings.</td>
|
||||
<td>Open the <b>File</b> panel panel to save, download, print the current document, view its info, create a new document or open an existing one, access the Document Editor Help Center or advanced settings.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box</td>
|
||||
|
|
@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
|
|||
<td>Repeat the last 'Find' action</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>⇧ Shift</kbd>+<kbd>F4</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>⇧ Shift</kbd>+<kbd>F4</kbd>,<br /><kbd>⌘ Cmd</kbd>+<kbd>G</kbd>,<br /><kbd>⌘ Cmd</kbd>+<kbd>⇧ Shift</kbd>+<kbd>F4</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td>Repeat the <b>Find</b> action which has been performed before the key combination press.</td>
|
||||
<td>Repeat the previous <b>Find</b> performed before the key combination was pressed.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Open 'Comments' panel</td>
|
||||
|
|
@ -70,49 +70,55 @@
|
|||
<td>Save document</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>S</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>^ Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>S</kbd>,<br /><kbd>⌘ Cmd</kbd>+<kbd>S</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td>Save all the changes to the document currently edited with Document Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format.</td>
|
||||
<td>Save all the changes to the document currently edited with The Document Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Print document</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>P</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>^ Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>P</kbd>,<br /><kbd>⌘ Cmd</kbd>+<kbd>P</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td>Print the document with one of the available printers or save it to a file.</td>
|
||||
<td>Print the document with one of the available printers or save it as a file.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Download As...</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>⇧ Shift</kbd>+<kbd>S</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>^ Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>⇧ Shift</kbd>+<kbd>S</kbd>,<br /><kbd>⌘ Cmd</kbd>+<kbd>⇧ Shift</kbd>+<kbd>S</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td>Open the <b>Download as...</b> panel to save the currently edited document to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML.</td>
|
||||
<td>Open the <b>Download as...</b> panel to save the currently edited document to the hard disk drive of your computer in one of the supported formats: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Full screen</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>F11</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><!--<kbd>⌘ Cmd</kbd>+<kbd>^ Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>F</kbd>--></td>
|
||||
<td>Switch to the full screen view to fit Document Editor into your screen.</td>
|
||||
<td>Switch to the full screen view to fit the Document Editor into your screen.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Help menu</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>F1</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>F1</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td>Open Document Editor <b>Help</b> menu.</td>
|
||||
<td>Open the Document Editor <b>Help</b> menu.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Open existing file (Desktop Editors)</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>O</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td></td>
|
||||
<td>On the <b>Open local file</b> tab in <b>Desktop Editors</b>, opens the standard dialog box that allows to select an existing file.</td>
|
||||
<td>On the <b>Open local file</b> tab in the <b>Desktop Editors</b>, opens the standard dialog box that allows to select an existing file.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Close file (Desktop Editors)</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>W</kbd>,<br /><kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>F4</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>^ Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>W</kbd>,<br /><kbd>⌘ Cmd</kbd>+<kbd>W</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td>Close the current document window in <b>Desktop Editors</b>.</td>
|
||||
<td>Close the current document window in the <b>Desktop Editors</b>.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Element contextual menu</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>⇧ Shift</kbd>+<kbd>F10</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>⇧ Shift</kbd>+<kbd>F10</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td>Open the selected element <b>contextual menu</b>.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>0</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>^ Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>0</kbd> or <kbd>⌘ Cmd</kbd>+<kbd>0</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td>Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current document to a default 100%.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<th colspan="4" class="keyboard_section">Navigation</th>
|
||||
|
|
@ -276,7 +282,7 @@
|
|||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Create nonbreaking hyphen</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>⇧ Shift</kbd>+<kbd>Hyphen</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>⇧ Shift</kbd>+<kbd>_</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>^ Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>⇧ Shift</kbd>+<kbd>Hyphen</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td>Create a hyphen between characters which cannot be used to start a new line.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
|
|
@ -416,25 +422,25 @@
|
|||
<td>Bold</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>B</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>^ Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>B</kbd>,<br /><kbd>⌘ Cmd</kbd>+<kbd>B</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td>Make the font of the selected text fragment bold giving it more weight.</td>
|
||||
<td>Make the font of the selected text fragment darker and heavier than normal.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Italic</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>I</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>^ Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>I</kbd>,<br /><kbd>⌘ Cmd</kbd>+<kbd>I</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td>Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized giving it some right side tilt.</td>
|
||||
<td>Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized and slightly slanted.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Underline</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>U</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>^ Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>U</kbd>,<br /><kbd>⌘ Cmd</kbd>+<kbd>U</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td>Make the selected text fragment underlined with the line going under the letters.</td>
|
||||
<td>Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going below the letters.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Strikeout</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>5</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>^ Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>5</kbd>,<br /><kbd>⌘ Cmd</kbd>+<kbd>5</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td>Make the selected text fragment struck out with the line going through the letters.</td>
|
||||
<td>Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going through the letters.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Subscript</td>
|
||||
|
|
@ -658,6 +664,24 @@
|
|||
<td><kbd>Alt</kbd>+<kbd>=</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td></td>
|
||||
<td>Insert a formula at the current cursor position.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Insert an em dash</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>Alt</kbd>+<kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>Num-</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td></td>
|
||||
<td>Insert an em dash ‘—’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Insert a non-breaking hyphen</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>⇧ Shift</kbd>+<kbd>_</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>^ Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>⇧ Shift</kbd>+<kbd>Hyphen</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td>Insert a non-breaking hyphen ‘-’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Insert a no-break space</td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>⇧ Shift</kbd>+<kbd>␣ Spacebar</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td><kbd>^ Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>⇧ Shift</kbd>+<kbd>␣ Spacebar</kbd></td>
|
||||
<td>Insert a no-break space ‘o’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>View Settings and Navigation Tools</h1>
|
||||
<p><b>Document Editor</b> offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your document: zoom, page number indicator etc.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Document Editor</b> offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your document: zoom, page number indicator etc.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Adjust the View Settings</h3>
|
||||
<p>To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the document, click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon on the right side of the editor header and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown.
|
||||
You can select the following options from the <b>View settings</b> drop-down list:
|
||||
|
|
@ -28,8 +28,10 @@
|
|||
<li><b>Hide Rulers</b> - hides rulers which are used to align text, graphics, tables, and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents. To show the hidden <b>Rulers</b> click this option once again.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object (e.g. image, chart, shape) or text passage and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again.</p>
|
||||
<p>When the <b>Comments</b> <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">or <b>Chat</b></span> panel is opened, the left sidebar width is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop:
|
||||
move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the sidebar width. To restore its original width move the border to the left.</p>
|
||||
<p>
|
||||
When the <b>Comments</b> <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">or <b>Chat</b></span> panel is opened, the width of the left sidebar is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop:
|
||||
move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the width of the sidebar. To restore its original width, move the border to the left.
|
||||
</p>
|
||||
<h3>Use the Navigation Tools</h3>
|
||||
<p>To navigate through your document, use the following tools:</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Zoom</b> buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out the current document.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,14 +14,14 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Document Review</h1>
|
||||
<p>When somebody shares a file with you that has review permissions, you need to use the document <b>Review</b> feature.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you are the reviewer, then you can use the <b>Review</b> option to review the document, change the sentences, phrases and other page elements, correct spelling, and do other things to the document without actually editing it. All your changes will be recorded and shown to the person who sent the document to you.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you are the person who sends the file for the review, you will need to display all the changes which were made to it, view and either accept or reject them.</p>
|
||||
<p>When somebody shares a file with you using the review permissions, you need to apply the document <b>Review</b> feature.</p>
|
||||
<p>As a reviewer, you can use the Review option to review the document, change the sentences, phrases and other page elements, correct spelling, etc. without actually editing it. All your changes will be recorded and shown to the person who sent you the document.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you send the file for review, you will need to display all the changes which were made to it, view and either accept or reject them.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Enable the Track Changes feature</h3>
|
||||
<p>To see changes suggested by a reviewer, enable the <b>Track Changes</b> option in one of the following ways:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Track changes button" src="../images/trackchangesstatusbar.png" /> button in the right lower corner at the status bar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Collaboration</b> tab at the top toolbar and press the <img alt="Track Changes button" src="../images/trackchangestoptoolbar.png" /> <b>Track Changes</b> button.</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Track changes button" src="../images/trackchangesstatusbar.png" /> button in the right lower corner on the status bar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Collaboration</b> tab on the top toolbar and press the <img alt="Track Changes button" src="../images/trackchangestoptoolbar.png" /> <b>Track Changes</b> button.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: it is not necessary for the reviewer to enable the <b>Track Changes</b> option. It is enabled by default and cannot be disabled when the document is shared with review only access rights.</p>
|
||||
<h3>View changes</h3>
|
||||
|
|
@ -31,29 +31,29 @@
|
|||
<p>Click the double-crossed text in the original position and use the <img alt="Follow Move button" src="../images/follow_move.png" /> arrow in the change pop-up window to go to the new location of the text.</p>
|
||||
<p>Click the double-underlined text in the new position and use the <img alt="Follow Move button" src="../images/follow_move.png" /> arrow in the change pop-up window to go to to the original location of the text.</p>
|
||||
<h3 id="displaymode">Choose the changes display mode</h3>
|
||||
<p>Click the <img alt="Display Mode button" src="../images/review_displaymode.png" /> <b>Display Mode</b> button at the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list:</p>
|
||||
<p>Click the <img alt="Display Mode button" src="../images/review_displaymode.png" /> <b>Display Mode</b> button on the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Markup</b> - this option is selected by default. It allows both to view suggested changes and edit the document.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Markup</b> - this option is selected by default. It allows both viewing the suggested changes and editing the document.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Final</b> - this mode is used to display all the changes as if they were accepted. This option does not actually accept all changes, it only allows you to see how the document will look like after you accept all the changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Original</b> - this mode is used to display all the changes as if they were rejected. This option does not actually reject all changes, it only allows you to view the document without changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<h3 id="managechanges">Accept or reject changes</h3>
|
||||
<p>Use the <img alt="To Previous Change button" src="../images/review_previous.png" /> <b>Previous</b> and the <img alt="To Next Change button" src="../images/review_next.png" /> <b>Next</b> buttons at the top toolbar to navigate among the changes.</p>
|
||||
<p>Use the <img alt="To Previous Change button" src="../images/review_previous.png" /> <b>Previous</b> and the <img alt="To Next Change button" src="../images/review_next.png" /> <b>Next</b> buttons on the top toolbar to navigate through the changes.</p>
|
||||
<p>To accept the currently selected change you can:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Accept button" src="../images/review_accepttoptoolbar.png" /> <b>Accept</b> button at the top toolbar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Accept button" src="../images/review_accepttoptoolbar.png" /> <b>Accept</b> button on the top toolbar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the downward arrow below the <b>Accept</b> button and select the <b>Accept Current Change</b> option (in this case, the change will be accepted and you will proceed to the next change), or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Accept</b> <img alt="Accept button" src="../images/review_accept.png" /> button of the change pop-up window.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the <img alt="Accept button" src="../images/review_accepttoptoolbar.png" /> <b>Accept</b> button and select the <b>Accept All Changes</b> option.</p>
|
||||
<p>To reject the current change you can:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Reject button" src="../images/review_rejecttoptoolbar.png" /> <b>Reject</b> button at the top toolbar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Reject button" src="../images/review_rejecttoptoolbar.png" /> <b>Reject</b> button on the top toolbar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the downward arrow below the <b>Reject</b> button and select the <b>Reject Current Change</b> option (in this case, the change will be rejected and you will move on to the next available change), or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Reject</b> <img alt="Reject button" src="../images/review_reject.png" /> button of the change pop-up window.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the <img alt="Reject button" src="../images/review_rejecttoptoolbar.png" /> <b>Reject</b> button and select the <b>Reject All Changes</b> option.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: if you review the document the <b>Accept</b> and <b>Reject</b> options are not available for you. You can delete your changes using the <img alt="Delete change button" src="../images/review_delete.png" /> icon within the change balloon.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: if you review the document, the <b>Accept</b> and <b>Reject</b> options are not available for you. You can delete your changes using the <img alt="Delete change button" src="../images/review_delete.png" /> icon within the change balloon.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</html>
|
||||
|
|
@ -14,16 +14,16 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Search and Replace Function</h1>
|
||||
<p>To search for the needed characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited document,
|
||||
click the <img alt="Search icon" src="../images/searchicon.png" /> icon situated at the left sidebar or use the <em>Ctrl+F</em> key combination. </p>
|
||||
<p>To search for the required characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited document,
|
||||
click the <img alt="Search icon" src="../images/searchicon.png" /> icon situated on the left sidebar or use the <em>Ctrl+F</em> key combination. </p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Find and Replace</b> window will open:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Find and Replace Window" src="../images/search_window.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>Type in your inquiry into the corresponding data entry field.</li>
|
||||
<li>Specify search parameters by clicking the <img alt="Search options icon" src="../images/search_options.png" /> icon and checking the necessary options:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Case sensitive</b> - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). To disable this option click it once again.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Highlight results</b> - is used to highlight all found occurrences at once. To disable this option and remove the highlight click the option once again.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Case sensitive</b> - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). To disable this option, click it once again.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Highlight results</b> - is used to highlight all found occurrences at once. To disable this option and remove the highlight, click the option once again.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>Click one of the <b>arrow buttons</b> at the bottom right corner of the window.
|
||||
|
|
@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
|
|||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>The first occurrence of the required characters in the selected direction will be highlighted on the page. If it is not the word you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next occurrence of the characters you entered.</p>
|
||||
<p><b>To replace</b> one or more occurrences of the found characters click the <b>Replace</b> link below the data entry field or use the <em>Ctrl+H</em> key combination. The <b>Find and Replace</b> window will change:</p>
|
||||
<p><b>To replace</b> one or more occurrences of the found characters, click the <b>Replace</b> link below the data entry field or use the <em>Ctrl+H</em> key combination. The <b>Find and Replace</b> window will change:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Find and Replace Window" src="../images/search_replace_window.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>Type in the replacement text into the bottom data entry field.</li>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,16 +14,16 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Spell-checking</h1>
|
||||
<p><b>Document Editor</b> allows you to check the spelling of your text in a certain language and correct mistakes while editing. In the <em>desktop version</em>, it's also possible to add words into a custom dictionary which is common for all three editors.</p>
|
||||
<p>First of all, <b>choose a language</b> for your document. Click the <img alt="Set Document Language icon" src="../images/document_language.png" /> <b>Set Document Language</b> icon at the status bar. In the window that appears, select the necessary language and click <b>OK</b>. The selected language will be applied to the whole document. </p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Document Editor</b> allows you to check the spelling of your text in a certain language and correct mistakes while editing. In the <em>desktop version</em>, it's also possible to add words into a custom dictionary which is common for all three editors.</p>
|
||||
<p>First of all, <b>choose a language</b> for your document. Click the <img alt="Set Document Language icon" src="../images/document_language.png" /> <b>Set Document Language</b> icon on the status bar. In the opened window, select the required language and click <b>OK</b>. The selected language will be applied to the whole document. </p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Set Document Language window" src="../images/document_language_window.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>To <b>choose a different language</b> for any piece of text within the document, select the necessary text passage with the mouse and use the <img alt="Spell-checking - Text Language selector" src="../images/spellchecking_language.png" /> menu at the status bar.</p>
|
||||
<p>To <b>choose a different language</b> for any piece within the document, select the necessary text passage with the mouse and use the <img alt="Spell-checking - Text Language selector" src="../images/spellchecking_language.png" /> menu on the status bar.</p>
|
||||
<p>To <b>enable</b> the spell checking option, you can:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Spell checking deactivated icon" src="../images/spellcheckdeactivated.png" /> <b>Spell checking</b> icon at the status bar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Spell checking deactivated icon" src="../images/spellcheckdeactivated.png" /> <b>Spell checking</b> icon on the status bar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>open the <b>File</b> tab of the top toolbar, select the <b>Advanced Settings...</b> option, check the <b>Turn on spell checking option</b> box and click the <b>Apply</b> button.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>Incorrectly spelled words will be underlined by a red line.</p>
|
||||
<p>all misspelled words will be underlined by a red line.</p>
|
||||
<p>Right click on the necessary word to activate the menu and:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>choose one of the suggested similar words spelled correctly to replace the misspelled word with the suggested one. If too many variants are found, the <b>More variants...</b> option appears in the menu;</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
|
|||
<p><img alt="Spell-checking" src="../images/spellchecking.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>To <b>disable</b> the spell checking option, you can:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Spell checking activated icon" src="../images/spellcheckactivated.png" /> <b>Spell checking</b> icon at the status bar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Spell checking activated icon" src="../images/spellcheckactivated.png" /> <b>Spell checking</b> icon on the status bar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>open the <b>File</b> tab of the top toolbar, select the <b>Advanced Settings...</b> option, uncheck the <b>Turn on spell checking option</b> box and click the <b>Apply</b> button.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,10 +14,12 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Supported Formats of Electronic Documents</h1>
|
||||
<p>Electronic documents represent one of the most commonly used computer files.
|
||||
Thanks to the computer network highly developed nowadays, it's possible and more convenient to distribute electronic documents than printed ones.
|
||||
Due to the variety of devices used for document presentation, there are a lot of proprietary and open file formats.
|
||||
<b>Document Editor</b> handles the most popular of them.</p>
|
||||
<p>
|
||||
An electronic document is one of the most commonly used computer.
|
||||
Due to the highly developed modern computer network, it's more convenient to distribute electronic documents than printed ones.
|
||||
Nowadays, a lot of devices are used for document presentation, so there are plenty of proprietary and open file formats.
|
||||
The <b>Document Editor</b> handles the most popular of them.
|
||||
</p>
|
||||
<table>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td><b>Formats</b></td>
|
||||
|
|
@ -77,7 +79,7 @@
|
|||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>PDF</td>
|
||||
<td>Portable Document Format<br />File format used to represent documents in a manner independent of application software, hardware, and operating systems</td>
|
||||
<td>Portable Document Format<br />File format used to represent documents regardless of the used software, hardware, and operating systems</td>
|
||||
<td>+</td>
|
||||
<td></td>
|
||||
<td>+</td>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,27 +14,27 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>File tab</h1>
|
||||
<p>The <b>File</b> tab allows to perform some basic operations on the current file.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>File</b> tab allows performing some basic operations.</p>
|
||||
<div class="onlineDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>Online Document Editor window:</p>
|
||||
<p>The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="File tab" src="../images/interface/filetab.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<div class="desktopDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>Desktop Document Editor window:</p>
|
||||
<p>The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="File tab" src="../images/interface/desktop_filetab.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<p>Using this tab, you can:</p>
|
||||
<p>With this tab, you can use the following options:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">in the <em>online version</em>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">save</a> the current file (in case the <b>Autosave</b> option is disabled), <a href="../UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">download as</a> (save the document in the selected format to the computer hard disk drive), <a href="../UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">save copy as</a> (save a copy of the document in the selected format to the portal documents), <a href="../UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">print</a> or <a href="../UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">rename</a> it,</span>
|
||||
<span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">in the <em>desktop version</em>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">save</a> the current file keeping the current format and location using the <b>Save</b> option or save the current file with a different name, location or format using the <b>Save as</b> option, <a href="../UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">print</a> the file.</span>
|
||||
<li><span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">in the <em>online version</em>: <a href="../UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">save</a> the current file (in case the <b>Autosave</b> option is disabled), save it in the required format on the hard disk drive of your computer with the <a href="../UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)"><b>Download as</b></a> option, save a copy of the file in the selected format to the portal documents with the <a href="../UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)"><b>Save copy as</b></a> option, <a href="../UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">print</a> or <a href="../UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">rename</a> the current file.</span>
|
||||
<span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">in the <em>desktop version</em>: <a href="../UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">save</a> the current file without changing its format and location using the <b>Save</b> option, save it changing its name, location or format using the <b>Save as</b> option or <a href="../UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">print</a> the current file.</span>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li class="desktopDocumentFeatures">protect the file using a password, change or remove the password (available in the <em>desktop version</em> only);</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures"><a href="../UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">create</a> a new document or open a recently edited one (available in the <em>online version</em> only),</li>
|
||||
<li>view <a href="../UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">general information</a> about the document or change some file properties,</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures">manage <a href="../UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">access rights</a> (available in the <em>online version</em> only),</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures">track <a href="../UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">version history</a> (available in the <em>online version</em> only),</li>
|
||||
<li>access the editor <a href="../HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Advanced Settings</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li><span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">in the <em>desktop version</em>, open the folder where the file is stored in the <b>File explorer</b> window.</span><span class="onlineDocumentFeatures"> In the <em>online version</em>, open the folder of the <b>Documents</b> module where the file is stored in a new browser tab.</span></li>
|
||||
<li>access the <a href="../HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Advanced Settings</a> of the editor,</li>
|
||||
<li><span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">in the <em>desktop version</em>, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the <b>File explorer</b> window.</span><span class="onlineDocumentFeatures"> In the <em>online version</em>, open the folder of the <b>Documents</b> module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab.</span></li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,27 +14,27 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Home tab</h1>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Home</b> tab opens by default when you open a document. It allows to format font and paragraphs. Some other options are also available here, such as <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">Mail Merge and</span> color schemes.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Home</b> tab appears by default when you open a document. It also allows formating fonts and paragraphs. Some other options are also available here, such as <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures"><b>Mail Merge</b></span> and color schemes.</p>
|
||||
<div class="onlineDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>Online Document Editor window:</p>
|
||||
<p>The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Home tab" src="../images/interface/hometab.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<div class="desktopDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>Desktop Document Editor window:</p>
|
||||
<p>The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Home tab" src="../images/interface/desktop_hometab.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<p>Using this tab, you can:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>adjust font <a href="../UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">type, size, color</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>adjust the font <a href="../UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">type, its size and color</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>apply font <a href="../UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">decoration styles</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>select <a href="../UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">background color</a> for a paragraph,</li>
|
||||
<li>select a <a href="../UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">background color</a> for a paragraph,</li>
|
||||
<li>create bulleted and numbered <a href="../UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">lists</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>change paragraph <a href="../UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">indents</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>set paragraph <a href="../UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">line spacing</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li><a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">align your text</a> in a paragraph,</li>
|
||||
<li>show/hide <a href="../UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">nonprinting characters</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>show/hide <a href="../UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">non-printing characters</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li><a href="../UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">copy/clear</a> text formatting,</li>
|
||||
<li>change <a href="../UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">color scheme</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>change the <a href="../UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">color scheme</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures">use <a href="../UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Mail Merge</a> (available in the <em>online version</em> only),</li>
|
||||
<li>manage <a href="../UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">styles</a>.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,22 +14,22 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Insert tab</h1>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Insert</b> tab allows to add some page formatting elements, as well as visual objects and comments.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Insert</b> tab allows adding some page formatting elements as well as visual objects and comments.</p>
|
||||
<div class="onlineDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>Online Document Editor window:</p>
|
||||
<p>The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Insert tab" src="../images/interface/inserttab.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<div class="desktopDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>Desktop Document Editor window:</p>
|
||||
<p>The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Insert tab" src="../images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<p>Using this tab, you can:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>insert a <a href="../UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">blank page</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>insert <a href="../UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">page breaks</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">section breaks</a> and <a href="../UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm#columns" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">column breaks</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>insert <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">headers and footers</a> and <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">page numbers</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>insert <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">tables</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">images</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">charts</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">shapes</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>insert <a href="../UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">hyperlinks</a>, <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm#comments" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">comments</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>insert <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">headers and footers</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">page numbers</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertDateTime.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">date & time</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>insert <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">text boxes and Text Art objects</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">equations</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">symbols</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">drop caps</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">content controls</a>.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,22 +14,22 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Layout tab</h1>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Layout</b> tab allows to change the document appearance: set up page parameters and define the arrangement of visual elements.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Layout</b> tab allows changing the appearance of a document: setting up page parameters and defining the arrangement of visual elements.</p>
|
||||
<div class="onlineDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>Online Document Editor window:</p>
|
||||
<p>The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Layout tab" src="../images/interface/layouttab.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<div class="desktopDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>Desktop Document Editor window:</p>
|
||||
<p> corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Layout tab" src="../images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<p>Using this tab, you can:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>adjust page <a href="../UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm#margins" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">margins</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm#orientation" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">orientation</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm#size" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">size</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>adjust page <a href="../UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm#margins" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">margins</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm#orientation" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">orientation</a> and <a href="../UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm#size" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">size</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>add <a href="../UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm#columns" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">columns</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>insert <a href="../UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">page breaks</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">section breaks</a> and <a href="../UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm#columns" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">column breaks</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>align and arrange objects (<a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">tables</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">pictures</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">charts</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">shapes</a>),</li>
|
||||
<li>change <a href="../UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">wrapping style</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>change the <a href="../UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">wrapping style</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>add a <a href="../UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">watermark</a>.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,32 +14,32 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Plugins tab</h1>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Plugins</b> tab allows to access advanced editing features using available third-party components. Here you can also use macros to simplify routine operations.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Plugins</b> tab allows accessing the advanced editing features using the available third-party components. This tab also makes it possible to use macros to simplify routine operations.</p>
|
||||
<div class="onlineDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>Online Document Editor window:</p>
|
||||
<p>The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Plugins tab" src="../images/interface/pluginstab.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<div class="desktopDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>Desktop Document Editor window:</p>
|
||||
<p>The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Plugins tab" src="../images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<p class="desktopDocumentFeatures">The <b>Settings</b> button allows to open the window where you can view and manage all installed plugins and add your own ones.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Macros</b> button allows to open the window where you can create your own macros and run them. To learn more about macros you can refer to our <a target="_blank" href="https://api.onlyoffice.com/plugin/macros" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">API Documentation</a>.</p>
|
||||
<p class="desktopDocumentFeatures">The <b>Settings</b> button allows viewing and managing all the installed plugins as well as adding new ones.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Macros</b> button allows you to create and run your own macros. To learn more about macros, please refer to our <a target="_blank" href="https://api.onlyoffice.com/plugin/macros" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">API Documentation</a>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Currently, the following plugins are available by default:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li class="desktopDocumentFeatures"><b>Send</b> allows to send the document via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the <em>desktop version</em> only),</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Highlight code</b> allows to highlight syntax of the code selecting the necessary language, style, background color,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>OCR</b> allows to recognize text included into a picture and insert it into the document text,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>PhotoEditor</b> allows to edit images: crop, flip, rotate them, draw lines and shapes, add icons and text, load a mask and apply filters such as Grayscale, Invert, Sepia, Blur, Sharpen, Emboss, etc.,</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures"><b>Speech</b> allows to convert the selected text into speech (available in the <em>online version</em> only),</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Thesaurus</b> allows to search for synonyms and antonyms of a word and replace it with the selected one,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Translator</b> allows to translate the selected text into other languages,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>YouTube</b> allows to embed YouTube videos into your document.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Mendeley</b> allows to manage research papers and generate bibliographies for scholarly articles.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Zotero</b> allows to manage bibliographic data and related research materials.</li>
|
||||
<li class="desktopDocumentFeatures"><b>Send</b> allows sending a document via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the <em>desktop version</em> only),</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Highlight code</b> allows highlighting the code syntax selecting the required language, style and background color,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>OCR</b> recognizing text in any picture and inserting the recognized text to the document,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>PhotoEditor</b> allows editing images: cropping, flipping, rotating, drawing lines and shapes, adding icons and text, loading a mask and applying filters such as Grayscale, Invert, Sepia, Blur, Sharpen, Emboss, etc.,</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures"><b>Speech</b> allows converting the selected text to speech (available in the <em>online version</em> only),</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Thesaurus</b> allows finding synonyms and antonyms for the selected word and replacing it with the chosen one,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Translator</b> allows translating the selected text into other languages,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>YouTube</b> allows embedding YouTube videos into the document,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Mendeley</b> allows managing papers researches and generating bibliographies for scholarly articles,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Zotero</b> allows managing bibliographic data and related research materials.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p class="onlineDocumentFeatures">The <b>Wordpress</b> and <b>EasyBib</b> plugins can be used if you connect the corresponding services in your portal settings. You can use the following instructions <a target="_blank" href="https://helpcenter.onlyoffice.com/server/windows/community/authorization-keys.aspx" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">for the server version</a> or <a target="_blank" href="https://helpcenter.onlyoffice.com/tipstricks/authorization-keys-saas.aspx" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">for the SaaS version</a>. </p>
|
||||
<p>To learn more about plugins please refer to our <a target="_blank" href="https://api.onlyoffice.com/plugin/basic" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">API Documentation</a>. All the currently existing open source plugin examples are available on <a target="_blank" href="https://github.com/ONLYOFFICE/sdkjs-plugins" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">GitHub</a>.</p>
|
||||
<p>To learn more about plugins, please refer to our <a target="_blank" href="https://api.onlyoffice.com/plugin/basic" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">API Documentation</a>. All the existing examples of open source plugins are currently available on <a target="_blank" href="https://github.com/ONLYOFFICE/sdkjs-plugins" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">GitHub</a>.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</html>
|
||||
|
|
@ -13,48 +13,49 @@
|
|||
<div class="search-field">
|
||||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Introducing the Document Editor user interface</h1>
|
||||
<p><b>Document Editor</b> uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality.</p>
|
||||
<h1>Introducing the user interface of the Document Editor</h1>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Document Editor</b> uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality.</p>
|
||||
<div class="onlineDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>Online Document Editor window:</p>
|
||||
<p>Main window of the Online Document Editor:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Online Document Editor window" src="../images/interface/editorwindow.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<div class="desktopDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>Desktop Document Editor window:</p>
|
||||
<p>Main window of the Desktop Document Editor:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Desktop Document Editor window" src="../images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<p>The editor interface consists of the following main elements:</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li><b>Editor header</b> displays the logo, <span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">opened documents tabs, </span>document name and menu tabs.
|
||||
<p>In the left part of the <b>Editor header</b> there are the <b>Save</b>, <b>Print file</b>, <b>Undo</b> and <b>Redo</b> buttons.</p>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
The <b>Editor header</b> displays the ONLYOFFICE logo, <span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">tabs for all opened documents </span>with their names and menu tabs.
|
||||
<p>On the left side of the <b>Editor header</b> the <b>Save</b>, <b>Print file</b>, <b>Undo</b> and <b>Redo</b> buttons are located</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Icons in the editor header" src="../images/interface/leftpart.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>In the right part of the <b>Editor header</b> the user name is displayed as well as the following icons:</p>
|
||||
<p>On the right side of the <b>Editor header</b> along with the user name the following icons are displayed:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><img alt="Open file location" src="../images/gotodocuments.png" /> <b>Open file location</b> - <span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">in the <em>desktop version</em>, it allows to open the folder where the file is stored in the <b>File explorer</b> window.</span> <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures"> In the <em>online version</em>, it allows to open the folder of the <b>Documents</b> module where the file is stored in a new browser tab.</span></li>
|
||||
<li><img alt="View Settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> - allows to adjust <a href="../HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">View Settings</a> and access the editor <a href="../HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Advanced Settings</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures"><img alt="Manage document access rights icon" src="../images/access_rights.png" /> <b>Manage document access rights</b> - (available in the <em>online version</em> only) allows to <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">set access rights</a> for the documents stored in the cloud.</li>
|
||||
<li><img alt="Open file location" src="../images/gotodocuments.png" /> <b>Open file location</b>. <span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">In the <em>desktop version</em>, it allows opening the folder, where the file is stored, in the <b>File explorer</b> window.</span> <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures"> In the <em>online version</em>, it allows to opening the folder of the <b>Documents</b> module, where the file is stored in a new browser tab.</span></li>
|
||||
<li><img alt="View Settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> It allows adjusting the <a href="../HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">View Settings</a> and access the <a href="../HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Advanced Settings</a> of the editor.</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures"><img alt="Manage document access rights icon" src="../images/access_rights.png" /> <b>Manage document access rights</b> (available in the <em>online version</em> only). It allows adjusting <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">access rights</a> for the documents stored in the cloud.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Top toolbar</b> displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: <a href="../ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">File</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Home</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Insert</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Layout</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">References</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Collaboration</a>, <span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">Protection,</span> <a href="../ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Plugins</a>.
|
||||
<p>The <img alt="Copy icon" src="../images/copy.png" /> <b>Copy</b> and <img alt="Paste icon" src="../images/paste.png" /> <b>Paste</b> options are always available at the left part of the <b>Top toolbar</b> regardless of the selected tab.</p>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Top toolbar</b> displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: <a href="../ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">File</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Home</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Insert</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Layout</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">References</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Collaboration</a>, <span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">Protection,</span> <a href="../ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Plugins</a>.
|
||||
<p>The <img alt="Copy icon" src="../images/copy.png" /> <b>Copy</b> and <img alt="Paste icon" src="../images/paste.png" /> <b>Paste</b> options are always available at the left part on the left side of the <b>Top toolbar</b> regardless of the selected tab.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Status bar</b> at the bottom of the editor window contains the page number indicator, displays some notifications (such as "All changes saved" etc.), allows to <a href="../HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">set text language, enable spell checking</a>, turn on the <a href="../HelpfulHints/Review.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">track changes mode</a>, adjust <a href="../HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">zoom</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Left sidebar</b> contains the following icons:
|
||||
<li>The <b>Status bar</b> located at the bottom of the editor window indicates the page number and displays some notifications (for example, "All changes saved", etc.). It also allows <a href="../HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">setting the text language, enabling spell checking</a>, turning on the <a href="../HelpfulHints/Review.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">track changes mode</a> and adjusting <a href="../HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">zoom</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Left sidebar</b> contains the following icons:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><img alt="Search icon" src="../images/searchicon.png" /> - allows to use the <a href="../HelpfulHints/Search.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Search and Replace</a> tool,</li>
|
||||
<li><img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> - allows to open the <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm#comments" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Comments</a> panel,</li>
|
||||
<li><img alt="Navigation icon" src="../images/navigationicon.png" /> - allows to go to the <a href="../UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm#navigation" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Navigation</a> panel and manage headings,</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures"><img alt="Chat icon" src="../images/chaticon.png" /> - (available in the <em>online version</em> only) allows to open the <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm#chat" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Chat</a> panel,</li>
|
||||
<li><img alt="Search icon" src="../images/searchicon.png" /> - allows using the <a href="../HelpfulHints/Search.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Search and Replace</a> tool,</li>
|
||||
<li><img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> - allows opening the <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm#comments" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Comments</a> panel,</li>
|
||||
<li><img alt="Navigation icon" src="../images/navigationicon.png" /> - allows going to the <a href="../UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm#navigation" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Navigation</a> panel and managing headings,</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures"><img alt="Chat icon" src="../images/chaticon.png" /> - (available in the <em>online version</em> only) allows opening the <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm#chat" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Chat</a> panel,</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures"><img alt="Feedback and Support icon" src="../images/feedbackicon.png" /> - (available in the <em>online version</em> only) allows to contact our support team,</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures"><img alt="About icon" src="../images/abouticon.png" /> - (available in the <em>online version</em> only) allows to view the information about the program.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Right sidebar</b> allows to adjust additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object in the text, the corresponding icon is activated at the right sidebar. Click this icon to expand the right sidebar.</li>
|
||||
<li>Horizontal and vertical <b>Rulers</b> allow to align text and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Working area</b> allows to view document content, enter and edit data.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Scroll bar</b> on the right allows to scroll up and down multi-page documents.</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Right sidebar</b> allows to adjusting additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object in the text, the corresponding icon is activated on the <b>Right sidebar</b>. Click the icon to expand the Right sidebar.</li>
|
||||
<li>The Horizontal and vertical <b>Rulers</b> makes it possible to align the text and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents.</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Working area</b> allows viewing document content, entering and editing data.</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Scroll bar</b> on the right allows scrolling up and down multi-page documents.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>For your convenience you can hide some components and display them again when it is necessary. To learn more on how to adjust view settings please refer to <a href="../HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</p>
|
||||
<p>For your convenience, you can hide some components and display them again when them when necessary. To learn more about adjusting view settings, please refer to <a href="../HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,13 +14,13 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>References tab</h1>
|
||||
<p>The <b>References</b> tab allows to manage different types of references: add and refresh a table of contents, create and edit footnotes, insert hyperlinks.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>References</b> tab allows managing different types of references: adding and refreshing tables of contents, creating and editing footnotes, inserting hyperlinks.</p>
|
||||
<div class="onlineDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>Online Document Editor window:</p>
|
||||
<p>The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="References tab" src="../images/interface/referencestab.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<div class="desktopDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>Desktop Document Editor window:</p>
|
||||
<p>The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="References tab" src="../images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<p>Using this tab, you can:</p>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,18 +14,18 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Collaboration tab</h1>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Collaboration</b> tab allows to organize collaborative work on the document. <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">In the <em>online version</em>, you can share the file, select a co-editing mode, manage comments, track changes made by a reviewer, view all versions and revisions. In the commenting mode, you can add and remove comments, navigate between tracked changes, use chat and view version history.</span> <span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">In the <em>desktop version</em>, you can manage comments and use the Track Changes feature</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Collaboration</b> tab allows collaborating on documents. <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">In the <em>online version</em>, you can share the file, select the required co-editing mode, manage comments, track changes made by a reviewer, view all versions and revisions. In the commenting mode, you can add and remove comments, navigate between the tracked changes, use the built-in chat and view the version history.</span> <span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">In the <em>desktop version</em>, you can manage comments and use the Track Changes feature</span>.</p>
|
||||
<div class="onlineDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>Online Document Editor window:</p>
|
||||
<p>The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Collaboration tab" src="../images/interface/reviewtab.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<div class="desktopDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>Desktop Document Editor window:</p>
|
||||
<p>The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Collaboration tab" src="../images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<p>Using this tab, you can:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures">specify <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">sharing settings</a> (available in the <em>online version</em> only),</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures">specify the <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">sharing settings</a> (available in the <em>online version</em> only),</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures">switch between the <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Strict and Fast</a> co-editing modes (available in the <em>online version</em> only),</li>
|
||||
<li>add or remove <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm#comments" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">comments</a> to the document,</li>
|
||||
<li>enable the <a href="../HelpfulHints/Review.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Track Changes</a> feature,</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
|
|||
<li>manage the <a href="../HelpfulHints/Review.htm#managechanges" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">suggested changes</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures">load a document for <a href="../HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">comparison</a> (available in the <em>online version</em> only),</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures">open the <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm#chat" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Chat</a> panel (available in the <em>online version</em> only),</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures">track <a href="../UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">version history</a> (available in the <em>online version</em> only).</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures">track the <a href="../UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">version history</a> (available in the <em>online version</em> only).</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -16,15 +16,15 @@
|
|||
<h1>Add borders</h1>
|
||||
<p>To add borders to a paragraph, page, or the whole document,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>put the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or all the text in the document by pressing the <b>Ctrl+A</b> key combination,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the right mouse button and select the <b>Paragraph Advanced Settings</b> option from the menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link at the right sidebar,</li>
|
||||
<li>place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text by pressing the <b>Ctrl+A</b> key combination,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the right mouse button and select the <b>Paragraph Advanced Settings</b> option from the menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link on the right sidebar,</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Borders & Fill</b> tab in the opened <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window,</li>
|
||||
<li>set the needed value for <b>Border Size</b> and select a <b>Border Color</b>,</li>
|
||||
<li>click within the available diagram or use buttons to select borders and apply the chosen style to them,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>OK</b> button.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Paragraph Advanced Settings - Borders & Fill" src="../images/paradvsettings_borders.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>After you add borders, you can also set <b>paddings</b> i.e. distances between the <b>right</b>, <b>left</b>, <b>top</b> and <b>bottom</b> borders and the paragraph text within them.</p>
|
||||
<p>After adding the borders, you can also set <b>paddings</b> i.e. distances between the <b>right</b>, <b>left</b>, <b>top</b> and <b>bottom</b> borders and the paragraph.</p>
|
||||
<p>To set the necessary values, switch to the <b>Paddings</b> tab of the <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Paragraph Advanced Settings - Paddings" src="../images/paradvsettings_margins.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -13,15 +13,15 @@
|
|||
<div class="search-field">
|
||||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Add caption</h1>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Caption</b> is a numbered label that you can apply to objects, such as equations, tables, figures and images within your documents.</p>
|
||||
<p>This makes it easy to reference within your text as there is an easily recognizable label on your object.</p>
|
||||
<p>To add the caption to an object:</p>
|
||||
<h1>Add captions</h1>
|
||||
<p>A <b>caption</b> is a numbered label that can be applied to objects, such as equations, tables, figures and images in the document.</p>
|
||||
<p>A caption allows making a reference in the text - an easily recognizable label on an object.</p>
|
||||
<p>To add a caption to an object:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>select the object which one to apply a caption;</li>
|
||||
<li>select the required object to apply a caption;</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>References</b> tab of the top toolbar;</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
click the <img alt="Rich text content control" src="../images/caption_icon.png" /> <b>Caption</b> icon at the top toolbar or right lick o nthe object and select the <b>Insert Caption</b> option to open the <b>Insert Caption</b> dialogue box
|
||||
click the <img alt="Rich text content control" src="../images/caption_icon.png" /> <b>Caption</b> icon on the top toolbar or right click on the object and select the <b>Insert Caption</b> option to open the <b>Insert Caption</b> dialogue box
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>choose the label to use for your caption by clicking the label drop-down and choosing the object. or</li>
|
||||
<li>create a new label by clicking the <b>Add label</b> button to open the <b>Add label</b> dialogue box. Enter a name for the label into the label text box. Then click the <b>OK</b> button to add a new label into the label list;</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -39,23 +39,23 @@
|
|||
<h2>Formatting captions</h2>
|
||||
<p>As soon as you add a caption, a new style for captions is automatically added to the styles section. In order to change the style for all captions throughout the document, you should follow these steps:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>select the text a new <b>Caption</b> style will be copied from;</li>
|
||||
<li>search for the <b>Caption</b> style (highlighted in blue by default) in the styles gallery which you may find on <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar;</li>
|
||||
<li>select the text to copy a new <b>Caption</b> style;</li>
|
||||
<li>search for the <b>Caption</b> style (highlighted in blue by default) in the styles gallery on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar;</li>
|
||||
<li>right click on it and choose the <b>Update from selection</b> option.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Content Control settings window" src="../images/updatefromseleciton.png" /></p>
|
||||
<h2>Grouping captions up</h2>
|
||||
<p>If you want to be able to move the object and the caption as one unit, you need <a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">to group</a> the object and the caption together</p>
|
||||
<p>To move the object and the caption as one unit, you need <a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">to group</a> the object and the caption together:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>select the object;</li>
|
||||
<li>select one of the <b>Wrapping styles</b> using the right sidebar;</li>
|
||||
<li>add the caption as it is mentioned above;</li>
|
||||
<li>hold down Shift and select the items you want to group up;</li>
|
||||
<li><b>right click</b> on either item and choose <b>Arrange</b> > <b>Group</b>.</li>
|
||||
<li>hold down Shift and select the items to be grouped up;</li>
|
||||
<li><b>right click</b> item and choose <b>Arrange</b> > <b>Group</b>.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Content Control settings window" src="../images/groupup.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>Now both items will move simultaneously if you drag them somewhere else in the document.</p>
|
||||
<p>To unbind the objects click on <b>Arrange</b> > <b>Ungroup</b> respectively.</p>
|
||||
<p>To unbind the objects, click on <b>Arrange</b> > <b>Ungroup</b> respectively.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</html>
|
||||
|
|
@ -18,17 +18,17 @@
|
|||
<p>You can perform simple calculations on data in table cells by adding formulas. To insert a formula into a table cell,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>place the cursor within the cell where you want to display the result,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Add formula</b> button at the right sidebar,</li>
|
||||
<li>in the <b>Formula Settings</b> window that opens, enter the necessary formula into the <b>Formula</b> field.
|
||||
<p>You can enter a needed formula manually using the common mathematical operators (+, -, *, /), e.g. <em>=A1*B2</em> or use the <b>Paste Function</b> drop-down list to select one of the embedded functions, e.g. <em>=PRODUCT(A1,B2)</em>.</p>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Add formula</b> button on the right sidebar,</li>
|
||||
<li>in the opened <b>Formula Settings</b> window, enter the required formula into the <b>Formula</b> field.
|
||||
<p>You can enter the required formula manually using the common mathematical operators (+, -, *, /), e.g. <em>=A1*B2</em> or use the <b>Paste Function</b> drop-down list to select one of the embedded functions, e.g. <em>=PRODUCT(A1,B2)</em>.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Add formula" src="../images/formula_settings.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>manually specify necessary arguments within the parentheses in the <b>Formula</b> field. If the function requires several arguments, they must be separated by commas.</li>
|
||||
<li>manually specify the required arguments within the parentheses in the <b>Formula</b> field. If the function requires several arguments, they must be separated by commas.</li>
|
||||
<li>use the <b>Number Format</b> drop-down list if you want to display the result in a certain number format,</li>
|
||||
<li>click <b>OK</b>.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>The result will be displayed in the selected cell. </p>
|
||||
<p>To edit the added formula, select the result in the cell and click the <b>Add formula</b> button at the right sidebar, make the necessary changes in the <b>Formula Settings</b> window and click <b>OK</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>To edit the added formula, select the result in the cell and click the <b>Add formula</b> button on the right sidebar, make the required changes in the <b>Formula Settings</b> window and click <b>OK</b>.</p>
|
||||
<hr />
|
||||
<h3>Add references to cells</h3>
|
||||
<p>You can use the following arguments to quickly add references to cell ranges:</p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
|
|||
<p>If you have added some <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">bookmarks</a> to certain cells within your table, you can use these bookmarks as arguments when entering formulas.</p>
|
||||
<p>In the <b>Formula Settings</b> window, place the cursor within the parentheses in the <b>Formula</b> entry field where you want the argument to be added and use the <b>Paste Bookmark</b> drop-down list to select one of the previously added bookmarks.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Update formula results</h3>
|
||||
<p>If you change some values in the table cells, you will need to manually update formula results:</p>
|
||||
<p>If you change some values in the table cells, you will need to manually update the formula results:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>To update a single formula result, select the necessary result and press <b>F9</b> or right-click the result and use the <b>Update field</b> option from the menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>To update several formula results, select the necessary cells or the entire table and press <b>F9</b>.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -68,7 +68,7 @@
|
|||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Logical</td>
|
||||
<td>AND(logical1, logical2, ...)</td>
|
||||
<td>The function is used to check if the logical value you enter is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 1 (TRUE) if all the arguments are TRUE.</td>
|
||||
<td>The function is used to check if the logical value you entered is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 1 (TRUE) if all the arguments are TRUE.</td>
|
||||
<td>=AND(1>0,1>3)<br />Returns 0</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
|
|
@ -128,13 +128,13 @@
|
|||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Logical</td>
|
||||
<td>NOT(logical)</td>
|
||||
<td>The function is used to check if the logical value you enter is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 1 (TRUE) if the argument is FALSE and 0 (FALSE) if the argument is TRUE.</td>
|
||||
<td>The function is used to check if the logical value you entered is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 1 (TRUE) if the argument is FALSE and 0 (FALSE) if the argument is TRUE.</td>
|
||||
<td>=NOT(2<5)<br />Returns 0</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Logical</td>
|
||||
<td>OR(logical1, logical2, ...)</td>
|
||||
<td>The function is used to check if the logical value you enter is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 0 (FALSE) if all the arguments are FALSE.</td>
|
||||
<td>The function is used to check if the logical value you entered is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 0 (FALSE) if all the arguments are FALSE.</td>
|
||||
<td>=OR(1>0,1>3)<br />Returns 1</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -16,10 +16,10 @@
|
|||
<h1>Add hyperlinks</h1>
|
||||
<p>To add a hyperlink,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>place the cursor to a position where a hyperlink will be added,</li>
|
||||
<li>place the cursor in the text that you want to display as a hyperlink,</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> or <b>References</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Hyperlink icon" src="../images/addhyperlink.png" /> <b>Hyperlink</b> icon at the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>after that the <b>Hyperlink Settings</b> window will appear where you can specify the hyperlink parameters:
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Hyperlink icon" src="../images/addhyperlink.png" /> <b>Hyperlink</b> icon on the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>after that the <b>Hyperlink Settings</b> window will appear, and you will be able to specify the hyperlink parameters:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
Select a link type you wish to insert:
|
||||
|
|
@ -29,7 +29,7 @@
|
|||
<p><img alt="Hyperlink Settings window" src="../images/hyperlinkwindow1.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Display</b> - enter a text that will get clickable and lead to the address specified in the upper field.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>ScreenTip text</b> - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window that provides a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink being pointed to.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>ScreenTip text</b> - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window with a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink to be pointed.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>Click the <b>OK</b> button.</li>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -13,19 +13,19 @@
|
|||
<div class="search-field">
|
||||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Add watermark</h1>
|
||||
<p>Watermark is a text or image placed below the main text layer. Text watermarks allow to indicate your document status (for example, confidential, draft etc.), image watermarks allow to add an image, for example your company logo.</p>
|
||||
<p>To add a watermark within a document:</p>
|
||||
<h1>Add watermarks</h1>
|
||||
<p>A watermark is a text or image placed under the main text layer. Text watermarks allow indicating the status of your document (for example, confidential, draft etc.). Image watermarks allow adding an image, for example, the logo of your company.</p>
|
||||
<p>To add a watermark in a document:</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>Switch to the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li>Click the <img alt="Watermark icon" src="../images/watermark.png" /> <b>Watermark</b> icon at the top toolbar and choose the <b>Custom Watermark</b> option from the menu. After that the <b>Watermark Settings</b> window will appear.</li>
|
||||
<li>Click the <img alt="Watermark icon" src="../images/watermark.png" /> <b>Watermark</b> icon on the top toolbar and choose the <b>Custom Watermark</b> option from the menu. After that the <b>Watermark Settings</b> window will appear.</li>
|
||||
<li>Select a watermark type you wish to insert:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>Use the <b>Text watermark</b> option and adjust the available parameters:
|
||||
<p><img alt="Watermark Settings window" src="../images/watermark_settings.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Language</b> - select one of the available languages from the list,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Text</b> - select one of the available text examples on the selected language. For English, the following watermark texts are available: <em>ASAP</em>, <em>CONFIDENTIAL</em>, <em>COPY</em>, <em>DO NOT COPY</em>, <em>DRAFT</em>, <em>ORIGINAL</em>, <em>PERSONAL</em>, <em>SAMPLE</em>, <em>TOP SECRET</em>, <em>URGENT</em>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Text</b> - select one of the available text examples in the selected language. For English, the following watermark texts are available: <em>ASAP</em>, <em>CONFIDENTIAL</em>, <em>COPY</em>, <em>DO NOT COPY</em>, <em>DRAFT</em>, <em>ORIGINAL</em>, <em>PERSONAL</em>, <em>SAMPLE</em>, <em>TOP SECRET</em>, <em>URGENT</em>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Font</b> - select the font name and size from the corresponding drop-down lists. Use the icons on the right to set the font color or apply one of the font decoration styles: <em>Bold</em>, <em>Italic</em>, <em>Underline</em>, <em>Strikeout</em>,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Semitransparent</b> - check this box if you want to apply transparency,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Layout</b> - select the <b>Diagonal</b> or <b>Horizontal</b> option.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
|
|||
<li>Use the <b>Image watermark</b> option and adjust the available parameters:
|
||||
<p><img alt="Watermark Settings window" src="../images/watermark_settings2.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>Choose the image file source using one of the buttons: <b>From File</b> or <b>From URL</b> - the image will be displayed in the preview window on the right,</li>
|
||||
<li>Choose the image file source using one of the options from the drop-down list: <b>From File</b>, <b>From URL</b> or <b>From Storage</b> - the image will be displayed in the preview window on the right,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Scale</b> - select the necessary scale value from the available ones: <em>Auto</em>, <em>500%</em>, <em>200%</em>, <em>150%</em>, <em>100%</em>, <em>50%</em>.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
|
|||
<li>Click the <b>OK</b> button.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>To edit the added watermark, open the <b>Watermark Settings</b> window as described above, change the necessary parameters and click <b>OK</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>To delete the added watermark click the <img alt="Watermark icon" src="../images/watermark.png" /> <b>Watermark</b> icon at the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and choose the <b>Remove Watermark</b> option from the menu. It's also possible to use the <b>None</b> option in the <b>Watermark Settings</b> window.</p>
|
||||
<p>To delete the added watermark click the <img alt="Watermark icon" src="../images/watermark.png" /> <b>Watermark</b> icon on the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and choose the <b>Remove Watermark</b> option from the menu. It's also possible to use the <b>None</b> option in the <b>Watermark Settings</b> window.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -13,12 +13,12 @@
|
|||
<div class="search-field">
|
||||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Align and arrange objects on a page</h1>
|
||||
<p>The added <b>autoshapes, images, charts</b> or <b>text boxes</b> can be aligned, grouped and ordered on a page. To perform any of these actions, first select a separate object or several objects on the page. To select several objects, hold down the <b>Ctrl</b> key and left-click the necessary objects. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it. After that you can use either the icons at the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar described below or the analogous options from the right-click menu.</p>
|
||||
<h1>Align and arrange objects on the page</h1>
|
||||
<p>The added <b>autoshapes, images, charts</b> or <b>text boxes</b> can be aligned, grouped and ordered on the page. To perform any of these actions, first select a separate object or several objects on the page. To select several objects, hold down the <b>Ctrl</b> key and left-click the required objects. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it. After that you can use either the icons on the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar described below or the corresponding options from the right-click menu.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Align objects</h3>
|
||||
<p>To <b>align</b> <em>two or more</em> selected objects, </p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>Click the <img alt="Align icon" src="../images/align_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Align</b> icon at the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options:
|
||||
<li>Click the <img alt="Align icon" src="../images/align_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Align</b> icon on the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Align to Page</b> to align objects relative to the edges of the page,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Align to Margin</b> to align objects relative to the page margins,</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -39,10 +39,10 @@
|
|||
<p>Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the <b>Align</b> option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available alignment options.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you want to align a single object, it can be aligned relative to the edges of the page or to the page margins. The <b>Align to Margin</b> option is selected by default in this case.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Distribute objects</h3>
|
||||
<p>To <b>distribute</b> <em>three or more</em> selected objects horizontally or vertically so that the equal distance appears between them, </p>
|
||||
<p>To <b>distribute</b> <em>three or more</em> selected objects horizontally or vertically so that there is equal space between them, </p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
Click the <img alt="Align icon" src="../images/align_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Align</b> icon at the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options:
|
||||
Click the <img alt="Align icon" src="../images/align_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Align</b> icon on the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Align to Page</b> to distribute objects between the edges of the page,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Align to Margin</b> to distribute objects between the page margins,</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -60,21 +60,21 @@
|
|||
<p>Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the <b>Align</b> option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available distribution options.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the distribution options are disabled if you select less than three objects.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Group objects</h3>
|
||||
<p>To <b>group</b> <em>two or more</em> selected objects or <b>ungroup</b> them, click the arrow next to the <img alt="Group icon" src="../images/group_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Group</b> icon at the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the list:</p>
|
||||
<p>To <b>group</b> <em>two or more</em> selected objects or <b>ungroup</b> them, click the arrow next to the <img alt="Group icon" src="../images/group_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Group</b> icon at the <b>Layout</b> tab on the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the list:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Group</b> <img alt="Group icon" src="../images/group.png" /> - to join several objects into a group so that they can be simultaneously rotated, moved, resized, aligned, arranged, copied, pasted, formatted like a single object.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Ungroup</b> <img alt="Ungroup icon" src="../images/ungroup.png" /> - to ungroup the selected group of the previously joined objects.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Group</b> <img alt="Group icon" src="../images/group.png" /> - to combine several objects into a group so that they can be simultaneously rotated, moved, resized, aligned, arranged, copied, pasted, formatted like a single object.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Ungroup</b> <img alt="Ungroup icon" src="../images/ungroup.png" /> - to ungroup the selected group of the previously combined objects.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the <b>Arrange</b> option from the contextual menu and then use the <b>Group</b> or <b>Ungroup</b> option.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the <b>Group</b> option is disabled if you select less than two objects. The <b>Ungroup</b> option is available only when a group of the previously joined objects is selected.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the <b>Group</b> option is disabled if you select less than two objects. The <b>Ungroup</b> option is available only when a group of the previously combined objects is selected.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Arrange objects</h3>
|
||||
<p>To <b>arrange</b> objects (i.e. to change their order when several objects overlap each other), you can use the <img alt="Bring Forward icon" src="../images/bringforward_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Bring Forward</b> and <img alt="Send Backward icon" src="../images/sendbackward_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Send Backward</b> icons at the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list.</p>
|
||||
<p>To move the selected object(s) forward, click the arrow next to the <img alt="Bring Forward icon" src="../images/bringforward_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Bring Forward</b> icon at the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list:</p>
|
||||
<p>To <b>arrange</b> objects (i.e. to change their order when several objects overlap each other), you can use the <img alt="Bring Forward icon" src="../images/bringforward_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Bring Forward</b> and <img alt="Send Backward icon" src="../images/sendbackward_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Send Backward</b> icons on the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the required arrangement type from the list.</p>
|
||||
<p>To move the selected object(s) forward, click the arrow next to the <img alt="Bring Forward icon" src="../images/bringforward_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Bring Forward</b> icon on the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the required arrangement type from the list:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Bring To Foreground</b> <img alt="Bring To Foreground icon" src="../images/bringtofront.png" /> - to move the object(s) in front of all other objects,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Bring Forward</b> <img alt="Bring Forward icon" src="../images/bringforward.png" /> - to move the selected object(s) by one level forward as related to other objects.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>To move the selected object(s) backward, click the arrow next to the <img alt="Send Backward icon" src="../images/sendbackward_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Send Backward</b> icon at the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list:</p>
|
||||
<p>To move the selected object(s) backward, click the arrow next to the <img alt="Send Backward icon" src="../images/sendbackward_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Send Backward</b> icon on the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the required arrangement type from the list:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Send To Background</b> <img alt="Send To Background icon" src="../images/sendtoback.png" /> - to move the object(s) behind all other objects,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Send Backward</b> <img alt="Send Backward icon" src="../images/sendbackward.png" /> - to move the selected object(s) by one level backward as related to other objects.</li>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,25 +14,25 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Align your text in a paragraph</h1>
|
||||
<p>The text is commonly aligned in four ways: left, right, center or justified. To do that,</p>
|
||||
<p>The text is commonly aligned in four ways: left-aligned text, right-aligned text, centered text or justified text. To align the text,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>place the cursor to the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text),</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>select the alignment type you would like to apply:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Left</b> alignment with the text lined up by the left side of the page (the right side remains unaligned) is done with the <b>Align left</b> <img alt="Align left icon" src="../images/alignleft.png" /> icon situated at the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Center</b> alignment with the text lined up by the center of the page (the right and the left sides remains unaligned) is done with the <b>Align center</b> <img alt="Align center icon" src="../images/aligncenter.png" /> icon situated at the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Right</b> alignment with the text lined up by the right side of the page (the left side remains unaligned) is done with the <b>Align right</b> <img alt="Align right icon" src="../images/alignright.png" /> icon situated at the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Justified</b> alignment with the text lined up by both the left and the right sides of the page (additional spacing is added where necessary to keep the alignment) is done with the <b>Justified</b> <img alt="Justify icon" src="../images/justify.png" /> icon situated at the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Left</b> alignment (when the text is lined up to the left side of the page with the right side remaining unaligned) is done by clicking the <b>Align left</b> <img alt="Align left icon" src="../images/alignleft.png" /> icon on the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Center</b> alignment (when the text is lined up in the center of the page with the right and the left sides remaining unaligned) is done by clicking the <b>Align center</b> <img alt="Align center icon" src="../images/aligncenter.png" /> icon on the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Right</b> alignment (when the text is lined up to the right side of the page with the left side remaining unaligned) is done by clicking the <b>Align right</b> <img alt="Align right icon" src="../images/alignright.png" /> icon on the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Justified</b> alignment (when the text is lined up to both the left and the right sides of the page, and additional spacing is added where necessary to keep the alignment) is done by clicking the <b>Justified</b> <img alt="Justify icon" src="../images/justify.png" /> icon on the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>The alignment parameters are also available at the <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window.</p>
|
||||
<p>The alignment parameters are also available in the <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window.</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>right-click the text and choose the <b>Paragraph Advanced Settings</b> option from the contextual menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> option at the right sidebar,</li>
|
||||
<li>right-click the text and choose the <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> option from the contextual menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> option on the right sidebar,</li>
|
||||
<li>open the <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window, switch to the <b>Indents & Spacing</b> tab,</li>
|
||||
<li>select one of the alignment types from the <b>Alignment</b> list: <b>Left</b>, <b>Center</b>, <b>Right</b>, <b>Justified</b>,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>OK</b> button, to apply the changes.</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>OK</b> button to apply the changes.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Paragraph Advanced Settings - Indents & Spacing" src="../images/paradvsettings_indents.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -13,27 +13,27 @@
|
|||
<div class="search-field">
|
||||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Select background color for a paragraph</h1>
|
||||
<p>Background color is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin.</p>
|
||||
<h1>Select a background color for a paragraph</h1>
|
||||
<p>A background color is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin.</p>
|
||||
<p>To apply a background color to a certain paragraph or change the current one,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>select a color scheme for your document from the available ones clicking the <b>Change color scheme</b> <img alt="Change color scheme" src="../images/changecolorscheme.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar</li>
|
||||
<li>put the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text using the <b>Ctrl+A</b> key combination</li>
|
||||
<li>select a color scheme for your document from the available ones clicking the <b>Change color scheme</b> <img alt="Change color scheme" src="../images/changecolorscheme.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab on the top toolbar</li>
|
||||
<li>place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text using the <b>Ctrl+A</b> key combination</li>
|
||||
<li>open the color palettes window. You can access it in one of the following ways:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>click the downward arrow next to the <img alt="Paragraph background color Icon" src="../images/backgroundcolor.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the color field next to the <b>Background Color</b> caption at the right sidebar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the 'Show advanced settings' link at the right sidebar or select the 'Paragraph Advanced Settings' option in the right-click menu, then switch to the 'Borders & Fill' tab within the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window and click the color field next to the <b>Background Color</b> caption.</li>
|
||||
<li>click the downward arrow next to the <img alt="Paragraph background color Icon" src="../images/backgroundcolor.png" /> icon on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the color field next to the <b>Background Color</b> caption on the right sidebar, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the 'Show advanced settings' link on the right sidebar or select the 'Paragraph Advanced Settings' option on the right-click menu, then switch to the 'Borders & Fill' tab within the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window and click the color field next to the <b>Background Color</b> caption.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>select any color in the available <a href="../UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">palettes</a></li>
|
||||
<li>select any color among the available <a href="../UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">palettes</a></li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>After you select the necessary color using the <img alt="Paragraph background color Icon" src="../images/backgroundcolor.png" /> icon, you'll be able to apply this color to any selected paragraph just clicking the <img alt="Selected paragraph background color" src="../images/backgroundcolor_selected.png" /> icon (it displays the selected color), without the necessity to choose this color on the palette again. If you use the <b>Background Color</b> option at the right sidebar or within the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window, remember that the selected color is not retained for quick access. (These options can be useful if you wish to select a different background color for a specific paragraph, while you are also using some general color selected with the help of the <img alt="Paragraph background color Icon" src="../images/backgroundcolor.png" /> icon).</p>
|
||||
<p>After you select the required color by using the <img alt="Paragraph background color Icon" src="../images/backgroundcolor.png" /> icon, you'll be able to apply this color to any selected paragraph just by clicking the <img alt="Selected paragraph background color" src="../images/backgroundcolor_selected.png" /> icon (it displays the selected color), without having to choose this color in the palette again. If you use the <b>Background Color</b> option on the right sidebar or within the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window, remember that the selected color is not retained for quick access. (These options can be useful if you wish to select a different background color for a specific paragraph and if you are also using some general color selected by clicking the <img alt="Paragraph background color Icon" src="../images/backgroundcolor.png" /> icon).</p>
|
||||
<hr />
|
||||
<p>To clear the background color of a certain paragraph,</p>
|
||||
<p>To remove the background color from a certain paragraph,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>put the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text using the <b>Ctrl+A</b> key combination</li>
|
||||
<li>open the color palettes window clicking the color field next to the <b>Background Color</b> caption at the right sidebar</li>
|
||||
<li>place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text using the <b>Ctrl+A</b> key combination</li>
|
||||
<li>open the color palettes window by clicking the color field next to the <b>Background Color</b> caption on the right sidebar</li>
|
||||
<li>select the <img alt="No Fill" src="../images/nofill.png" /> icon.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,15 +14,16 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Change color scheme</h1>
|
||||
<p>Color schemes are applied to the whole document. They are used to quickly change the appearance of your document, since they are define the <b>Theme Colors</b> palette for document elements (<a href="../UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">font</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">background</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">tables</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">autoshapes</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">charts</a>). If you've applied some <b>Theme Colors</b> to document elements and then selected a different <b>Color Scheme</b>, the applied colors in your document change correspondingly.</p>
|
||||
<p>To change a color scheme, click the downward arrow next to the <b>Change color scheme</b> <img alt="Change color scheme" src="../images/changecolorscheme.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary color scheme from the available ones: <b>Office</b>, <b>Grayscale</b>, <b>Apex</b>, <b>Aspect</b>, <b>Civic</b>, <b>Concourse</b>, <b>Equity</b>, <b>Flow</b>, <b>Foundry</b>, <b>Median</b>, <b>Metro</b>, <b>Module</b>, <b>Odulent</b>, <b>Oriel</b>, <b>Origin</b>, <b>Paper</b>, <b>Solstice</b>, <b>Technic</b>, <b>Trek</b>, <b>Urban</b>, <b>Verve</b>. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list.</p>
|
||||
<p>Color schemes are applied to the whole document. They are used to quickly change the appearance of your document because they define the <b>Theme Colors</b> palette for different document elements (<a href="../UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">font</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">background</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">tables</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">autoshapes</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">charts</a>). If you applied some <b>Theme Colors</b> to the document elements and then select a different <b>Color Scheme</b>, the applied colors in your document will change correspondingly.</p>
|
||||
<p>To change a color scheme, click the downward arrow next to the <b>Change color scheme</b> <img alt="Change color scheme" src="../images/changecolorscheme.png" /> icon on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the required color scheme from the list: <b>Office</b>, <b>Grayscale</b>, <b>Apex</b>, <b>Aspect</b>, <b>Civic</b>, <b>Concourse</b>, <b>Equity</b>, <b>Flow</b>, <b>Foundry</b>, <b>Median</b>, <b>Metro</b>, <b>Module</b>, <b>Odulent</b>, <b>Oriel</b>, <b>Origin</b>, <b>Paper</b>, <b>Solstice</b>, <b>Technic</b>, <b>Trek</b>, <b>Urban</b>, <b>Verve</b>. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Color Schemes" src="../images/colorscheme.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>Once you select the preferred color scheme, you can select colors in a color palettes window that corresponds to the document element you want to apply the color to. For most of the document elements, the color palettes window can be accessed by clicking the colored box at the right sidebar when the necessary element is selected. For the font, this window can be opened using the downward arrow next to the <b>Font color</b> <img alt="Font color" src="../images/fontcolor.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar. The following palettes are available:</p>
|
||||
<p>Once you select the preferred color scheme, you can select other colors in the color palettes window that corresponds to the document element you want to apply the color to. For most document elements, the color palettes window can be accessed by clicking the colored box on the right sidebar when the required element is selected. For the font, this window can be opened using the downward arrow next to the <b>Font color</b> <img alt="Font color" src="../images/fontcolor.png" /> icon on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar. The following palettes are available:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Palette" src="../images/palette.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Theme Colors</b> - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the document.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Standard Colors</b> - the default colors set. The selected color scheme does not affect them.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Custom Color</b> - click this caption if there is no needed color in the available palettes. Select the necessary colors range moving the vertical color slider and set the specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also specify a color on the base of the RGB color model entering the necessary numeric values into the <b>R</b>, <b>G</b>, <b>B</b> (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the <b>#</b> sign. The selected color appears in the <b>New</b> preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the <b>Current</b> box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is specified, click the <b>Add</b> button:
|
||||
<li><b>Standard Colors</b> - a set of default colors. The selected color scheme does not affect them.</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<b>Custom Color</b> - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary colors range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the <b>R</b>, <b>G</b>, <b>B</b> (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the <b>#</b> sign. The selected color appears in the <b>New</b> preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the <b>Current</b> box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the <b>Add</b> button:
|
||||
<p><img alt="Palette - Custom Color" src="../images/palette_custom.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the <b>Custom color</b> palette.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -13,12 +13,12 @@
|
|||
<div class="search-field">
|
||||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Change text wrapping</h1>
|
||||
<h1>Change the text wrapping</h1>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Wrapping Style</b> option determines the way the object is positioned relative to the text. You can change the text wrapping style for inserted objects, such as <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">shapes</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">images</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm#" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">charts</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">text boxes</a> or <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">tables</a>.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Change text wrapping for shapes, images, charts, text boxes</h3>
|
||||
<p>To change the currently selected wrapping style:</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>select a separate object on the page left-clicking it. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it.</li>
|
||||
<li>left-click a separate object to select it. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it.</li>
|
||||
<li>open the text wrapping settings:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>switch to the the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and click the arrow next to the <img alt="Wrapping icon" src="../images/wrapping_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Wrapping</b> icon, or</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -30,20 +30,20 @@
|
|||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Wrapping Style - Inline" src="../images/wrappingstyle_inline_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Inline</b> - the object is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the object moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible.</p>
|
||||
<p>If one of the following styles is selected, the object can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly:</p>
|
||||
<p>If one of the following styles is selected, the object can be moved independently of the text and precisely positioned on the page:</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><p><img alt="Wrapping Style - Square" src="../images/wrappingstyle_square_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Square</b> - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the object.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><img alt="Wrapping Style - Tight" src="../images/wrappingstyle_tight_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Tight</b> - the text wraps the actual object edges.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><img alt="Wrapping Style - Through" src="../images/wrappingstyle_through_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Through</b> - the text wraps around the object edges and fills in the open white space within the object. So that the effect can appear, use the <b>Edit Wrap Boundary</b> option from the right-click menu.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><img alt="Wrapping Style - Through" src="../images/wrappingstyle_through_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Through</b> - the text wraps around the object edges and fills the open white space within the object. To apply this effect, use the <b>Edit Wrap Boundary</b> option from the right-click menu.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><img alt="Wrapping Style - Top and bottom" src="../images/wrappingstyle_topandbottom_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Top and bottom</b> - the text is only above and below the object.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><img alt="Wrapping Style - In front" src="../images/wrappingstyle_infront_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>In front</b> - the object overlaps the text.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><img alt="Wrapping Style - Behind" src="../images/wrappingstyle_behind_toptoolbar.png" /> <b>Behind</b> - the text overlaps the object.</p></li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>If you select the <b>Square</b>, <b>Tight</b>, <b>Through</b>, or <b>Top and bottom</b> style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - <b>Distance from Text</b> at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). To access these parameters, right-click the object, select the <b>Advanced Settings</b> option and switch to the <b>Text Wrapping</b> tab of the object <b>Advanced Settings</b> window. Set the necessary values and click <b>OK</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you select the <b>Square</b>, <b>Tight</b>, <b>Through</b>, or <b>Top and bottom</b> style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - <b>Distance from Text</b> at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). To access these parameters, right-click the object, select the <b>Advanced Settings</b> option and switch to the <b>Text Wrapping</b> tab of the object <b>Advanced Settings</b> window. Set the required values and click <b>OK</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you select a wrapping style other than <b>Inline</b>, the <b>Position</b> tab is also available in the object <b>Advanced Settings</b> window. To learn more on these parameters, please refer to the corresponding pages with the instructions on how to work with <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm#position" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">shapes</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm#position" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">images</a> or <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm#position" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">charts</a>.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you select a wrapping style other than <b>Inline</b>, you can also edit the wrap boundary for <b>images</b> or <b>shapes</b>. Right-click the object, select the <b>Wrapping Style</b> option from the contextual menu and click the <b>Edit Wrap Boundary</b> option. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. <img alt="Editing Wrap Boundary" src="../images/wrap_boundary.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>If you select a wrapping style other than <b>Inline</b>, you can also edit the wrap boundary for <b>images</b> or <b>shapes</b>. Right-click the object, select the <b>Wrapping Style</b> option from the contextual menu and click the <b>Edit Wrap Boundary</b> option. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the required position. <img alt="Editing Wrap Boundary" src="../images/wrap_boundary.png" /></p>
|
||||
<h3>Change text wrapping for tables</h3>
|
||||
<p>For <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">tables</a>, the following two wrapping styles are available: <b>Inline table</b> and <b>Flow table</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>To change the currently selected wrapping style:</p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -59,10 +59,10 @@
|
|||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>Using the <b>Text Wrapping</b> tab of the <b>Table - Advanced Settings</b> window you can also set up the following additional parameters:</p>
|
||||
<p>Using the <b>Text Wrapping</b> tab of the <b>Table - Advanced Settings</b> window, you can also set up the following additional parameters:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>For inline tables, you can set the table <b>Alignment</b> type (left, center or right) and <b>Indent from left</b>.</li>
|
||||
<li>For floating tables, you can set the <b>Distance from text</b> and the table <b>position</b> at the <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm#position" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Table Position</a> tab.</li>
|
||||
<li>For floating tables, you can set the <b>Distance from text</b> and the table <b>position</b> on the <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm#position" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Table Position</a> tab.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -16,21 +16,21 @@
|
|||
<h1>Copy/clear text formatting</h1>
|
||||
<p>To copy a certain text formatting,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>select the text passage which formatting you need to copy with the mouse or <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#textselection" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">using the keyboard</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Copy style</b> <img alt="Copy style" src="../images/copystyle.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this <img alt="Mouse pointer while pasting style" src="../images/paste_style.png" />),</li>
|
||||
<li>select the text passage you want to apply the same formatting to.</li>
|
||||
<li>select the text passage whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#textselection" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">using the keyboard</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Copy style</b> <img alt="Copy style" src="../images/copystyle.png" /> icon on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this <img alt="Mouse pointer while pasting style" src="../images/paste_style.png" />),</li>
|
||||
<li>select the required text passage to apply the same formatting.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>To apply the copied formatting to multiple text passages,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>select the text passage which formatting you need to copy with the mouse or <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#textselection" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">using the keyboard</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>double-click the <b>Copy style</b> <img alt="Copy style" src="../images/copystyle.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this <img alt="Mouse pointer while pasting style" src="../images/paste_style.png" /> and the <b>Copy style</b> icon will remain selected: <img alt="Multiple copying style" src="../images/copystyle_selected.png" />),</li>
|
||||
<li>select the text passage whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#textselection" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">use the keyboard</a>,</li>
|
||||
<li>double-click the <b>Copy style</b> <img alt="Copy style" src="../images/copystyle.png" /> icon on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this <img alt="Mouse pointer while pasting style" src="../images/paste_style.png" /> and the <b>Copy style</b> icon will remain selected: <img alt="Multiple copying style" src="../images/copystyle_selected.png" />),</li>
|
||||
<li>select the necessary text passages one by one to apply the same formatting to each of them,</li>
|
||||
<li>to exit this mode, click the <b>Copy style</b> <img alt="Multiple copying style" src="../images/copystyle_selected.png" /> icon once again or press the <b>Esc</b> key on the keyboard.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>To quickly remove the applied formatting from your text,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>select the text passage which formatting you want to remove,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Clear style</b> <img alt="Clear style" src="../images/clearstyle.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li>select the text passage whose formatting you want to remove,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Clear style</b> <img alt="Clear style" src="../images/clearstyle.png" /> icon on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -15,38 +15,40 @@
|
|||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Copy/paste text passages, undo/redo your actions</h1>
|
||||
<h3>Use basic clipboard operations</h3>
|
||||
<p>To cut, copy and paste text passages and inserted objects (autoshapes, images, charts) within the current document use the corresponding options from the right-click menu or icons available at any tab of the top toolbar:</p>
|
||||
<p>To cut, copy and paste text passages and inserted objects (autoshapes, images, charts) in the current document, select the corresponding options from the right-click menu or click the icons located on any tab of the top toolbar:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Cut</b> – select a text fragment or an object and use the <b>Cut</b> option from the right-click menu to delete the selection and send it to the computer clipboard memory. <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">The cut data can be later inserted to another place in the same document.</span></li>
|
||||
<li><b>Copy</b> – select a text fragment or an object and use the <b>Copy</b> option from the right-click menu, or the <b>Copy</b> <img alt="Copy icon" src="../images/copy.png" /> icon at the top toolbar to copy the selection to the computer clipboard memory. <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">The copied data can be later inserted to another place in the same document.</span></li>
|
||||
<li><b>Paste</b> – find the place in your document where you need to paste the previously copied text fragment/object and use the <b>Paste</b> option from the right-click menu, or the <b>Paste</b> <img alt="Paste icon" src="../images/paste.png" /> icon at the top toolbar.
|
||||
The text/object will be inserted at the current cursor position. <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">The data can be previously copied from the same document.</span></li>
|
||||
<li><b>Cut</b> – select a text fragment or an object and use the <b>Cut</b> option from the right-click menu to delete the selected text and send it to the computer clipboard memory. <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">The cut text can be later inserted to another place in the same document.</span></li>
|
||||
<li><b>Copy</b> – select a text fragment or an object and use the <b>Copy</b> option from the right-click menu, or the <b>Copy</b> <img alt="Copy icon" src="../images/copy.png" /> icon on the top toolbar to copy the selected text to the computer clipboard memory. <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document.</span></li>
|
||||
<li><b>Paste</b> – find the place in your document where you need to paste the previously copied text fragment/object and use the the <b>Paste</b> option from the right-click menu, or the <b>Paste</b> <img alt="Paste icon" src="../images/paste.png" /> icon on the top toolbar.
|
||||
The copied text/object will be inserted to the current cursor position. <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">The data can be previously copied from the same document.</span>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p><span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">In the <em>online version</em>, the following key combinations are only used to copy or paste data from/into another document or some other program,</span> <span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">in the <em>desktop version</em>, both the corresponding buttons/menu options and key combinations can be used for any copy/paste operations:</span></p>
|
||||
<p><span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">In the <em>online version</em>, the key combinations below are only used to copy or paste data from/into another document or a program.</span> <span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">In the <em>desktop version</em>, both corresponding buttons/menu options and key combinations can be used for any copy/paste operations:</span></p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Ctrl+X</b> key combination for cutting;</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Ctrl+C</b> key combination for copying;</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Ctrl+V</b> key combination for pasting.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: instead of cutting and pasting text within the same document you can just select the necessary text passage and drag and drop it to the necessary position.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: instead of cutting and pasting text fragments in the same document, you can just select the required text passage and drag and drop it to the necessary position.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Use the Paste Special feature</h3>
|
||||
<p>Once the copied text is pasted, the <b>Paste Special</b> <img alt="Paste Special" src="../images/pastespecialbutton.png" /> button appears next to the inserted text passage. Click this button to select the necessary paste option. </p>
|
||||
<p>When pasting the paragraph text or some text within autoshapes, the following options are available:</p>
|
||||
<p>When pasting a text paragraph or some text within autoshapes, the following options are available:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><em>Paste</em> - allows to paste the copied text keeping its original formatting.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Keep text only</em> - allows to paste the text without its original formatting.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Paste</em> - allows pasting the copied text keeping its original formatting.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Keep text only</em> - allows pasting the text without its original formatting.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>If you paste the copied table into an existing table, the following options are available:</p>
|
||||
<p>If you copy a table and paste it into an already existing table, the following options are available:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><em>Overwrite cells</em> - allows to replace the existing table contents with the pasted data. This option is selected by default.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Nest table</em> - allows to paste the copied table as a nested table into the selected cell of the existing table.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Keep text only</em> - allows to paste the table contents as text values separated by the tab character.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Overwrite cells</em> - allows replacing the contents of the existing table with the copied data. This option is selected by default.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Nest table</em> - allows pasting the copied table as a nested table into the selected cell of the existing table.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Keep text only</em> - allows pasting the table contents as text values separated by the tab character.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>To enable / disable the automatic appearance of the <b>Paste Special</b> button after pasting, go to the <b>File</b> tab > <b>Advanced Settings...</b> and check / uncheck the <b>Cut, copy and paste</b> checkbox.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Undo/redo your actions</h3>
|
||||
<p>To perform the undo/redo operations, use the corresponding icons in the editor header or keyboard shortcuts:</p>
|
||||
<p>To perform undo/redo operations, click the corresponding icons in the editor header or use the following keyboard shortcuts:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Undo</b> – use the <b>Undo</b> <img alt="Undo icon" src="../images/undo.png" /> icon at the left part of the editor header or the <b>Ctrl+Z</b> key combination to undo the last operation you performed.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Redo</b> – use the <b>Redo</b> <img alt="Redo icon" src="../images/redo.png" /> icon at the left part of the editor header or the <b>Ctrl+Y</b> key combination to redo the last undone operation.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Undo</b> – use the <b>Undo</b> <img alt="Undo icon" src="../images/undo.png" /> icon on the left side of the editor header or the <b>Ctrl+Z</b> key combination to undo the last operation you performed.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Redo</b> – use the <b>Redo</b> <img alt="Redo icon" src="../images/redo.png" /> icon on the left part of the editor header or the <b>Ctrl+Y</b> key combination to redo the last undone operation.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p class="note">
|
||||
<b>Note</b>: when you co-edit a document in the <b>Fast</b> mode, the possibility to <b>Redo</b> the last undone operation is not available.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -21,21 +21,21 @@
|
|||
<li>
|
||||
select the list type you would like to start:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Unordered list</b> with markers is created using the <b>Bullets</b> <img alt="Unordered List icon" src="../images/bullets.png" /> icon situated at the top toolbar</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Unordered list</b> with markers is created using the <b>Bullets</b> <img alt="Unordered List icon" src="../images/bullets.png" /> icon on the top toolbar</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<b>Ordered list</b> with digits or letters is created using the <b>Numbering</b> <img alt="Ordered List icon" src="../images/numbering.png" /> icon situated at the top toolbar
|
||||
<b>Ordered list</b> with digits or letters is created using the <b>Numbering</b> <img alt="Ordered List icon" src="../images/numbering.png" /> icon on the top toolbar
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: click the downward arrow next to the <b>Bullets</b> or <b>Numbering</b> icon to select how the list is going to look like.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>now each time you press the <b>Enter</b> key at the end of the line a new ordered or unordered list item will appear. To stop that, press the <b>Backspace</b> key and continue with the common text paragraph.</li>
|
||||
<li>each time you press the <b>Enter</b> key at the end of the line, a new ordered or unordered list item will appear. To stop that, press the <b>Backspace</b> key and keep on typing common text paragraphs.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>The program also creates numbered lists automatically when you enter digit 1 with a dot or a bracket and a space after it: <b>1.</b>, <b>1)</b>. Bulleted lists can be created automatically when you enter the <b>-</b>, <b>*</b> characters and a space after them.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting using the <b>Multilevel list</b> <img alt="Multilevel list icon" src="../images/outline.png" />, <b>Decrease indent</b> <img alt="Decrease indent icon" src="../images/decreaseindent.png" />, and <b>Increase indent</b> <img alt="Increase indent icon" src="../images/increaseindent.png" /> icons at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the additional indentation and spacing parameters can be changed at the right sidebar and in the advanced settings window. To learn more about it, read the <a href="ParagraphIndents.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Change paragraph indents</a> and <a href="LineSpacing.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Set paragraph line spacing</a> section.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting by clicking the <b>Multilevel list</b> <img alt="Multilevel list icon" src="../images/outline.png" />, <b>Decrease indent</b> <img alt="Decrease indent icon" src="../images/decreaseindent.png" />, and <b>Increase indent</b> <img alt="Increase indent icon" src="../images/increaseindent.png" /> icons on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the additional indentation and spacing parameters can be changed on the right sidebar and in the advanced settings window. To learn more about it, read the <a href="ParagraphIndents.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Change paragraph indents</a> and <a href="LineSpacing.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Set paragraph line spacing</a> section.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h3>Join and separate lists</h3>
|
||||
<p>To join a list to the preceding one:</p>
|
||||
<h3>Combine and separate lists</h3>
|
||||
<p>To combine a list with the previous one:</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>click the first item of the second list with the right mouse button,</li>
|
||||
<li>use the <b>Join to previous list</b> option from the contextual menu.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
|
|||
<li>click the list item where you want to begin a new list with the right mouse button,</li>
|
||||
<li>use the <b>Separate list</b> option from the contextual menu.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>The list will be separated, and the numbering in the second list will begin anew.</p>
|
||||
<p>The lists will be combined, and the numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h3>Change numbering</h3>
|
||||
<p>To continue sequential numbering in the second list according to the previous list numbering:</p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -61,14 +61,14 @@
|
|||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>click the list item where you want to apply a new numbering value with the right mouse button,</li>
|
||||
<li>use the <b>Set numbering value</b> option from the contextual menu,</li>
|
||||
<li>in a new window that opens, set the necessary numeric value and click the <b>OK</b> button.</li>
|
||||
<li>in the new opened window, set the required numeric value and click the <b>OK</b> button.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
|
||||
<h3>Change the list settings</h3>
|
||||
<p>To change the bulleted or numbered list settings, such as a bullet/number type, alignment, size and color:</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>click an existing list item or select the text you want to format as a list,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Bullets</b> <img alt="Unordered List icon" src="../images/bullets.png" /> or <b>Numbering</b> <img alt="Ordered List icon" src="../images/numbering.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Bullets</b> <img alt="Unordered List icon" src="../images/bullets.png" /> or <b>Numbering</b> <img alt="Ordered List icon" src="../images/numbering.png" /> icon on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>select the <b>List Settings</b> option,</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
the <b>List Settings</b> window will open. The bulleted list settings window looks like this:
|
||||
|
|
@ -77,11 +77,11 @@
|
|||
<p><img alt="Numbered List Settings window" src="../images/orderedlistsettings.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>For the bulleted list, you can choose a character used as a <b>bullet</b>, while for the numbered list you can choose the numbering <b>type</b>. The <b>Alignment</b>, <b>Size</b> and <b>Color</b> options are the same both for the bulleted and numbered lists.</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Bullet</b> - allows to select the necessary character used for the bulleted list. When you click on the <b>Font and Symbol</b> field, the <b>Symbol</b> window opens that allows to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, you can refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this article</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Type</b> - allows to select the necessary numbering type used for the numbered list. The following options are available: <em>None</em>, <em>1, 2, 3,...</em>, <em>a, b, c,...</em>, <em>A, B, C,...</em>, <em>i, ii, iii,...</em>, <em>I, II, III,...</em>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Alignment</b> - allows to select the necessary bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally within the space designated for them. The available alignment types are the following: <em>Left</em>, <em>Center</em>, <em>Right</em>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Size</b> - allows to select the necessary bullet/number size. The <em>Like a text</em> option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number size corresponds to the text size. You can choose one of the predefined sizes from <em>8</em> to <em>96</em>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Color</b> - allows to select the necessary bullet/number color. The <em>Like a text</em> option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the <b>Automatic</b> option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the <em>theme colors</em>, or <em>standard colors</em> on the palette, or specify a <em>custom</em> color.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Bullet</b> allows selecting the required character used for the bulleted list. When you click on the <b>Font and Symbol</b> field, the <b>Symbol</b> window will appear, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this article</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Type</b> allows selecting the required numbering type used for the numbered list. The following options are available: <em>None</em>, <em>1, 2, 3,...</em>, <em>a, b, c,...</em>, <em>A, B, C,...</em>, <em>i, ii, iii,...</em>, <em>I, II, III,...</em>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Alignment</b> allows selecting the required bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally. The following alignment types are available: <em>Left</em>, <em>Center</em>, <em>Right</em>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Size</b> allows selecting the required bullet/number size. The <b>Like a text</b> option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number size corresponds to the text size. You can choose one of the predefined sizes ranging from <em>8</em> to <em>96</em>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Color</b> allows selecting the required bullet/number color. The <b>Like a text</b> option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the <b>Automatic</b> option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the <em>theme colors</em>, or <em>standard colors</em> in the palette, or specify a <em>custom</em> color.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>All the changes are displayed in the <b>Preview</b> field.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -90,17 +90,17 @@
|
|||
<p>To change the multilevel list settings,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>click a list item,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Multilevel list</b> <img alt="Multilevel list icon" src="../images/outline.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Multilevel list</b> <img alt="Multilevel list icon" src="../images/outline.png" /> icon on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>select the <b>List Settings</b> option,</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
the <b>List Settings</b> window will open. The multilevel list settings window looks like this:
|
||||
<p><img alt="Multilevel List Settings window" src="../images/multilevellistsettings.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>Choose the necessary level of the list in the <b>Level</b> field on the left, then use the buttons on the top to adjust the bullet or number appearance for the selected level:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Type</b> - allows to select the necessary numbering type used for the numbered list or the necessary character used for the bulleted list. The following options are available for the numbered list: <em>None</em>, <em>1, 2, 3,...</em>, <em>a, b, c,...</em>, <em>A, B, C,...</em>, <em>i, ii, iii,...</em>, <em>I, II, III,...</em>. For the bulleted list, you can choose one of the default symbols or use the <b>New bullet</b> option. When you click this option, the <b>Symbol</b> window opens that allows to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, you can refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this article</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Alignment</b> - allows to select the necessary bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally within the space designated for them at the beginning of the paragraph. The available alignment types are the following: <em>Left</em>, <em>Center</em>, <em>Right</em>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Size</b> - allows to select the necessary bullet/number size. The <em>Like a text</em> option is selected by default. You can choose one of the predefined sizes from <em>8</em> to <em>96</em>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Color</b> - allows to select the necessary bullet/number color. The <em>Like a text</em> option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the <b>Automatic</b> option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the <em>theme colors</em>, or <em>standard colors</em> on the palette, or specify a <em>custom</em> color.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Type</b> allows selecting the required numbering type used for the numbered list or the required character used for the bulleted list. The following options are available for the numbered list: <em>None</em>, <em>1, 2, 3,...</em>, <em>a, b, c,...</em>, <em>A, B, C,...</em>, <em>i, ii, iii,...</em>, <em>I, II, III,...</em>. For the bulleted list, you can choose one of the default symbols or use the <b>New bullet</b> option. When you click this option, the <b>Symbol</b> window will appear, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this article</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Alignment</b> allows selecting the required bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally at the beginning of the paragraph. The following alignment types are available: <em>Left</em>, <em>Center</em>, <em>Right</em>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Size</b> allows selecting the required bullet/number size. The <b>Like a text</b> option is selected by default. You can choose one of the predefined sizes ranging from <em>8</em> to <em>96</em>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Color</b> allows selecting the required bullet/number color. The <b>Like a text</b> option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the <b>Automatic</b> option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the <em>theme colors</em>, or <em>standard colors</em> on the palette, or specify a <em>custom</em> color.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>All the changes are displayed in the <b>Preview</b> field.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,19 +14,19 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Create a Table of Contents</h1>
|
||||
<p>A table of contents contains a list of all chapters (sections etc.) in a document and displays the numbers of the pages where each chapter is started. This allows to easily navigate through a multi-page document quickly switching to the necessary part of the text. The table of contents is generated automatically on the base of the document headings formatted using built-in styles. This makes it easy to update the created table of contents without the necessity to edit headings and change page numbers manually if the document text has been changed.</p>
|
||||
<p>A table of contents contains a list of all the chapters (sections, etc.) in a document and displays the numbers of the pages where each chapter begins. It allows easily navigating through a multi-page document and quickly switching to the required part of the text. The table of contents is generated automatically on the basis of the document headings formatted using built-in styles. This makes it easy to update the created table of contents without having to edit the headings and change the page numbers manually if the text of the document has been changed.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Define the heading structure</h3>
|
||||
<p><b>Format headings</b></p>
|
||||
<p>First of all, format headings in you document using one of the predefined styles. To do that,</p>
|
||||
<p>First of all, format the headings in your document using one of the predefined styles. To do that,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>Select the text you want to include into the table of contents.</li>
|
||||
<li>Open the style menu on the right side of the <b>Home</b> tab at the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li>Click the style you want to apply. By default, you can use the <em>Heading 1 - Heading 9</em> styles.
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: if you want to use other styles (e.g. <em>Title</em>, <em>Subtitle</em> etc.) to format headings that will be included into the table of contents, you will need to adjust the table of contents settings first (see the corresponding section below). To learn more about available formatting styles, you can refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</p>
|
||||
<li>Click the required style to be applied. By default, you can use the <em>Heading 1 - Heading 9</em> styles.
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: if you want to use other styles (e.g. <em>Title</em>, <em>Subtitle</em> etc.) to format headings that will be included into the table of contents, you will need to adjust the table of contents settings first (see the corresponding section below). To learn more about available formatting styles, please refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p id="navigation"><b>Manage headings</b></p>
|
||||
<p>Once the headings are formatted, you can click the <img alt="Navigation icon" src="../images/navigationicon.png" /> <b>Navigation</b> icon at the left sidebar to open the panel that displays the list of all headings with corresponding nesting levels. This panel allows to easily navigate between headings in the document text as well as manage the heading structure.</p>
|
||||
<p>Once the headings are formatted, you can click the <img alt="Navigation icon" src="../images/navigationicon.png" /> <b>Navigation</b> icon on the left sidebar to open the panel that displays the list of all headings with corresponding nesting levels. This panel allows easily navigating between headings in the document text as well as managing the heading structure.</p>
|
||||
<p>Right-click on a heading in the list and use one of the available options from the menu:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Navigation panel" src="../images/navigationpanel.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
|
|
@ -43,13 +43,13 @@
|
|||
<li><b>Expand to level</b> - to expand the heading structure to the selected level. E.g. if you select <em>level 3</em>, then levels 1, 2 and 3 will be expanded, while level 4 and all lower levels will be collapsed.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>To manually expand or collapse separate heading levels, use the arrows to the left of the headings.</p>
|
||||
<p>To close the <b>Navigation</b> panel, click the <img alt="Navigation icon" src="../images/navigationicon.png" /> <b>Navigation</b> icon at the left sidebar once again.</p>
|
||||
<p>To close the <b>Navigation</b> panel, click the <img alt="Navigation icon" src="../images/navigationicon.png" /> <b>Navigation</b> icon on the left sidebar once again.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Insert a Table of Contents into the document</h3>
|
||||
<p>To insert a table of contents into your document:</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>Position the insertion point where you want to add the table of contents.</li>
|
||||
<li>Position the insertion point where the table of contents should be added.</li>
|
||||
<li>Switch to the <b>References</b> tab of the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li>Click the <img alt="Table of Contents icon" src="../images/tocicon.png" /> <b>Table of Contents</b> icon at the top toolbar, or<br />
|
||||
<li>Click the <img alt="Table of Contents icon" src="../images/tocicon.png" /> <b>Table of Contents</b> icon on the top toolbar, or<br />
|
||||
click the arrow next to this icon and select the necessary layout option from the menu. You can select the table of contents that displays headings, page numbers and leaders, or headings only.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Table of Contents options" src="../images/tociconmenu.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the table of content appearance can be adjusted later via the table of contents settings.</p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -60,8 +60,8 @@
|
|||
<p>To navigate between headings, press the <b>Ctrl</b> key and click the necessary heading within the table of contents field. You will go to the corresponding page.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Adjust the created Table of Contents</h3>
|
||||
<p><b>Refresh the Table of Contents</b></p>
|
||||
<p>After the table of contents is created, you may continue editing your text by adding new chapters, changing their order, removing some paragraphs, or expanding the text related to a heading so that the page numbers that correspond to the preceding or subsequent section may change. In this case, use the <b>Refresh</b> option to automatically apply all changes to the table of contents.</p>
|
||||
<p>Click the arrow next to the <img alt="Refresh icon" src="../images/tocrefreshicon.png" /> <b>Refresh</b> icon at the <b>References</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the menu:</p>
|
||||
<p>After the table of contents is created, you can continue editing your text by adding new chapters, changing their order, removing some paragraphs, or expanding the text related to a heading so that the page numbers that correspond to the previous or the following section may change. In this case, use the <b>Refresh</b> option to automatically apply all changes to the table of contents.</p>
|
||||
<p>Click the arrow next to the <img alt="Refresh icon" src="../images/tocrefreshicon.png" /> <b>Refresh</b> icon on the <b>References</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the menu:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Refresh entire table</b> - to add the headings that you added to the document, remove the ones you deleted from the document, update the edited (renamed) headings as well as update page numbers.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Refresh page numbers only</b> - to update page numbers without applying changes to the headings.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -73,29 +73,32 @@
|
|||
<p><b>Adjust the Table of Contents settings</b></p>
|
||||
<p>To open the table of contents settings, you can proceed in the following ways:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>Click the arrow next to the <img alt="Table of Contents icon" src="../images/tocicon.png" /> <b>Table of Contents</b> icon at the top toolbar and select the <b>Settings</b> option from the menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>Click the arrow next to the <img alt="Table of Contents icon" src="../images/tocicon.png" /> <b>Table of Contents</b> icon on the top toolbar and select the <b>Settings</b> option from the menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>Select the table of contents in the document text, click the arrow next to the table of contents field title and select the <b>Settings</b> option from the menu.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Table of Contents options" src="../images/tocsettingscc.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>Right-click anywhere within the table of contents and use the <b>Table of contents settings</b> option from the contextual menu.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>A new window will open where you can adjust the following settings:</p>
|
||||
<p>A new window will open, and you will be able to adjust the following settings:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Table of Contents settings window" src="../images/tocsettingswindow.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Show page numbers</b> - this option allows to choose if you want to display page numbers or not.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Right align page numbers</b> - this option allows to choose if you want to align page numbers by the right side of the page or not.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Leader</b> - this option allows to choose the leader type you want to use. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between a heading and a corresponding page number. It's also possible to select the <b>None</b> option if you do not want to use leaders.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Show page numbers</b> - this option allows displaying the page numbers.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Right align page numbers</b> - this option allows aligning the page numbers on the right side of the page.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Leader</b> - this option allows choose the required leader type. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between a heading and the corresponding page number. It's also possible to select the <b>None</b> option if you do not want to use leaders.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Format Table of Contents as links</b> - this option is checked by default. If you uncheck it, you will not be able to switch to the necessary chapter by pressing <b>Ctrl</b> and clicking the corresponding heading.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Build table of contents from</b> - this section allows to specify the necessary number of outline levels as well as the default styles that will be used to create the table of contents. Check the necessary radio button:
|
||||
<li><b>Build table of contents from</b> - this section allows specifying the necessary number of outline levels as well as the default styles that will be used to create the table of contents. Check the necessary radio button:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Outline levels</b> - when this option is selected, you will be able to adjust the number of hierarchical levels used in the table of contents. Click the arrows in the <b>Levels</b> field to decrease or increase the number of levels (the values from 1 to 9 are available). E.g., if you select the value of 3, headings that have levels 4 - 9 will not be included into the table of contents.
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<b>Outline levels</b> - when this option is selected, you will be able to adjust the number of hierarchical levels used in the table of contents. Click the arrows in the <b>Levels</b> field to decrease or increase the number of levels (the values from 1 to 9 are available). E.g., if you select the value of 3, headings that have levels 4 - 9 will not be included into the table of contents.
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Selected styles</b> - when this option is selected, you can specify additional styles that can be used to build the table of contents and assign a corresponding outline level to each of them. Specify the desired level value in the field to the right of the style. Once you save the settings, you will be able to use this style when creating the table of contents.
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<b>Selected styles</b> - when this option is selected, you can specify additional styles that can be used to build the table of contents and assign the corresponding outline level to each of them. Specify the desired level value in the field on the right of the style. Once you save the settings, you will be able to use this style when creating a table of contents.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Table of Contents settings window" src="../images/tocsettingswindow2.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Styles</b> - this options allows to select the desired appearance of the table of contents. Select the necessary style from the drop-down list. The preview field above displays how the table of contents should look like.
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<b>Styles</b> - this options allows selecting the desired appearance of the table of contents. Select the necessary style from the drop-down list. The preview field above displays how the table of contents should look like.
|
||||
<p>The following four default styles are available: <em>Simple</em>, <em>Standard</em>, <em>Modern</em>, <em>Classic</em>. The <em>Current</em> option is used if you customize the table of contents style.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
|
|
@ -113,7 +116,7 @@
|
|||
<p><b>Remove the Table of Contents</b></p>
|
||||
<p>To remove the table of contents from the document:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>click the arrow next to the <img alt="Table of Contents icon" src="../images/tocicon.png" /> <b>Table of Contents</b> icon at the top toolbar and use the <b>Remove table of contents</b> option,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the arrow next to the <img alt="Table of Contents icon" src="../images/tocicon.png" /> <b>Table of Contents</b> icon on the top toolbar and use the <b>Remove table of contents</b> option,</li>
|
||||
<li>or click the arrow next to the table of contents content control title and use the <b>Remove table of contents</b> option.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,47 +14,47 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Apply font decoration styles</h1>
|
||||
<p>You can apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons situated at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: in case you want to apply the formatting to the text already present in the document, select it with the mouse or <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#textselection" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">using the keyboard</a> and apply the formatting.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: in case you want to apply the formatting to the already existing text in the document, select it with the mouse or <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#textselection" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">use the keyboard</a> and apply the formatting.</p>
|
||||
<table>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Bold</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Bold" src="../images/bold.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Is used to make the font bold giving it more weight.</td>
|
||||
<td>Used to make the font bold giving it a heavier appearance.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Italic</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Italic" src="../images/italic.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Is used to make the font italicized giving it some right side tilt.</td>
|
||||
<td>Used to make the font slightly slanted to the right.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Underline</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Underline" src="../images/underline.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Is used to make the text underlined with the line going under the letters.</td>
|
||||
<td>Used to make the text underlined with a line going under the letters.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Strikeout</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Strikeout" src="../images/strike.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Is used to make the text struck out with the line going through the letters.</td>
|
||||
<td>Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Superscript</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Superscript" src="../images/sup.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions.</td>
|
||||
<td>Used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Subscript</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Subscript" src="../images/sub.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas.</td>
|
||||
<td>Used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>To access advanced font settings, click the right mouse button and select the <b>Paragraph Advanced Settings</b> option from the menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link at the right sidebar. Then the <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window will open where you need to switch to the <b>Font</b> tab.</p>
|
||||
<p>To access the advanced font settings, click the right mouse button and select the <b>Paragraph Advanced Settings</b> option from the menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link on the right sidebar. Then the <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window will appear, and you will need to switch to the <b>Font</b> tab.</p>
|
||||
<p>Here you can use the following font decoration styles and settings:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Strikethrough</b> is used to make the text struck out with the line going through the letters.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Double strikethrough</b> is used to make the text struck out with the double line going through the letters.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Superscript</b> is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Subscript</b> is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Strikethrough</b> is used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Double strikethrough</b> is used to make the text struck out with a double line going through the letters.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Superscript</b> is used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Subscript</b> is used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Small caps</b> is used to make all letters lower case.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>All caps</b> is used to make all letters upper case.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Spacing</b> is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the <b>Expanded</b> spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the <b>Condensed</b> spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box.</li>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -13,42 +13,42 @@
|
|||
<div class="search-field">
|
||||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Set font type, size, and color</h1>
|
||||
<p>You can select the font type, its size and color using the corresponding icons situated at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: in case you want to apply the formatting to the text already present in the document, select it with the mouse or <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#textselection" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">using the keyboard</a> and apply the formatting.</p>
|
||||
<h1>Set the font type, size, and color</h1>
|
||||
<p>You can select the font type, its size and color using the corresponding icons on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: in case you want to apply the formatting to the already existing text in the document, select it with the mouse or <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#textselection" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">use the keyboard</a> and apply the formatting.</p>
|
||||
<table>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td width="10%">Font</td>
|
||||
<td width="15%"><img alt="Font" src="../images/fontfamily.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Is used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available ones. <span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">If a required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, after that the font will be available for use in the <em>desktop version</em>.</span></td>
|
||||
<td>Used to select a font from the list of the the available fonts. <span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available in the <em>desktop version</em>.</span></td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Font size</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Font size" src="../images/fontsize.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Is used to select among the preset font size values from the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value to the font size field and then press <em>Enter</em>.</td>
|
||||
<td>Used to choose from the preset font size values in the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value in the font size field and then press <em>Enter</em>.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Increment font size</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Increment font size" src="../images/larger.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Is used to change the font size making it larger one point each time the button is pressed.</td>
|
||||
<td>Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time the button is pressed.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Decrement font size</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Decrement font size" src="../images/smaller.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Is used to change the font size making it smaller one point each time the button is pressed.</td>
|
||||
<td>Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each time the button is pressed.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Highlight color</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Highlight color" src="../images/highlightcolor.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Is used to mark separate sentences, phrases, words, or even characters by adding a color band that imitates highlighter pen effect around the text. You can select the necessary part of the text and then click the downward arrow next to the icon to select a color on the palette (this color set does not depend on the selected <b>Color scheme</b> and includes 16 colors) - the color will be applied to the text selection. Alternatively, you can first choose a highlight color and then start selecting the text with the mouse - the mouse pointer will look like this <img alt="Mouse pointer while highlighting" src="../images/highlight_color_mouse_pointer.png" /> and you'll be able to highlight several different parts of your text sequentially. To stop highlighting just click the icon once again. To clear the highlight color, choose the <b>No Fill</b> option. <b>Highlight color</b> is different from the <a href="../UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)"><b>Background color</b></a> <img alt="Paragraph background color icon" src="../images/backgroundcolor.png" /> as the latter is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin.</td>
|
||||
<td>Used to mark separate sentences, phrases, words, or even characters by adding a color band that imitates the highlighter pen effect throughout the text. You can select the required part of the text and click the downward arrow next to the icon to select a color in the palette (this color set does not depend on the selected <b>Color scheme</b> and includes 16 colors) - the color will be applied to the selected text. Alternatively, you can first choose a highlight color and then start selecting the text with the mouse - the mouse pointer will look like this <img alt="Mouse pointer while highlighting" src="../images/highlight_color_mouse_pointer.png" /> and you'll be able to highlight several different parts of your text sequentially. To stop highlighting, just click the icon once again. To delete the highlight color, choose the <b>No Fill</b> option. The <b>Highlight color</b> is different from the <a href="../UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)"><b>Background color</b></a> <img alt="Paragraph background color icon" src="../images/backgroundcolor.png" /> as the latter is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Font color</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Font color" src="../images/fontcolor.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Is used to change the color of the letters/characters in the text. By default, the automatic font color is set in a new blank document. It is displayed as a black font on the white background. If you change the background color into black, the font color will automatically change into white to keep the text clearly visible. To choose a different color, click the downward arrow next to the icon and select a color from the available palettes (the colors on the <b>Theme Colors</b> palette depend on the selected <a href="../UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">color scheme</a>). After you change the default font color, you can use the <b>Automatic</b> option in the color palettes window to quickly restore the automatic color for the selected text passage.</td>
|
||||
<td>Used to change the color of the letters/characters in the text. By default, the automatic font color is set in a new blank document. It is displayed as a black font on the white background. If you change the background color to black, the font color will automatically change to white to keep the text clearly visible. To choose a different color, click the downward arrow next to the icon and select a color from the available palettes (the colors in the <b>Theme Colors</b> palette depend on the selected <a href="../UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">color scheme</a>). After you change the default font color, you can use the <b>Automatic</b> option in the color palettes window to quickly restore the automatic color for the selected text passage.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: to learn more about the work with color palettes, please refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: to learn more about color palettes, please refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</html>
|
||||
|
|
@ -14,13 +14,13 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Apply formatting styles</h1>
|
||||
<p>Each formatting style is a set of predefined formatting options: (font size, color, line spacing, alignment etc.). The styles allow you to quickly format different parts of the document (headings, subheadings, lists, normal text, quotes) instead of applying several formatting options individually each time. This also ensures a consistent appearance throughout the entire document.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note">Style application depends on whether a style is a paragraph style (normal, no spacing, headings, list paragraph etc.), or the text style (based on the font type, size, color), as well as on whether a text passage is selected, or the mouse cursor is positioned within a word. In some cases you might need to select the necessary style from the style library twice so that it can be applied correctly: when you click the style at the style panel for the first time, the paragraph style properties are applied. When you click it for the second time, the text properties are applied.</p>
|
||||
<p>Each formatting style is a set of predefined formatting options: (font size, color, line spacing, alignment etc.). The styles allow you to quickly format different parts of the document (headings, subheadings, lists, normal text, quotes) instead of applying several formatting options individually each time. This also ensures the consistent appearance of the whole document.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note">Applying a style depends on whether this style is a paragraph style (normal, no spacing, headings, list paragraph etc.), or a text style (based on the font type, size, color). It also depends on whether a text passage is selected, or the mouse cursor is placed on a word. In some cases you might need to select the required style from the style library twice, so that it can be applied correctly: when you click the style in the style panel for the first time, the paragraph style properties are applied. When you click it for the second time, the text properties are applied.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Use default styles</h3>
|
||||
<p>To apply one of the available text formatting styles,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>place the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs you want to apply one of the formatting styles to,</li>
|
||||
<li>select the needed style from the style gallery on the right at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li>place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs,</li>
|
||||
<li>select the required style from the style gallery on the right on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>The following formatting styles are available: normal, no spacing, heading 1-9, title, subtitle, quote, intense quote, list paragraph, footer, header, footnote text.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Formatting styles" src="../images/formattingpresets.png" /></p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
|
|||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>Once the style is modified, all the paragraphs within the document formatted using this style will change their appearance correspondingly.</p>
|
||||
<p>Once the style is modified, all the paragraphs in the document formatted with this style will change their appearance correspondingly.</p>
|
||||
<p><b>To create a completely new style:</b></p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>Format a text passage as you need.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
|
|||
<li>or select the edited text passage with the mouse, drop-down the style gallery and click the <b>New style from selection</b> option.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>Set the new style parameters in the <b>Create New Style</b> window that opens:
|
||||
<li>Set the new style parameters in the opened <b>Create New Style</b> window:
|
||||
<p><img alt="Create New Style window" src="../images/createnewstylewindow.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>Specify the new style name in the text entry field.</li>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -18,22 +18,24 @@
|
|||
<p>To add an autoshape to your document,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Shape icon" src="../images/insertautoshape.png" /> <b>Shape</b> icon at the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Shape icon" src="../images/insertautoshape.png" /> <b>Shape</b> icon on the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>select one of the available autoshape groups: basic shapes, figured arrows, math, charts, stars & ribbons, callouts, buttons, rectangles, lines,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the necessary autoshape within the selected group,</li>
|
||||
<li>place the mouse cursor where you want the shape to be put,</li>
|
||||
<li>once the autoshape is added you can change its size, position and properties.
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: to add a caption within the autoshape make sure the shape is selected on the page and start typing your text. The text you add in this way becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it).</p>
|
||||
<li>place the mouse cursor where the shape should be added,</li>
|
||||
<li>once the autoshape is added, you can change its size, position and properties.
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: to add a caption to an autoshape, make sure the required shape is selected on the page and start typing your text. The added text becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it).</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>It's also possible to add a caption to the autoshape. To learn more on how to work with captions for autoshapes, you can refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this article</a>.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Move and resize autoshapes</h3>
|
||||
<p id ="shape_resize"><img class="floatleft" alt="Reshaping autoshape" src="../images/reshaping.png" />To change the autoshape size, drag small squares <img alt="Square icon" src="../images/resize_square.png" /> situated on the shape edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected autoshape while resizing, hold down the <b>Shift</b> key and drag one of the corner icons.</pid>
|
||||
<p id ="shape_resize"><img class="floatleft" alt="Reshaping autoshape" src="../images/reshaping.png" />To change the autoshape size, drag small squares <img alt="Square icon" src="../images/resize_square.png" /> situated on the shape edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected autoshape while resizing, hold down the <b>Shift</b> key and drag one of the corner icons.</p>
|
||||
<p>When modifying some shapes, for example figured arrows or callouts, the yellow diamond-shaped <img alt="Yellow diamond icon" src="../images/yellowdiamond.png" /> icon is also available. It allows you to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow.</p>
|
||||
<p>To alter the autoshape position, use the <img alt="Arrow" src="../images/arrow.png" /> icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the autoshape. Drag the autoshape to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button.
|
||||
When you move the autoshape, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected).
|
||||
<p>
|
||||
To alter the autoshape position, use the <img alt="Arrow" src="../images/arrow.png" /> icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the autoshape. Drag the autoshape to the required position without releasing the mouse button.
|
||||
When you move the autoshape, the guide lines are displayed to help you precisely position the object on the page (if the selected wrapping style is not inline).
|
||||
To move the autoshape by one-pixel increments, hold down the <b>Ctrl</b> key and use the keybord arrows.
|
||||
To move the autoshape strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the <b>Shift</b> key when dragging.</p>
|
||||
To move the autoshape strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the <b>Shift</b> key when dragging.
|
||||
</p>
|
||||
<p>To rotate the autoshape, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle <img alt="Rotation handle" src="../images/greencircle.png" /> and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the <b>Shift</b> key while rotating.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note">
|
||||
<b>Note</b>: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#workwithobjects" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">here</a>.
|
||||
|
|
@ -42,9 +44,9 @@
|
|||
<h3>Adjust autoshape settings</h3>
|
||||
<p id ="shape_rightclickmenu">To align and arrange autoshapes, use the <b>right-click menu</b>. The menu options are:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Cut, Copy, Paste</b> - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Arrange</b> is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Align</b> is used to align the shape left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Cut, Copy, Paste</b> - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Arrange</b> is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Align</b> is used to align the shape to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle, at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Wrapping Style</b> is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The <b>Edit Wrap Boundary</b> option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. <img alt="Editing Wrap Boundary" src="../images/wrap_boundary.png" /></li>
|
||||
<li><b>Rotate</b> is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Shape Advanced Settings</b> is used to open the 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -54,7 +56,7 @@
|
|||
<ul>
|
||||
<li id="shape_fill"><b>Fill</b> - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Color Fill</b> - select this option to specify the solid color you want to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape with.
|
||||
<li><b>Color Fill</b> - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Color Fill" src="../images/fill_color.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p id="color">Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available <a href="../UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">color sets</a> or specify any color you like:</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -69,7 +71,7 @@
|
|||
<li><b>Picture or Texture</b> - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Picture or Texture Fill" src="../images/fill_picture.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, you can add an image <b>From File</b> selecting it on your computer HDD or <b>From URL</b> inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window.</li>
|
||||
<li>If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, you can add an image <b>From File</b> by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, <b>From URL</b> by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or <b>From Storage</b> by selecting the required image stored on your portal.</li>
|
||||
<li>If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape, open the <b>From Texture</b> menu and select the necessary texture preset.
|
||||
<p>Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -114,23 +116,23 @@
|
|||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Wrapping Style</b> - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below).</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Change Autoshape</b> - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Show shadow</b> - check this option to display shape with shadow.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Show shadow</b> - check this option to display the shape with a shadow.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<hr />
|
||||
<h3>Adjust autoshape advanced settings</h3>
|
||||
<p>To change the <b>advanced settings</b> of the autoshape, right-click it and select the <b>Advanced Settings</b> option in the menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link at the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open:</p>
|
||||
<p>To change the <b>advanced settings</b> of the autoshape, right-click it and select the <b>Advanced Settings</b> option in the menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link on the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Shape - Advanced Settings" src="../images/shape_properties.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Size</b> tab contains the following parameters:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Width</b> - use one of these options to change the autoshape width.
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Absolute</b> - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified at the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab).</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Absolute</b> - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified on the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab).</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Relative</b> - specify a percentage <b>relative to</b> the <em>left margin</em> width, the <em>margin</em> (i.e. the distance between the left and right margins), the <em>page</em> width, or the <em>right margin</em> width.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Height</b> - use one of these options to change the autoshape height.
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Absolute</b> - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified at the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab).</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Absolute</b> - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified on the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab).</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Relative</b> - specify a percentage <b>relative to</b> the <em>margin</em> (i.e. the distance between the top and bottom margins), the <em>bottom margin</em> height, the <em>page</em> height, or the <em>top margin</em> height.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -159,15 +161,15 @@
|
|||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style you will be able to set up some additional parameters - <b>distance from text</b> at all sides (top, bottom, left, right).</p>
|
||||
<p>If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom styles, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - <b>distance from text</b> at all sides (top, bottom, left, right).</p>
|
||||
<p id="position"><img alt="Shape - Advanced Settings" src="../images/shape_properties_2.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Position</b> tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style:</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Position</b> tab is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
The <b>Horizontal</b> section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Alignment</b> (left, center, right) <b>relative to</b> character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,</li>
|
||||
<li>Absolute <b>Position</b> measured in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified at the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab) <b>to the right of</b> character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,</li>
|
||||
<li>Absolute <b>Position</b> measured in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified on the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab) <b>to the right of</b> character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Relative position</b> measured in percent <b>relative to</b> the left margin, margin, page or right margin.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -175,26 +177,28 @@
|
|||
The <b>Vertical</b> section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Alignment</b> (top, center, bottom) <b>relative to</b> line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,</li>
|
||||
<li>Absolute <b>Position</b> measured in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified at the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab) <b>below</b> line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,</li>
|
||||
<li>Absolute <b>Position</b> measured in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified on the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab) <b>below</b> line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Relative position</b> measured in percent <b>relative to</b> the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Move object with text</b> controls whether the autoshape moves as the text to which it is anchored moves.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Allow overlap</b> controls whether two autoshapes overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Move object with text</b> ensures that the autoshape moves along with the text to which it is anchored.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Allow overlap</b> makes it possible for two autoshapes to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Shape - Advanced Settings" src="../images/shape_properties_3.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Weights & Arrows</b> tab contains the following parameters:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Line Style</b> - this option group allows to specify the following parameters:
|
||||
<li><b>Line Style</b> - this option group allows specifying the following parameters:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Cap Type</b> - this option allows to set the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.:
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<b>Cap Type</b> - this option allows setting the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Flat</b> - the end points will be flat.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Round</b> - the end points will be rounded.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Square</b> - the end points will be square.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Join Type</b> - this option allows to set the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline:
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<b>Join Type</b> - this option allows setting the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Round</b> - the corner will be rounded.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Bevel</b> - the corner will be cut off angularly.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -204,13 +208,13 @@
|
|||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Arrows</b> - this option group is available if a shape from the <b>Lines</b> shape group is selected. It allows to set the arrow <b>Start</b> and <b>End Style</b> and <b>Size</b> by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Arrows</b> - this option group is available if a shape from the <b>Lines</b> shape group is selected. It allows setting the arrow <b>Start</b> and <b>End Style</b> and <b>Size</b> by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Shape - Advanced Settings" src="../images/shape_properties_4.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Text Padding</b> tab allows to change the autoshape <b>Top</b>, <b>Bottom</b>, <b>Left</b> and <b>Right</b> internal margins (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders).</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Text Padding</b> tab allows changing the <b>Top</b>, <b>Bottom</b>, <b>Left</b> and <b>Right</b> internal margins of the autoshape (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders).</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Shape - Advanced Settings" src="../images/shape_properties_5.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Alternative Text</b> tab allows to specify a <b>Title</b> and <b>Description</b> which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the shape.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Alternative Text</b> tab allows specifying a <b>Title</b> and <b>Description</b> which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the shape contains.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</html>
|
||||
|
|
@ -14,8 +14,8 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Add bookmarks</h1>
|
||||
<p>Bookmarks allow to quickly jump to a certain position in the current document or add a link to this location within the document.</p>
|
||||
<p>To add a bookmark within a document:</p>
|
||||
<p>Bookmarks allow quickly access a certain part of the text or add a link to its location in the document.</p>
|
||||
<p>To add a bookmark in a document:</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>specify the place where you want the bookmark to be added:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
|
|
@ -24,26 +24,26 @@
|
|||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>References</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Bookmark icon" src="../images/bookmark.png" /> <b>Bookmark</b> icon at the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>in the <b>Bookmarks</b> window that opens, enter the <b>Bookmark name</b> and click the <b>Add</b> button - a bookmark will be added to the bookmark list displayed below,
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the bookmark name should begin wish a letter, but it can also contain numbers. The bookmark name cannot contain spaces, but can include the underscore character "_".</p>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Bookmark icon" src="../images/bookmark.png" /> <b>Bookmark</b> icon on the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>in the <b>Bookmarks</b> window, enter the <b>Bookmark name</b> and click the <b>Add</b> button - a bookmark will be added to the bookmark list displayed below,
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the bookmark name should begin with a letter, but it can also contain numbers. The bookmark name cannot contain spaces, but can include the underscore character "_".</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Bookmarks window" src="../images/bookmark_window.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>To go to one of the added bookmarks within the document text:</p>
|
||||
<p>To access one of the added bookmarks within in the text:</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Bookmark icon" src="../images/bookmark.png" /> <b>Bookmark</b> icon at the <b>References</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>in the <b>Bookmarks</b> window that opens, select the bookmark you want to jump to. To easily find the necessary bookmark in the list you can sort the list by bookmark <b>Name</b> or by <b>Location</b> of a bookmark within the document text,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Bookmark icon" src="../images/bookmark.png" /> <b>Bookmark</b> icon on the <b>References</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>in the <b>Bookmarks</b> window, select the bookmark you want to access. To easily find the required bookmark in the list, you can sort the list of bookmarks by <b>Name</b> or by <b>Location</b> in the text,</li>
|
||||
<li>check the <b>Hidden bookmarks</b> option to display hidden bookmarks in the list (i.e. the bookmarks automatically created by the program when adding references to a certain part of the document. For example, if you create a hyperlink to a certain heading within the document, the document editor automatically creates a hidden bookmark to the target of this link).</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Go to</b> button - the cursor will be positioned in the location within the document where the selected bookmark was added, or the corresponding text passage will be selected,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Go to</b> button - the cursor will be positioned where the selected bookmark was added to the text, or the corresponding text passage will be selected,</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
click the <b>Get Link</b> button - a new window will open where you can press the <b>Copy</b> button to copy the link to the file which specifyes the bookmark location in the document. When you paste this link in a browser address bar and press Enter, the document will open in the location where the selected bookmark was added.
|
||||
click the <b>Get Link</b> button - a new window will open where you can press the <b>Copy</b> button to copy the link to the file which specifyes the bookmark location in the document. When you paste this link in a browser address bar and press Enter, the document will be opened where the selected bookmark was added.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Bookmarks window" src="../images/bookmark_window2.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: if you want to share this link with other users, you'll also need to provide corresponding access rights to the file for certain users using the <b>Sharing</b> option at the <b>Collaboration</b> tab.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: if you want to share this link with other users, you'll need to provide them with the corresponding access rights using the <b>Sharing</b> option on the <b>Collaboration</b> tab.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Close</b> button to close the window.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>To delete a bookmark select it in the bookmark list and use the <b>Delete</b> button.</p>
|
||||
<p>To delete a bookmark, select it in the bookmark list and click the <b>Delete</b> button.</p>
|
||||
<p>To find out how to use bookmarks when creating links please refer to the <a href="../UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Add hyperlinks</a> section.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -17,9 +17,9 @@
|
|||
<h3>Insert a chart</h3>
|
||||
<p>To insert a chart into your document,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>put the cursor at the place where you want to add a chart,</li>
|
||||
<li>place the cursor where the chart should be added,</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Chart icon" src="../images/insertchart.png" /> <b>Chart</b> icon at the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Chart icon" src="../images/insertchart.png" /> <b>Chart</b> icon on the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>select the needed chart type from the available ones - Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, XY (Scatter), or Stock,
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: for <b>Column</b>, <b>Line</b>, <b>Pie</b>, or <b>Bar</b> charts, a 3D format is also available.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -33,13 +33,17 @@
|
|||
</ul>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Chart Editor window" src="../images/charteditor.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>change the chart settings clicking the <b>Edit Chart</b> button situated in the <b>Chart Editor</b> window. The <b>Chart - Advanced Settings</b> window will open.
|
||||
<li>change the chart settings by clicking the <b>Edit Chart</b> button situated in the <b>Chart Editor</b> window. The <b>Chart - Advanced Settings</b> window will open.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Chart - Advanced Settings window" src="../images/chartsettings.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Type & Data</b> tab allows you to change the chart type as well as the data you wish to use to create a chart.</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>Select a chart <b>Type</b> you wish to apply: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, XY (Scatter), or Stock.</li>
|
||||
<li>Check the selected <b>Data Range</b> and modify it, if necessary, clicking the <b>Select Data</b> button and entering the desired data range in the following format: <em>Sheet1!A1:B4</em>.</li>
|
||||
<li>Choose the way to arrange the data. You can either select the <b>Data series</b> to be used on the X axis: <b>in rows</b> or <b>in columns</b>.</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
Check the selected <b>Data Range</b> and modify it, if necessary. To do that, click the <img alt="Source data range icon" src="../images/changerange.png" /> icon.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Select Data Range window" src="../images/selectdata.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>In the <b>Select Data Range</b> window, enter the necessary data range in the following format: <em>Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10</em>. You can also select the necessary cell range in the sheet using the mouse. When ready, click <b>OK</b>.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>Choose the way to arrange the data. You can select the <b>Data series</b> to be used on the X axis: <b>in rows</b> or <b>in columns</b>.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Chart - Advanced Settings window" src="../images/chartsettings2.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Layout</b> tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements.</p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -85,17 +89,17 @@
|
|||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the <b>Lines</b> and <b>Markers</b> options are available for <b>Line charts</b> and <b>XY (Scatter) charts</b> only.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
The <b>Axis Settings</b> section allows to specify if you wish to display <b>Horizontal/Vertical Axis</b> or not selecting the <b>Show</b> or <b>Hide</b> option from the drop-down list. You can also specify <b>Horizontal/Vertical Axis Title</b> parameters:
|
||||
The <b>Axis Settings</b> section allows specifying whether to display <b>Horizontal/Vertical Axis</b> or not by selecting the <b>Show</b> or <b>Hide</b> option from the drop-down list. You can also specify <b>Horizontal/Vertical Axis Title</b> parameters:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
Specify if you wish to display the <b>Horizontal Axis Title</b> or not selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
|
||||
Specify if you wish to display the <b>Horizontal Axis Title</b> or not by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>None</b> to not display a horizontal axis title,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>No Overlay</b> to display the title below the horizontal axis.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
Specify the <b>Vertical Axis Title</b> orientation selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
|
||||
Specify the <b>Vertical Axis Title</b> orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>None</b> to not display a vertical axis title,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Rotated</b> to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis,</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -105,7 +109,7 @@
|
|||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
The <b>Gridlines</b> section allows to specify which of the <b>Horizontal/Vertical Gridlines</b> you wish to display selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: <b>Major</b>, <b>Minor</b>, or <b>Major and Minor</b>. You can hide the gridlines at all using the <b>None</b> option.
|
||||
The <b>Gridlines</b> section allows specifying which of the <b>Horizontal/Vertical Gridlines</b> you wish to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: <b>Major</b>, <b>Minor</b>, or <b>Major and Minor</b>. You can hide the gridlines at all using the <b>None</b> option.
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the <b>Axis Settings</b> and <b>Gridlines</b> sections will be disabled for <b>Pie charts</b> since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
|
|
@ -113,16 +117,17 @@
|
|||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the <b>Vertical/Horizontal Axis</b> tabs will be disabled for <b>Pie charts</b> since charts of this type have no axes.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Vertical Axis</b> tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the <b>Bar charts</b>, therefore in this case the <b>Vertical Axis</b> tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the <b>XY (Scatter) charts</b>, both axes are value axes.</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Axis Options</b> section allows to set the following parameters:
|
||||
<li>The <b>Axis Options</b> section allows setting the following parameters:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Minimum Value</b> - is used to specify a lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The <b>Auto</b> option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the <b>Fixed</b> option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Maximum Value</b> - is used to specify a highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The <b>Auto</b> option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the <b>Fixed</b> option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Minimum Value</b> - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The <b>Auto</b> option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the <b>Fixed</b> option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Maximum Value</b> - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The <b>Auto</b> option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the <b>Fixed</b> option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Axis Crosses</b> - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The <b>Auto</b> option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the <b>Value</b> option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the <b>Minimum/Maximum Value</b> on the vertical axis.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Display Units</b> - is used to determine a representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the <b>Thousands</b> display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: <b>Hundreds</b>, <b>Thousands</b>, <b>10 000</b>, <b>100 000</b>, <b>Millions</b>, <b>10 000 000</b>, <b>100 000 000</b>, <b>Billions</b>, <b>Trillions</b>, or choose the <b>None</b> option to return to the default units.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Values in reverse order</b> - is used to display values in an opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Display Units</b> - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the <b>Thousands</b> display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: <b>Hundreds</b>, <b>Thousands</b>, <b>10 000</b>, <b>100 000</b>, <b>Millions</b>, <b>10 000 000</b>, <b>100 000 000</b>, <b>Billions</b>, <b>Trillions</b>, or choose the <b>None</b> option to return to the default units.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Values in reverse order</b> - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Tick Options</b> section allows to adjust the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed, if the corresponding option is set at the <b>Layout</b> tab. The <b>Major/Minor Type</b> drop-down lists contain the following placement options:
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
The <b>Tick Options</b> section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the <b>Layout</b> tab. The <b>Major/Minor Type</b> drop-down lists contain the following placement options:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>None</b> to not display major/minor tick marks,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Cross</b> to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis,</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -130,7 +135,7 @@
|
|||
<li><b>Out</b> to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Label Options</b> section allows to adjust the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a <b>Label Position</b> in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list:
|
||||
<li>The <b>Label Options</b> section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a <b>Label Position</b> in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>None</b> to not display tick mark labels,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Low</b> to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area,</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -142,20 +147,21 @@
|
|||
<p><img alt="Chart - Advanced Settings window" src="../images/chartsettings4.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Horizontal Axis</b> tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the <b>Bar charts</b>, therefore in this case the <b>Horizontal Axis</b> tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the <b>XY (Scatter) charts</b>, both axes are value axes.</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Axis Options</b> section allows to set the following parameters:
|
||||
<li>The <b>Axis Options</b> section allows setting the following parameters:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Axis Crosses</b> - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The <b>Auto</b> option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the <b>Value</b> option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the <b>Minimum/Maximum Value</b> (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Axis Position</b> - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: <b>On Tick Marks</b> or <b>Between Tick Marks</b>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Values in reverse order</b> - is used to display categories in an opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Values in reverse order</b> - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Tick Options</b> section allows to adjust the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed, if the corresponding option is set at the <b>Layout</b> tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters:
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
The <b>Tick Options</b> section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the <b>Layout</b> tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Major/Minor Type</b> - is used to specify the following placement options: <b>None</b> to not display major/minor tick marks, <b>Cross</b> to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, <b>In</b> to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, <b>Out</b> to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Interval between Marks</b> - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Label Options</b> section allows to adjust the appearance of labels which display categories.
|
||||
<li>The <b>Label Options</b> section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories.
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Label Position</b> - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: <b>None</b> to not display category labels, <b>Low</b> to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, <b>High</b> to display category labels at the top of the plot area, <b>Next to axis</b> to display category labels next to the axis.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Axis Label Distance</b> - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -164,7 +170,7 @@
|
|||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Chart - Advanced Settings" src="../images/chartsettings5.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Alternative Text</b> tab allows to specify a <b>Title</b> and <b>Description</b> which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the chart.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Alternative Text</b> tab allows specifying a <b>Title</b> and <b>Description</b> which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<hr />
|
||||
|
|
@ -176,14 +182,18 @@
|
|||
</p>
|
||||
<hr />
|
||||
<h3>Edit chart elements</h3>
|
||||
<p>To edit the chart <b>Title</b>, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own one instead.</p>
|
||||
<p>To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use icons at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar to change the font <a href="../UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">type, size, color</a> or its <a href="../UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">decoration style</a>.</p>
|
||||
<p>When the chart is selected, the <b>Shape settings</b> <img alt="Shape settings icon" src="../images/shape_settings_icon.png" /> icon is also available on the right, since a shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the <b>Shape settings</b> tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm#shape_fill" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)"><b>Fill</b></a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm#shape_stroke" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)"><b>Stroke</b></a> and <b>Wrapping Style</b>. Note that you cannot change the shape type.</p>
|
||||
<p>To edit the chart <b>Title</b>, select the default text with the mouse and type the required text.</p>
|
||||
<p>To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use the corresponding icons on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar to change the font <a href="../UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">type, size, color</a> or its <a href="../UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">decoration style</a>.</p>
|
||||
<p>When the chart is selected, the <b>Shape settings</b> <img alt="Shape settings icon" src="../images/shape_settings_icon.png" /> icon is also available on the right, since a shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the <b>Shape settings</b> tab on the right sidebar and adjust <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm#shape_fill" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)"><b>Fill</b></a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm#shape_stroke" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)"><b>Stroke</b></a> and <b>Wrapping Style</b> of the shape. Note that you cannot change the shape type.</p>
|
||||
<p>
|
||||
Using the <b>Shape Settings</b> tab at the right panel you can not only adjust the chart area itself, but also change the chart elements, such as <em>plot area</em>, <em>data series</em>, <em>chart title</em>, <em>legend</em> etc and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: <em>solid color</em>, <em>gradient</em>, <em>texture</em> or <em>picture</em>, <em>pattern</em>. Specify the fill parameters and set the <em>Opacity</em> level if necessary.
|
||||
Using the <b>Shape Settings</b> tab on the right panel, you can both adjust the chart area itself and change the chart elements, such as <em>plot area</em>, <em>data series</em>, <em>chart title</em>, <em>legend</em> etc and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: <em>solid color</em>, <em>gradient</em>, <em>texture</em> or <em>picture</em>, <em>pattern</em>. Specify the fill parameters and set the <em>Opacity</em> level if necessary.
|
||||
When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available at the <b>Shape Settings</b> tab: <em>color</em>, <em>width</em> and <em>type</em>. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, you can refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.
|
||||
</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the <b>Show shadow</b> option is also available at the <b>Shape settings</b> tab, but it is disabled for chart elements.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares <img alt="Square icon" src="../images/resize_square.png" /> located along the perimeter of the element.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Resize chart elements" src="../images/resizeelement.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to <img alt="Arrow" src="../images/arrow.png" />, hold the left mouse button and drag the element to the needed position.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Move chart elements" src="../images/moveelement.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the <b>Delete</b> key on the keyboard.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="3D chart" src="../images/3dchart.png" /></p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -192,7 +202,7 @@
|
|||
<p><img class="floatleft" alt="Chart Settings tab" src="../images/right_chart.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>Some of the chart settings can be altered using the <b>Chart settings</b> tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the chart and choose the <b>Chart settings</b> <img alt="Chart settings icon" src="../images/chart_settings_icon.png" /> icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties:</p>
|
||||
<ul style="margin-left: 280px;">
|
||||
<li><b>Size</b> is used to view the current chart <b>Width</b> and <b>Height</b>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Size</b> is used to view the <b>Width</b> and <b>Height</b> of the current chart.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Wrapping Style</b> is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below).</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Change Chart Type</b> is used to change the selected chart type and/or style.
|
||||
<p>To select the necessary chart <b>Style</b>, use the second drop-down menu in the <b>Change Chart Type</b> section.</p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -201,21 +211,21 @@
|
|||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window you can also double-click the chart in the document.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>Some of these options you can also find in the <b>right-click menu</b>. The menu options are:</p>
|
||||
<p>You can also find some of these options in the <b>right-click menu</b>. The menu options are:</p>
|
||||
<ul style="margin-left: 280px;">
|
||||
<li><b>Cut, Copy, Paste</b> - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Arrange</b> is used to bring the selected chart to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Cut, Copy, Paste</b> - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Arrange</b> is used to bring the selected chart to foreground, send it to the background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Align</b> is used to align the chart left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Wrapping Style</b> is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind. The <b>Edit Wrap Boundary</b> option is unavailable for charts.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Edit Data</b> is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Chart Advanced Settings</b> is used to open the 'Chart - Advanced Settings' window.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<hr />
|
||||
<p>To change the chart advanced settings, click the needed chart with the right mouse button and select <b>Chart Advanced Settings</b> from the right-click menu or just click the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link at the right sidebar. The chart properties window will open:</p>
|
||||
<p>To change the chart advanced settings, click the needed chart with the right mouse button and select <b>Chart Advanced Settings</b> from the right-click menu or just click the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link on the right sidebar. The chart properties window will open:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Chart - Advanced Settings: Size" src="../images/chart_properties.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Size</b> tab contains the following parameters:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Width</b> and <b>Height</b> - use these options to change the chart width and/or height. If the <b>Constant Proportions</b> <img alt="Constant Proportions icon" src="../images/constantproportions.png" /> button is clicked (in this case it looks like this <img alt="Constant Proportions icon activated" src="../images/constantproportionsactivated.png" />), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Width</b> and <b>Height</b> - use these options to change the width and/or height of the chart. If the <b>Constant Proportions</b> <img alt="Constant Proportions icon" src="../images/constantproportions.png" /> button is clicked (in this case it looks like this <img alt="Constant Proportions icon activated" src="../images/constantproportionsactivated.png" />), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Chart - Advanced Settings: Text Wrapping" src="../images/chart_properties_1.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Text Wrapping</b> tab contains the following parameters:</p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -234,15 +244,15 @@
|
|||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style you will be able to set up some additional parameters - <b>distance from text</b> at all sides (top, bottom, left, right).</p>
|
||||
<p>If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom styles, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - <b>distance from text</b> at all sides (top, bottom, left, right).</p>
|
||||
<p id="position"><img alt="Chart - Advanced Settings: Position" src="../images/chart_properties_2.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Position</b> tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style:</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Position</b> tab is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
The <b>Horizontal</b> section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Alignment</b> (left, center, right) <b>relative to</b> character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,</li>
|
||||
<li>Absolute <b>Position</b> measured in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified at the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab) <b>to the right of</b> character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,</li>
|
||||
<li>Absolute <b>Position</b> measured in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified on the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab) <b>to the right of</b> character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Relative position</b> measured in percent <b>relative to</b> the left margin, margin, page or right margin.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -250,15 +260,15 @@
|
|||
The <b>Vertical</b> section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Alignment</b> (top, center, bottom) <b>relative to</b> line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,</li>
|
||||
<li>Absolute <b>Position</b> measured in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified at the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab) <b>below</b> line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,</li>
|
||||
<li>Absolute <b>Position</b> measured in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified on the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab) <b>below</b> line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Relative position</b> measured in percent <b>relative to</b> the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Move object with text</b> controls whether the chart moves as the text to which it is anchored moves.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Allow overlap</b> controls whether two charts overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Move object with text</b> ensures that the chart moves along with the text to which it is anchored.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Allow overlap</b> makes it possible for two charts to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Chart - Advanced Settings" src="../images/chart_properties_3.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Alternative Text</b> tab allows to specify a <b>Title</b> and <b>Description</b> which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the chart.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Alternative Text</b> tab allows specifying a <b>Title</b> and <b>Description</b> which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</html>
|
||||
|
|
@ -14,31 +14,31 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Insert content controls</h1>
|
||||
<p>Content controls are objects containing different types of contents, such as text, objects etc. Depending on the selected content control type, you can create a form with input fields that can be filled in by other users, or protect some parts of the document from being edited or deleted etc.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the possibility to add new content controls is available in the <b>paid</b> version only. In the free Community version, you can edit existing content controls, as well as copy and paste them.</p>
|
||||
<p>Content controls are objects containing different types of contents, such as text, objects etc. Depending on the selected content control type, you can create a form with input fields that can be filled in by other users, or protect some parts of the document from being edited or deleted, etc.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the feature to add new content controls is available in the <b>paid</b> version only. In the free Community version, you can edit existing content controls, as well as copy and paste them.</p>
|
||||
<p>Currently, you can add the following types of content controls: <em>Plain Text</em>, <em>Rich Text</em>, <em>Picture</em>, <em>Combo box</em>, <em>Drop-down list</em>, <em>Date</em>, <em>Check box</em>.</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><em>Plain Text</em> is an object containing text that can be formatted. Plain text content controls cannot contain more than one paragraph.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Plain Text</em> is an object containing text that cannot be formatted. Plain text content controls cannot contain more than one paragraph.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Rich Text</em> is an object containing text that can be formatted. Rich text content controls can contain several paragraphs, lists, and objects (images, shapes, tables etc.).</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Picture</em> is an object containing a single image.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Combo box</em> is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows to choose one of the predefined values from the list and edit the selected value if necessary.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Drop-down list</em> is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows to choose one of the predefined values from the list. The selected value cannot be edited.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Date</em> is an object containing a calendar that allows to choose a date.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Check box</em> is an object that allows to display two states: check box is selected and check box is cleared.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Combo box</em> is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows choosing one of the predefined values from the list and edit the selected value if necessary.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Drop-down list</em> is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows choosing one of the predefined values from the list. The selected value cannot be edited.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Date</em> is an object containing a calendar that allows choosing a date.</li>
|
||||
<li><em>Check box</em> is an object that allows displaying two states: the check box is selected and the check box is cleared.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<h3>Adding content controls</h3>
|
||||
<h5>Create a new Plain Text content control</h5>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added,<br />or select a text passage you want to become the control contents.</li>
|
||||
<li>position the insertion point within the text line where the content control should be added,<br />or select a text passage to transform it into a content control.</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li>click the arrow next to the <img alt="Content Controls icon" src="../images/insertccicon.png" /> <b>Content Controls</b> icon.</li>
|
||||
<li>choose the <b>Plain Text</b> option from the menu.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>The control will be inserted at the insertion point within a line of the existing text. Replace the default text within the control ("Your text here") with your own one: select the default text, and type in a new text or copy a text passage from anywhere and paste it into the content control. Plain text content controls do not allow adding line breaks and cannot contain other objects such as images, tables etc.</p>
|
||||
<p>The content control will be inserted at the insertion point within existing text line. Replace the default text within the content control ("Your text here") with your own text: select the default text, and type in a new text or copy a text passage from anywhere and paste it into the content control. The Plain text content controls do not allow adding line breaks and cannot contain other objects such as images, tables, etc.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="New plain text content control" src="../images/addedcontentcontrol.png" /></p>
|
||||
<h5>Create a new Rich Text content control</h5>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>position the insertion point at the end of a paragraph after which you want the control to be added,<br />or select one or more of the existing paragraphs you want to become the control contents.</li>
|
||||
<li>position the insertion point within the text line where the content control should be added,<br />or select one or more of the existing paragraphs you want to become the control contents.</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li>click the arrow next to the <img alt="Content Controls icon" src="../images/insertccicon.png" /> <b>Content Controls</b> icon.</li>
|
||||
<li>choose the <b>Rich Text</b> option from the menu.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,24 +50,24 @@
|
|||
<li>position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added.</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li>click the arrow next to the <img alt="Content Controls icon" src="../images/insertccicon.png" /> <b>Content Controls</b> icon.</li>
|
||||
<li>choose the <b>Picture</b> option from the menu - the control will be inserted at the insertion point.</li>
|
||||
<li>choose the <b>Picture</b> option from the menu - the content control will be inserted at the insertion point.</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Insert image icon" src="../images/image_settings_icon.png" /> image icon in the button above the content control border - a standard file selection window will open. Choose an image stored on your computer and click <b>Open</b>.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>The selected image will be displayed within the content control. To replace the image, click the <img alt="Insert image icon" src="../images/image_settings_icon.png" /> image icon in the button above the content control border and select another image.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="New picture content control" src="../images/picturecontentcontrol.png" /></p>
|
||||
<h5>Create a new Combo box or Drop-down list content control</h5>
|
||||
<p>The <em>Combo box</em> and <em>Drop-down list</em> content controls contain a drop-down list with a set of choices. They can be created in nearly the same way. The main difference between them is that the selected value in the drop-down list cannot be edited, while the selected value in the combo box can be replaced with your own one.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <em>Combo box</em> and <em>Drop-down list</em> content controls contain a drop-down list with a set of choices. They can be created amost in the same way. The main difference between them is that the selected value in the drop-down list cannot be edited, while the selected value in the combo box can be replaced.</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added.</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li>click the arrow next to the <img alt="Content Controls icon" src="../images/insertccicon.png" /> <b>Content Controls</b> icon.</li>
|
||||
<li>choose the <b>Combo box</b> or <b>Drop-down list</b> option from the menu - the control will be inserted at the insertion point.</li>
|
||||
<li>right-click the added control and choose the <b>Content control settings</b> option from the contextual menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>in the the <b>Content Control Settings</b> window that opens switch to the <b>Combo box</b> or <b>Drop-down list</b> tab, depending on the selected content control type.
|
||||
<li>in the the opened <b>Content Control Settings</b> window, switch to the <b>Combo box</b> or <b>Drop-down list</b> tab, depending on the selected content control type.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Combo box settings window" src="../images/comboboxsettings.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
to add a new list item, click the <b>Add</b> button and fill in the available fields in the window that opens:
|
||||
to add a new list item, click the <b>Add</b> button and fill in the available fields in the the opened window:
|
||||
<p><img alt="Combo box - adding value" src="../images/comboboxaddvalue.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>specify the necessary text in the <b>Display name</b> field, e.g. <em>Yes</em>, <em>No</em>, <em>Other</em>. This text will be displayed in the content control within the document.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -79,17 +79,17 @@
|
|||
<li>when all the necessary choices are set, click the <b>OK</b> button to save the settings and close the window.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p><img alt="New combo box content control" src="../images/comboboxcontentcontrol.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added <b>Combo box</b> or <b>Drop-down list</b> content control to open the item list and choose the necessary one. Once the necessary item is selected from the <b>Combo box</b>, you can edit the displayed text replacing it with your own one entirely or partially. The <b>Drop-down list</b> does not allow to edit the selected item.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added <b>Combo box</b> or <b>Drop-down list</b> content control to open the item list and choose the necessary one. Once the necessary item is selected from the <b>Combo box</b>, you can edit the displayed text by replacing it with your text entirely or partially. The <b>Drop-down list</b> does not allow editing the selected item.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Combo box content control" src="../images/comboboxcontentcontrol2.png" /></p>
|
||||
<h5>Create a new Date content control</h5>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added.</li>
|
||||
<li>position the insertion point within the text where content control should be added.</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li>click the arrow next to the <img alt="Content Controls icon" src="../images/insertccicon.png" /> <b>Content Controls</b> icon.</li>
|
||||
<li>choose the <b>Date</b> option from the menu - the control with the current date will be inserted at the insertion point.</li>
|
||||
<li>right-click the added control and choose the <b>Content control settings</b> option from the contextual menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>choose the <b>Date</b> option from the menu - the content control with the current date will be inserted at the insertion point.</li>
|
||||
<li>right-click the added content control and choose the <b>Content control settings</b> option from the contextual menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
in the the <b>Content Control Settings</b> window that opens switch to the <b>Date format</b> tab.
|
||||
in the opened <b>Content Control Settings</b> window, switch to the <b>Date format</b> tab.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Date settings window" src="../images/datesettings.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>choose the necessary <b>Language</b> and select the necessary date format in the <b>Display the date like this</b> list.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -100,16 +100,16 @@
|
|||
<p><img alt="Date content control" src="../images/datecontentcontrol2.png" /></p>
|
||||
<h5>Create a new Check box content control</h5>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added.</li>
|
||||
<li>position the insertion point within the text line where the content control should be added.</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li>click the arrow next to the <img alt="Content Controls icon" src="../images/insertccicon.png" /> <b>Content Controls</b> icon.</li>
|
||||
<li>choose the <b>Check box</b> option from the menu - the control will be inserted at the insertion point.</li>
|
||||
<li>right-click the added control and choose the <b>Content control settings</b> option from the contextual menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>choose the <b>Check box</b> option from the menu - the content control will be inserted at the insertion point.</li>
|
||||
<li>right-click the added content control and choose the <b>Content control settings</b> option from the contextual menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
in the the <b>Content Control Settings</b> window that opens switch to the <b>Check box</b> tab.
|
||||
in the opened <b>Content Control Settings</b> window, switch to the <b>Check box</b> tab.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Check box settings window" src="../images/checkboxsettings.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Checked symbol</b> button to specify the necessary symbol for the selected check box or the <b>Unchecked symbol</b> to select how the cleared check box should look like. The <b>Symbol</b> window will open. To learn more on how to work with symbols, you can refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this article</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Checked symbol</b> button to specify the necessary symbol for the selected check box or the <b>Unchecked symbol</b> to select how the cleared check box should look like. The <b>Symbol</b> window will open. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this article</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li>when the symbols are specified, click the <b>OK</b> button to save the settings and close the window.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>The added check box is displayed in the unchecked mode.</p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -117,49 +117,49 @@
|
|||
<p>If you click the added check box it will be checked with the symbol selected in the <b>Checked symbol</b> list.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Check box content control" src="../images/checkboxcontentcontrol2.png" /></p>
|
||||
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: The content control border is visible when the control is selected only. The borders do not appear on a printed version.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: The content control border is only visible when the control is selected. The borders do not appear on a printed version.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h3>Moving content controls</h3>
|
||||
<p>Controls can be <b>moved</b> to another place in the document: click the button to the left of the control border to select the control and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the document text.</p>
|
||||
<p>Content controls can be moved to another place in the document: click the button on the left of the control border to select the control and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the text.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Moving content control" src="../images/movecontentcontrol.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>You can also <b>copy and paste</b> content controls: select the necessary control and use the <b>Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V</b> key combinations.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h3>Editing plain text and rich text content controls</h3>
|
||||
<p>Text within the plain text and rich text content controls can be formatted using the icons on the top toolbar: you can adjust the <a href="../UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">font type, size, color</a>, apply <a href="../UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">decoration styles</a> and <a href="../UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">formatting presets</a>. It's also possible to use the <b>Paragraph - Advanced settings</b> window accessible from the contextual menu or from the right sidebar to change the text properties. Text within rich text content controls can be formatted like a regular text of the document, i.e. you can set <a href="../UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">line spacing</a>, change <a href="../UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">paragraph indents</a>, adjust <a href="../UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">tab stops</a>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Text within plain text and rich text content controls can be formatted by using the icons on the top toolbar: you can adjust the <a href="../UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">font type, size, color</a>, apply <a href="../UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">decoration styles</a> and <a href="../UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">formatting presets</a>. It's also possible to use the <b>Paragraph - Advanced settings</b> window accessible from the contextual menu or from the right sidebar to change the text properties. Text within rich text content controls can be formatted like a regular text, i.e. you can set <a href="../UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">line spacing</a>, change <a href="../UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">paragraph indents</a>, adjust <a href="../UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">tab stops</a>, etc.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h3>Changing content control settings</h3>
|
||||
<p>No matter which type of content controls is selected, you can change the content control settings in the <b>General</b> and <b>Locking</b> sections of the <b>Content Control Settings</b> window.</p>
|
||||
<p>To open the content control settings, you can proceed in the following ways:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>Select the necessary content control, click the arrow next to the <img alt="Content Controls icon" src="../images/insertccicon.png" /> <b>Content Controls</b> icon at the top toolbar and select the <b>Control Settings</b> option from the menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>Select the necessary content control, click the arrow next to the <img alt="Content Controls icon" src="../images/insertccicon.png" /> <b>Content Controls</b> icon on the top toolbar and select the <b>Control Settings</b> option from the menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>Right-click anywhere within the content control and use the <b>Content control settings</b> option from the contextual menu.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>A new window will open. At the <b>General</b> tab, you can adjust the following settings:</p>
|
||||
<p>A new window will open. Ot the <b>General</b> tab, you can adjust the following settings:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Content Control settings window - General" src="../images/ccsettingswindow.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>Specify the content control <b>Title</b> or <b>Tag</b> in the corresponding fields. The title will be displayed when the control is selected in the document. Tags are used to identify content controls so that you can make reference to them in your code. </li>
|
||||
<li>Choose if you want to display the content control with a <b>Bounding box</b> or not. Use the <b>None</b> option to display the control without the bounding box. If you select the <b>Bounding box</b> option, you can choose this box <b>Color</b> using the field below. Click the <b>Apply to All</b> button to apply the specified <b>Appearance</b> settings to all the content controls in the document.</li>
|
||||
<li>Specify the content control <b>Title</b>, <b>Placeholder</b>, or <b>Tag</b> in the corresponding fields. The title will be displayed when the control is selected. The placeholder is the main text displayed within the content control element. Tags are used to identify content controls so that you can make a reference to them in your code. </li>
|
||||
<li>Choose if you want to display the content control with a <b>Bounding box</b> or not. Use the <b>None</b> option to display the control without the bounding box. If you select the <b>Bounding box</b> option, you can choose the <b>Color</b> of this box using the field below. Click the <b>Apply to All</b> button to apply the specified <b>Appearance</b> settings to all the content controls in the document.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>At the <b>Locking</b> tab, you can protect the content control from being deleted or edited using the following settings:</p>
|
||||
<p>On the <b>Locking</b> tab, you can protect the content control from being deleted or edited using the following settings:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Content Control settings window - Locking" src="../images/ccsettingswindow2.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Content control cannot be deleted</b> - check this box to protect the content control from being deleted.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Contents cannot be edited</b> - check this box to protect the contents of the content control from being edited.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>For certain types of content controls, the third tab is also available that contains the settings specific for the selected content control type only: <em>Combo box</em>, <em>Drop-down list</em>, <em>Date</em>, <em>Check box</em>. These settings are described above in the sections about adding the corresponding content controls.</p>
|
||||
<p>For certain types of content controls, the third tab that contains the specific settings for the selected content control type is also available: <em>Combo box</em>, <em>Drop-down list</em>, <em>Date</em>, <em>Check box</em>. These settings are described above in the sections about adding the corresponding content controls.</p>
|
||||
<p>Click the <b>OK</b> button within the settings window to apply the changes.</p>
|
||||
<p>It's also possible to highlight content controls with a certain color. To highlight controls with a color:</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>Click the button to the left of the control border to select the control,</li>
|
||||
<li>Click the arrow next to the <img alt="Content Controls icon" src="../images/insertccicon.png" /> <b>Content Controls</b> icon at the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>Click the button on the left of the control border to select the control,</li>
|
||||
<li>Click the arrow next to the <img alt="Content Controls icon" src="../images/insertccicon.png" /> <b>Content Controls</b> icon on the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>Select the <b>Highlight Settings</b> option from the menu,</li>
|
||||
<li>Select the necessary color on the available palettes: <b>Theme Colors</b>, <b>Standard Colors</b> or specify a new <b>Custom Color</b>. To remove previously applied color highlighting, use the <b>No highlighting</b> option.</li>
|
||||
<li>Choose the required color from the available palettes: <b>Theme Colors</b>, <b>Standard Colors</b> or specify a new <b>Custom Color</b>. To remove previously applied color highlighting, use the <b>No highlighting</b> option.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>The selected highlight options will be applied to all the content controls in the document.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Removing content controls</h3>
|
||||
<p>To remove a control and leave all its contents, click the content control to select it, then proceed in one of the following ways:</p>
|
||||
<p>To remove a content control and leave all its contents, select a content control, then proceed in one of the following ways:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>Click the arrow next to the <img alt="Content Controls icon" src="../images/insertccicon.png" /> <b>Content Controls</b> icon at the top toolbar and select the <b>Remove content control</b> option from the menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>Click the arrow next to the <img alt="Content Controls icon" src="../images/insertccicon.png" /> <b>Content Controls</b> icon on the top toolbar and select the <b>Remove content control</b> option from the menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>Right-click the content control and use the <b>Remove content control</b> option from the contextual menu.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>To remove a control and all its contents, select the necessary control and press the <b>Delete</b> key on the keyboard.</p>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
|
|||
<!DOCTYPE html>
|
||||
<html>
|
||||
<head>
|
||||
<title>Insert date and time</title>
|
||||
<meta charset="utf-8" />
|
||||
<meta name="description" content="Insert date and time into your document" />
|
||||
<link type="text/css" rel="stylesheet" href="../editor.css" />
|
||||
<script type="text/javascript" src="../callback.js"></script>
|
||||
<script type="text/javascript" src="../search/js/page-search.js"></script>
|
||||
</head>
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
<div class="mainpart">
|
||||
<div class="search-field">
|
||||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Insert date and time</h1>
|
||||
<p>To isnert <b>Date and time</b> into your document,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>put the cursor where you want to insert <b>Date and time</b>,</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Date & time</b> <img alt="Date and time icon" src="../images/date_time_icon.png" /> icon on the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
in the <b>Date & time</b> window that will appear, specify the following parameters:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>Select the required language.</li>
|
||||
<li>Select one of the suggested formats.</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
Check the <b>Update automatically</b> checkbox to let the date & time update automatically based on the current state.
|
||||
<p class="note">
|
||||
<b>Note</b>: you can also update the date and time manually by using the <b>Refresh field</b> option from the contextual menu.
|
||||
</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>Click the <b>Set as default</b> button to make the current format the default for this language.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>Click the <b>OK</b> button.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Date and time window" src="../images/date_time.png" /></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</html>
|
||||
|
|
@ -14,12 +14,12 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Insert a drop cap</h1>
|
||||
<p>A <b>Drop cap</b> is the first letter of a paragraph that is much larger than others and takes up several lines in height.</p>
|
||||
<p>A <b>drop cap</b> is a large capital letter used at the beginning of a paragraph or section. The size of a drop cap is usually several lines.</p>
|
||||
<p>To add a drop cap,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>put the cursor within the paragraph you need,</li>
|
||||
<li>place the cursor within the required paragraph,</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Drop Cap icon" src="../images/insert_dropcap_icon.png" /> <b>Drop Cap</b> icon at the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Drop Cap icon" src="../images/insert_dropcap_icon.png" /> <b>Drop Cap</b> icon on the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>in the opened drop-down list select the option you need:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>In Text</b> <img alt="Insert Drop Cap - In Text" src="../images/dropcap_text.png" /> - to place the drop cap within the paragraph.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -28,40 +28,40 @@
|
|||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p><img class="floatleft" alt="Drop Cap example" src="../images/dropcap_example.png" />The first character of the selected paragraph will be transformed into a drop cap. If you need the drop cap to include some more characters, add them manually: select the drop cap and type in other letters you need.</p>
|
||||
<p>To adjust the drop cap appearance (i.e. font size, type, decoration style or color), select the letter and use the corresponding icons at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
|
||||
<p>To adjust the drop cap appearance (i.e. font size, type, decoration style or color), select the letter and use the corresponding icons on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
|
||||
<p>When the drop cap is selected, it's surrounded by a <b>frame</b> (a container used to position the drop cap on the page). You can quickly change the frame size dragging its borders or change its position using the <img alt="Arrow" src="../images/arrow.png" /> icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the frame.</p>
|
||||
<p>To delete the added drop cap, select it, click the <img alt="Drop Cap icon" src="../images/insert_dropcap_icon.png" /> <b>Drop Cap</b> icon at the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar and choose the <b>None</b> <img alt="Insert Drop Cap - None" src="../images/dropcap_none.png" /> option from the drop-down list.</p>
|
||||
<p>To delete the added drop cap, select it, click the <img alt="Drop Cap icon" src="../images/insert_dropcap_icon.png" /> <b>Drop Cap</b> icon on the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar and choose the <b>None</b> <img alt="Insert Drop Cap - None" src="../images/dropcap_none.png" /> option from the drop-down list.</p>
|
||||
<hr />
|
||||
<p>To adjust the added drop cap parameters, select it, click the <img alt="Drop Cap icon" src="../images/insert_dropcap_icon.png" /> <b>Drop Cap</b> icon at the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar and choose the <b>Drop Cap Settings</b> option from the drop-down list. The <b>Drop Cap - Advanced Settings</b> window will open:</p>
|
||||
<p>To adjust the added drop cap parameters, select it, click the <img alt="Drop Cap icon" src="../images/insert_dropcap_icon.png" /> <b>Drop Cap</b> icon at the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar and choose the <b>Drop Cap Settings</b> option from the drop-down list. The <b>Drop Cap - Advanced Settings</b> window will appear:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Drop Cap - Advanced Settings" src="../images/dropcap_properties_1.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Drop Cap</b> tab allows to set the following parameters:</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Drop Cap</b> tab allows adjusting the following parameters:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Position</b> - is used to change the drop cap placement. Select the <b>In Text</b> or <b>In Margin</b> option, or click <b>None</b> to delete the drop cap.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Font</b> - is used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available ones.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Height in rows</b> - is used to specify how many lines the drop cap should span. It's possible to select a value from 1 to 10.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Distance from text</b> - is used to specify the amount of space between the text of the paragraph and the right border of the frame that surrounds the drop cap.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Position</b> is used to change the placement of a drop cap. Select the <b>In Text</b> or <b>In Margin</b> option, or click <b>None</b> to delete the drop cap.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Font</b> is used to select a font from the list of the available fonts.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Height in rows</b> is used to define how many lines a drop cap should span. It's possible to select a value from 1 to 10.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Distance from text</b> is used to specify the amount of spacing between the text of the paragraph and the right border of the drop cap frame.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Drop Cap - Advanced Settings" src="../images/dropcap_properties_2.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Borders & Fill</b> tab allows to add a border around the drop cap and adjust its parameters. They are the following:</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Borders & Fill</b> tab allows adding a border around a drop cap and adjusting its parameters. They are the following:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Border</b> parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the borders (top, bottom, left, right or their combination) you want to apply these settings to.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Background color</b> - choose the color for the drop cap background.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Drop Cap - Advanced Settings" src="../images/dropcap_properties_3.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Margins</b> tab allows to set the distance between the drop cap and the <b>Top</b>, <b>Bottom</b>, <b>Left</b> and <b>Right</b> borders around it (if the borders have previously been added).</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Margins</b> tab allows setting the distance between the drop cap and the <b>Top</b>, <b>Bottom</b>, <b>Left</b> and <b>Right</b> borders around it (if the borders have previously been added).</p>
|
||||
<hr />
|
||||
<p>Once the drop cap is added you can also change the <b>Frame</b> parameters. To access them, right click within the frame and select the <b>Frame Advanced Settings</b> from the menu. The <b>Frame - Advanced Settings</b> window will open:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Frame - Advanced Settings" src="../images/frame_properties_1.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Frame</b> tab allows to set the following parameters:</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Frame</b> tab allows adjusting the following parameters:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Position</b> - is used to select the <b>Inline</b> or <b>Flow</b> wrapping style. Or you can click <b>None</b> to delete the frame.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Width</b> and <b>Height</b> - are used to change the frame dimensions. The <b>Auto</b> option allows to automatically adjust the frame size to fit the drop cap in it. The <b>Exactly</b> option allows to specify fixed values. The <b>At least</b> option is used to set the minimum height value (if you change the drop cap size, the frame height changes accordingly, but it cannot be less than the specified value).</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Horizontal</b> parameters are used either to set the frame exact <b>position</b> in the selected units of measurement <b>relative to</b> a margin, page or column, or to align the frame (left, center or right) <b>relative to</b> one of these reference points. You can also set the horizontal <b>Distance from text</b> i.e. the amount of space between the vertical frame borders and the text of the paragraph.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Vertical</b> parameters are used either to set the frame exact <b>position</b> in the selected units of measurement <b>relative to</b> a margin, page or paragraph, or to align the frame (top, center or bottom) <b>relative to</b> one of these reference points. You can also set the vertical <b>Distance from text</b> i.e. the amount of space between the horizontal frame borders and the text of the paragraph.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Move with text</b> - controls whether the frame moves as the paragraph to which it is anchored moves.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Position</b> is used to select the <b>Inline</b> or <b>Flow</b> wrapping style. You can also click <b>None</b> to delete the frame.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Width</b> and <b>Height</b> are used to change the frame dimensions. The <b>Auto</b> option allows automatically adjusting the frame size to fit the drop cap. The <b>Exactly</b> option allows specifying fixed values. The <b>At least</b> option is used to set the minimum height value (if you change the drop cap size, the frame height changes accordingly, but it cannot be less than the specified value).</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Horizontal</b> parameters are used either to set the exact <b>position</b> of the frame in the selected units of measurement with respect to a margin, page or column, or to align the frame (left, center or right) with respect to one of these reference points. You can also set the horizontal <b>Distance from text</b> i.e. the amount of space between the vertical frame borders and the text of the paragraph.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Vertical parameters</b> are used either to set the exact <b>position</b> of the frame is the selected units of measurement with respect to a margin, page or paragraph, or to align the frame (top, center or bottom) with respect to one of these reference points. You can also set the vertical <b>Distance from text</b> i.e. the amount of space between the horizontal frame borders and the text of the paragraph.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Move with text</b> is used to make sure that the frame moves as the paragraph to which it is anchored.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<!--<img alt="Frame - Advanced Settings" src="../images/Frame_properties_2.png" />-->
|
||||
<p>The <b>Borders & Fill</b> and <b>Margins</b> tabs allow to set just the same parameters as at the tabs of the same name in the <b>Drop Cap - Advanced Settings</b> window.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Borders & Fill</b> and <b>Margins</b> allow adjusting the same parameters as the corresponding tabs in the <b>Drop Cap - Advanced Settings</b> window.</p>
|
||||
<!--<img alt="Frame - Advanced Settings" src="../images/Frame_properties_3.png" />
|
||||
<p>The <b>Margins</b> tab allows to set just the same parameters as at the tab of the same name in the <b>Drop Cap - Advanced Settings</b> window.</p>-->
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,29 +14,29 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Insert equations</h1>
|
||||
<p><b>Document Editor</b> allows you to build equations using the built-in templates, edit them, insert special characters (including mathematical operators, Greek letters, accents etc.).</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Document Editor</b> allows you to build equations using the built-in templates, edit them, insert special characters (including mathematical operators, Greek letters, accents, etc.).</p>
|
||||
<h3>Add a new equation</h3>
|
||||
<p>To insert an equation from the gallery,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>put the cursor within the necessary line ,</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the arrow next to the <img alt="Equation icon" src="../images/insertequationicon.png" /> <b>Equation</b> icon at the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the arrow next to the <img alt="Equation icon" src="../images/insertequationicon.png" /> <b>Equation</b> icon on the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>in the opened drop-down list select the equation category you need. The following categories are currently available: <em>Symbols</em>, <em>Fractions</em>, <em>Scripts</em>, <em>Radicals</em>, <em>Integrals</em>, <em>Large Operators</em>, <em>Brackets</em>, <em>Functions</em>, <em>Accents</em>, <em>Limits and Logarithms</em>, <em>Operators</em>, <em>Matrices</em>,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the certain symbol/equation in the corresponding set of templates.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>The selected symbol/equation box will be inserted at the cursor position. If the selected line is empty, the equation will be centered. To align such an equation left or right, click on the equation box and use the <img alt="Align Left icon" src="../images/alignleft.png" /> or <img alt="Align Right icon" src="../images/alignright.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
|
||||
<p>The selected symbol/equation box will be inserted at the cursor position. If the selected line is empty, the equation will be centered. To align such an equation to the left or to the right, click on the equation box and use the <img alt="Align Left icon" src="../images/alignleft.png" /> or <img alt="Align Right icon" src="../images/alignright.png" /> icon on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
|
||||
<img alt="Inserted Equation" src="../images/insertedequation.png" />
|
||||
<p>Each equation template represents a set of slots. Slot is a position for each element that makes up the equation. An empty slot (also called as a placeholder) has a dotted outline <img alt="Equation Placeholder" src="../images/equationplaceholder.png" />. You need to fill in all the placeholders specifying the necessary values.</p>
|
||||
<p>Each equation template represents a set of slots. A slot is a position for each element that makes up the equation. An empty slot (also called as a placeholder) has a dotted outline <img alt="Equation Placeholder" src="../images/equationplaceholder.png" />. You need to fill in all the placeholders specifying the necessary values.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: to start creating an equation, you can also use the <b>Alt + =</b> keyboard shortcut.</p>
|
||||
<p>It's also possible to add a caption to the equation. To learn more on how to work with captions for equations, you can refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this article</a>.</p>
|
||||
<p>It's also possible to add a caption to the equation. To learn more on how to work with captions for equations, please refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this article</a>.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Enter values</h3>
|
||||
<p>The <b>insertion point</b> specifies where the next character you enter will appear. To position the insertion point precisely, click within a placeholder and use the keyboard arrows to move the insertion point by one character left/right or one line up/down.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>insertion point</b> specifies where the next character will appear. To position the insertion point precisely, click within the placeholder and use the keyboard arrows to move the insertion point by one character left/right or one line up/down.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you need to create a new placeholder below the slot with the insertion point within the selected template, press <b>Enter</b>.</p>
|
||||
<img alt="Edited Equation" src="../images/newslot.png" />
|
||||
<p>Once the insertion point is positioned, you can fill in the placeholder:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>enter the desired numeric/literal value using the keyboard,</li>
|
||||
<li>insert a special character using the <b>Symbols</b> palette from the <img alt="Equation icon" src="../images/insertequationicon.png" /> <b>Equation</b> menu at the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>insert a special character using the <b>Symbols</b> palette from the <img alt="Equation icon" src="../images/insertequationicon.png" /> <b>Equation</b> menu on the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar or typing them from the keyboard (see the <a href="../UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)"><b>Math AutoСorrect</b></a> option description),</li>
|
||||
<li>add another equation template from the palette to create a complex nested equation. The size of the primary equation will be automatically adjusted to fit its content. The size of the nested equation elements depends on the primary equation placeholder size, but it cannot be smaller than the sub-subscript size.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -49,18 +49,18 @@
|
|||
</ul>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: currently, equations cannot be entered using the linear format, i.e. <b>\sqrt(4&x^3)</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>When entering the values of the mathematical expressions, you do not need to use <b>Spacebar</b> as the spaces between the characters and signs of operations are set automatically.</p>
|
||||
<p>If the equation is too long and does not fit to a single line, automatic line breaking occurs as you type. You can also insert a line break in a specific position by right-clicking on a mathematical operator and selecting the <b>Insert manual break</b> option from the menu. The selected operator will start a new line. Once the manual line break is added, you can press the <b>Tab</b> key to align the new line to any math operator of the previous line. To delete the added manual line break, right-click on the mathematical operator that starts a new line and select the <b>Delete manual break</b> option.</p>
|
||||
<p>If the equation is too long and does not fit a single line, automatic line breaking occurs while typing. You can also insert a line break in a specific position by right-clicking on a mathematical operator and selecting the <b>Insert manual break</b> option from the menu. The selected operator will start a new line. Once the manual line break is added, you can press the <b>Tab</b> key to align the new line to any math operator of the previous line. To delete the added manual line break, right-click on the mathematical operator that starts a new line and select the <b>Delete manual break</b> option.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Format equations</h3>
|
||||
<p>To increase or decrease the equation <b>font size</b>, click anywhere within the equation box and use the <img alt="Increment font size" src="../images/larger.png" /> and <img alt="Decrement font size" src="../images/smaller.png" /> buttons at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar or select the necessary font size from the list. All the equation elements will change correspondingly.</p>
|
||||
<p>The letters within the equation are italicized by default. If necessary, you can change the <b>font style</b> (<em>bold, italic, strikeout</em>) or <b>color</b> for a whole equation or its part. The <em>underlined</em> style can be applied to the entire equation only, not to individual characters. Select the necessary part of the equation by clicking and dragging. The selected part will be highlighted blue. Then use the necessary buttons at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar to format the selection. For example, you can remove the italic format for ordinary words that are not variables or constants.</p>
|
||||
<p>To increase or decrease the equation <b>font size</b>, click anywhere within the equation box and use the <img alt="Increment font size" src="../images/larger.png" /> and <img alt="Decrement font size" src="../images/smaller.png" /> buttons on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar or select the necessary font size from the list. All the equation elements will change correspondingly.</p>
|
||||
<p>The letters within the equation are italicized by default. If necessary, you can change the <b>font style</b> (<em>bold, italic, strikeout</em>) or <b>color</b> for a whole equation or its part. The <em>underlined</em> style can be applied to the entire equation only, not to individual characters. Select the necessary part of the equation by clicking and dragging it. The selected part will be highlighted in blue. Then use the necessary buttons on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar to format the selected part. For example, you can remove the italic format for ordinary words that are not variables or constants.</p>
|
||||
<img alt="Edited Equation" src="../images/formatastext.png" />
|
||||
<p>To modify some equation elements you can also use the <b>right-click menu options</b>:</p>
|
||||
<p>To modify some equation elements, you can also use the <b>right-click menu options</b>:</p>
|
||||
<ul><li>To change the <em>Fractions</em> format, you can right-click on a fraction and select the <b>Change to skewed/linear/stacked fraction</b> option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected fraction type). <!--The <b>Remove/Add fraction bar</b> option is also available for stacked fractions.--></li>
|
||||
<li>To change the <em>Scripts</em> position relating to text, you can right-click on the equation that includes scripts and select the <b>Scripts before/after text</b> option from the menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>To change the argument size for <em>Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Limits and Logarithms, Operators</em> as well as for overbraces/underbraces and templates with grouping characters from the <em>Accents</em> group, you can right-click on the argument you want to change and select the <b>Increase/Decrease argument size</b> option from the menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>To specify whether an empty degree placeholder should be displayed or not for a <em>Radical</em>, you can right-click on the radical and select the <b>Hide/Show degree</b> option from the menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>To specify whether an empty limit placeholder should be displayed or not for an <em>Integral</em> or <em>Large Operator</em>, you can right-click on the equation and select the <b>Hide/Show top/bottom limit</b> option from the menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>To change the limits position relating to the integral or operator sign for <em>Integrals</em> or <em>Large Operators</em>, you can right-click on the equation and select the <b>Change limits location</b> option from the menu. The limits can be displayed to the right of the operator sign (as subscripts and superscripts) or directly above and below the operator sign.</li>
|
||||
<li>To change the limits position relating to the integral or operator sign for <em>Integrals</em> or <em>Large Operators</em>, you can right-click on the equation and select the <b>Change limits location</b> option from the menu. The limits can be displayed on the right of the operator sign (as subscripts and superscripts) or directly above and below the operator sign.</li>
|
||||
<li>To change the limits position relating to text for <em>Limits and Logarithms</em> and templates with grouping characters from the <em>Accents</em> group, you can right-click on the equation and select the <b>Limit over/under text</b> option from the menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>To choose which of the <em>Brackets</em> should be displayed, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the <b>Hide/Show opening/closing bracket</b> option from the menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>To control the <em>Brackets</em> size, you can right-click on the expression within them. The <b>Stretch brackets</b> option is selected by default so that the brackets can grow according to the expression within them, but you can deselect this option to prevent brackets from stretching. When this option is activated, you can also use the <b>Match brackets to argument height</b> option.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -75,11 +75,11 @@
|
|||
<li>To align elements within a <em>Matrix</em> column horizontally, you can right-click on a placeholder within the column, select the <b>Column Alignment</b> option from the menu, then select the alignment type: <b>Left</b>, <b>Center</b>, or <b>Right</b>.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<h3>Delete equation elements</h3>
|
||||
<p>To delete a part of the equation, select the part you want to delete by dragging the mouse or holding down the <b>Shift</b> key and using the arrow buttons, then press the <b>Delete</b> key on the keyboard.</p>
|
||||
<p>To delete a part of the equation, select it by dragging the mouse or holding down the <b>Shift</b> key and using the arrow buttons, then press the <b>Delete</b> key on the keyboard.</p>
|
||||
<p>A slot can only be deleted together with the template it belongs to.</p>
|
||||
<p>To delete the entire equation, select it completely by dragging the mouse or double-clicking on the equation box and press the <b>Delete</b> key on the keyboard.</p>
|
||||
<img alt="Delete Equation" src="../images/deleteequation.png" />
|
||||
<p>To delete some equation elements you can also use the <b>right-click menu options</b>:</p>
|
||||
<p>To delete some equation elements, you can also use the <b>right-click menu options</b>:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>To delete a <em>Radical</em>, you can right-click on it and select the <b>Delete radical</b> option from the menu.</li>
|
||||
<li>To delete a <em>Subscript</em> and/or <em>Superscript</em>, you can right-click on the expression that contains them and select the <b>Remove subscript/superscript</b> option from the menu. If the expression contains scripts that go before text, the <b>Remove scripts</b> option is available.</li>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,14 +14,14 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Insert footnotes</h1>
|
||||
<p>You can add footnotes to provide explanations or comments for certain sentences or terms used in your text, make references to the sources etc.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can insert footnotes to add explanations or comments for certain sentences or terms used in your text, make references to the sources, etc.</p>
|
||||
<p>To insert a footnote into your document,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>position the insertion point at the end of the text passage that you want to add a footnote to,</li>
|
||||
<li>position the insertion point at the end of the text passage that you want to add the footnote to,</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>References</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Footnote icon" src="../images/addfootnote.png" /> <b>Footnote</b> icon at the top toolbar, or<br/>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Footnote icon" src="../images/addfootnote.png" /> <b>Footnote</b> icon on the top toolbar, or<br/>
|
||||
click the arrow next to the <img alt="Footnote icon" src="../images/addfootnote.png" /> <b>Footnote</b> icon and select the <b>Insert Footnote</b> option from the menu,
|
||||
<p>The footnote mark (i.e. the superscript character that indicates a footnote) appears in the document text and the insertion point moves to the bottom of the current page.</p>
|
||||
<p>The footnote mark (i.e. the superscript character that indicates a footnote) appears in the text of the document, and the insertion point moves to the bottom of the current page.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>type in the footnote text.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
|
|
@ -29,17 +29,17 @@
|
|||
<p><img alt="Footnotes" src="../images/footnotesadded.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>If you hover the mouse pointer over the footnote mark in the document text, a small pop-up window with the footnote text appears.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Footnote text" src="../images/footnotetext.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>To easily navigate between the added footnotes within the document text,</p>
|
||||
<p>To easily navigate through the added footnotes in the text of the document,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>click the arrow next to the <img alt="Footnote icon" src="../images/addfootnote.png" /> <b>Footnote</b> icon at the <b>References</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the arrow next to the <img alt="Footnote icon" src="../images/addfootnote.png" /> <b>Footnote</b> icon on the <b>References</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>in the <b>Go to Footnotes</b> section, use the <img alt="Previous footnote icon" src="../images/previousfootnote.png" /> arrow to go to the previous footnote or the <img alt="Next footnote icon" src="../images/nextfootnote.png" /> arrow to go to the next footnote.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<hr />
|
||||
<p>To edit the footnotes settings,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>click the arrow next to the <img alt="Footnote icon" src="../images/addfootnote.png" /> <b>Footnote</b> icon at the <b>References</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the arrow next to the <img alt="Footnote icon" src="../images/addfootnote.png" /> <b>Footnote</b> icon on the <b>References</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>select the <b>Notes Settings</b> option from the menu,</li>
|
||||
<li>change the current parameters in the <b>Notes Settings</b> window that opens:
|
||||
<li>change the current parameters in the <b>Notes Settings</b> window that will appear:
|
||||
<p><img alt="Footnotes Settings window" src="../images/footnotes_settings.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>Set the <b>Location</b> of footnotes on the page selecting one of the available options:
|
||||
|
|
@ -55,26 +55,26 @@
|
|||
<li><b>Numbering</b> - select a way to number your footnotes:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Continuous</b> - to number footnotes sequentially throughout the document,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Restart each section</b> - to start footnote numbering with the number 1 (or some other specified character) at the beginning of each section,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Restart each page</b> - to start footnote numbering with the number 1 (or some other specified character) at the beginning of each page.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Restart each section</b> - to start footnote numbering with 1 (or another specified character) at the beginning of each section,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Restart each page</b> - to start footnote numbering with 1 (or another specified character) at the beginning of each page.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Custom Mark</b> - set a special character or a word you want to use as the footnote mark (e.g. * or Note1). Enter the necessary character/word into the text entry field and click the <b>Insert</b> button at the bottom of the <b>Notes Settings</b> window.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>Use the <b>Apply changes to</b> drop-down list to select if you want to apply the specified notes settings to the <b>Whole document</b> or the <b>Current section</b> only.
|
||||
<li>Use the <b>Apply changes to</b> drop-down list if you want to apply the specified notes settings to the <b>Whole document</b> or the <b>Current section</b> only.
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: to use different footnotes formatting in separate parts of the document, you need to add <a href="../UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">section breaks</a> first.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>When ready, click the <b>Apply</b> button.</li>
|
||||
<li>When you finish, click the <b>Apply</b> button.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
|
||||
<hr />
|
||||
<p>To remove a single footnote, position the insertion point directly before the footnote mark in the document text and press <b>Delete</b>. Other footnotes will be renumbered automatically.</p>
|
||||
<p>To remove a single footnote, position the insertion point directly before the footnote mark in the text and press <b>Delete</b>. Other footnotes will be renumbered automatically.</p>
|
||||
<p>To delete all the footnotes in the document,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>click the arrow next to the <img alt="Footnote icon" src="../images/addfootnote.png" /> <b>Footnote</b> icon at the <b>References</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the arrow next to the <img alt="Footnote icon" src="../images/addfootnote.png" /> <b>Footnote</b> icon on the <b>References</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>select the <b>Delete All Footnotes</b> option from the menu.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,20 +14,20 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Insert headers and footers</h1>
|
||||
<p>To add a header or footer to your document or edit the existing one,</p>
|
||||
<p>To add a new header or footer to your document or edit one that already exists,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Header/Footer icon" src="../images/headerfooter.png" /> <b>Header/Footer</b> icon at the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Header/Footer icon" src="../images/headerfooter.png" /> <b>Header/Footer</b> icon on the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>select one of the following options:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Edit Header</b> to insert or edit the header text.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Edit Footer</b> to insert or edit the footer text.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>change the current parameters for headers or footers at the right sidebar:
|
||||
<li>change the current parameters for headers or footers on the right sidebar:
|
||||
<p><img alt="Right Sidebar - Header and Footer Settings" src="../images/right_headerfooter.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>Set the <b>Position</b> of text relative to the top (for headers) or bottom (for footers) of the page.</li>
|
||||
<li>Set the <b>Position</b> of the text: to the top for headers or to the bottom for footers.</li>
|
||||
<li>Check the <b>Different first page</b> box to apply a different header or footer to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any header/ footer to it at all.</li>
|
||||
<li>Use the <b>Different odd and even pages</b> box to add different headers/footer for odd and even pages.</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Link to Previous</b> option is available in case you've previously added <a href="../UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">sections</a> into your document. If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). By default, this box is checked, so that the same headers/footers are applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the <b>Same as Previous</b> label. Uncheck the <b>Link to Previous</b> box to use different headers/footers for each section of the document. The <b>Same as Previous</b> label will no longer be displayed.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
|
|||
<p><img alt="Same as previous label" src="../images/sameasprevious_label.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>To enter a text or edit the already entered text and adjust the header or footer settings, you can also double-click within the upper or lower part of a page or click with the right mouse button there and select the only menu option - <b>Edit Header</b> or <b>Edit Footer</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>To enter a text or edit the already entered text and adjust the header or footer settings, you can also double-click anywhere on the top or bottom margin of your document or click with the right mouse button there and select the only menu option - <b>Edit Header</b> or <b>Edit Footer</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>To switch to the document body, double-click within the working area. The text you use as a header or footer will be displayed in gray.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: please refer to the <a href="InsertPageNumbers.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Insert page numbers</a> section to learn how to add page numbers to your document.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,27 +14,27 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Insert images</h1>
|
||||
<p>In Document Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your document. The following image formats are supported: <b>BMP</b>, <b>GIF</b>, <b>JPEG</b>, <b>JPG</b>, <b>PNG</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>In the Document Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your document. The following image formats are supported: <b>BMP</b>, <b>GIF</b>, <b>JPEG</b>, <b>JPG</b>, <b>PNG</b>.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Insert an image</h3>
|
||||
<p>To insert an image into the document text,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>place the cursor where you want the image to be put,</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Image icon" src="../images/image.png" /> <b>Image</b> icon at the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Image icon" src="../images/image.png" /> <b>Image</b> icon on the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>select one of the following options to load the image:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>the <b>Image from File</b> option will open the standard dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the <b>Open</b> button</li>
|
||||
<li>the <b>Image from URL</b> option will open the window where you can enter the necessary image web address and click the <b>OK</b> button</li>
|
||||
<li>the <b>Image from File</b> option will open a standard dialog window for to select a file. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the <b>Open</b> button</li>
|
||||
<li>the <b>Image from URL</b> option will open the window where you can enter the web address of the requiredimage, and click the <b>OK</b> button</li>
|
||||
<li class="onlineDocumentFeatures"> the <b>Image from Storage</b> option will open the <b>Select data source</b> window. Select an image stored on your portal and click the <b>OK</b> button</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>once the image is added you can change its size, properties, and position.</li>
|
||||
<li>once the image is added, you can change its size, properties, and position.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>It's also possible to add a caption to the image. To learn more on how to work with captions for images, you can refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this article</a>.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Move and resize images</h3>
|
||||
<p><img class="floatleft" alt="Moving image" src="../images/moving_image.png" />To change the image size, drag small squares <img alt="Square icon" src="../images/resize_square.png" /> situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected image while resizing, hold down the <b>Shift</b> key and drag one of the corner icons.</p>
|
||||
<p>To alter the image position, use the <img alt="Arrow" src="../images/arrow.png" /> icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the image. Drag the image to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button.</p>
|
||||
<p>When you move the image, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected).</p>
|
||||
<p>When you move the image, the guide lines are displayed to help you precisely position the object on the page (if the selected wrapping style is different from the inline).</p>
|
||||
<p>To rotate the image, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle <img alt="Rotation handle" src="../images/greencircle.png" /> and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the <b>Shift</b> key while rotating.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note">
|
||||
<b>Note</b>: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#workwithobjects" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">here</a>.
|
||||
|
|
@ -43,19 +43,19 @@
|
|||
<h3>Adjust image settings</h3>
|
||||
<p><img class="floatleft" alt="Image Settings tab" src="../images/right_image.png" />Some of the image settings can be altered using the <b>Image settings</b> tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the image and choose the <b>Image settings</b> <img alt="Image settings icon" src="../images/image_settings_icon.png" /> icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties:</p>
|
||||
<ul style="margin-left: 280px;">
|
||||
<li><b>Size</b> is used to view the current image <b>Width</b> and <b>Height</b>. If necessary, you can restore the actual image size clicking the <b>Actual Size</b> button. The <b>Fit to Margin</b> button allows to resize the image, so that it occupies all the space between the left and right page margin.
|
||||
<li><b>Size</b> is used to view the <b>Width</b> and <b>Height</b> of the current image. If necessary, you can restore the actual image size clicking the <b>Actual Size</b> button. The <b>Fit to Margin</b> button allows you to resize the image, so that it occupies all the space between the left and right page margin.
|
||||
<p>The <b>Crop</b> button is used to crop the image. Click the <b>Crop</b> button to activate cropping handles which appear on the image corners and in the center of each its side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the <img alt="Arrow" src="../images/arrow.png" /> icon and drag the area. </p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>To crop a single side, drag the handle located in the center of this side.</li>
|
||||
<li>To simultaneously crop two adjacent sides, drag one of the corner handles.</li>
|
||||
<li>To equally crop two opposite sides of the image, hold down the <em>Ctrl</em> key when dragging the handle in the center of one of these sides. </li>
|
||||
<li>To equally crop the two opposite sides of the image, hold down the <em>Ctrl</em> key when dragging the handle in the center of one of these sides. </li>
|
||||
<li>To equally crop all sides of the image, hold down the <em>Ctrl</em> key when dragging any of the corner handles.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>When the cropping area is specified, click the <b>Crop</b> button once again, or press the <em>Esc</em> key, or click anywhere outside of the cropping area to apply the changes.</p>
|
||||
<p>After the cropping area is selected, it's also possible to use the <b>Fill</b> and <b>Fit</b> options available from the <b>Crop</b> drop-down menu. Click the <b>Crop</b> button once again and select the option you need: </p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>If you select the <b>Fill</b> option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while other parts of the image will be removed.</li>
|
||||
<li>If you select the <b>Fit</b> option, the image will be resized so that it fits the cropping area height or width. No parts of the original image will be removed, but empty spaces may appear within the selected cropping area.</li>
|
||||
<li>If you select the <b>Fill</b> option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while the other parts of the image will be removed.</li>
|
||||
<li>If you select the <b>Fit</b> option, the image will be resized so that it fits the height and the width of the cropping area. No parts of the original image will be removed, but empty spaces may appear within the selected cropping area.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Rotation</b> is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons:
|
||||
|
|
@ -67,29 +67,29 @@
|
|||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Wrapping Style</b> is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below).</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Replace Image</b> is used to replace the current image loading another one <b>From File</b> or <b>From URL</b>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Replace Image</b> is used to replace the current image by loading another one <b>From File</b>, <b>From Storage</b>, or <b>From URL</b>.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>Some of these options you can also find in the <b>right-click menu</b>. The menu options are:</p>
|
||||
<p>You can also find some of these options in the <b>right-click menu</b>. The menu options are:</p>
|
||||
<ul style="margin-left: 280px;">
|
||||
<li><b>Cut, Copy, Paste</b> - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Arrange</b> is used to bring the selected image to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup images to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Align</b> is used to align the image left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Wrapping Style</b> is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The <b>Edit Wrap Boundary</b> option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. <img alt="Editing Wrap Boundary" src="../images/wrap_boundary.png" /></li>
|
||||
<li><b>Cut, Copy, Paste</b> - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Arrange</b> is used to bring the selected image to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup images to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Align</b> is used to align the image to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle or at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Wrapping Style</b> is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The <b>Edit Wrap Boundary</b> option is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. <img alt="Editing Wrap Boundary" src="../images/wrap_boundary.png" /></li>
|
||||
<li><b>Rotate</b> is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Crop</b> is used to apply one of the cropping options: <b>Crop</b>, <b>Fill</b> or <b>Fit</b>. Select the <b>Crop</b> option from the submenu, then drag the cropping handles to set the cropping area, and click one of these three options from the submenu once again to apply the changes.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Actual Size</b> is used to change the current image size to the actual one.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Replace image</b> is used to replace the current image loading another one <b>From File</b> or <b>From URL</b>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Replace image</b> is used to replace the current image by loading another one <b>From File</b> or <b>From URL</b>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Image Advanced Settings</b> is used to open the 'Image - Advanced Settings' window.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p><img class="floatleft" alt="Shape Settings tab" src="../images/right_image_shape.png" /> When the image is selected, the <b>Shape settings</b> <img alt="Shape settings icon" src="../images/shape_settings_icon.png" /> icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the <b>Shape settings</b> tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm#shape_stroke" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)"><b>Stroke</b></a> type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the <b>Change Autoshape</b> menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly.</p>
|
||||
<p>At the <b>Shape Settings</b> tab, you can also use the <b>Show shadow</b> option to add a shadow to the image.</p>
|
||||
<p><img class="floatleft" alt="Shape Settings tab" src="../images/right_image_shape.png" /> When the image is selected, the <b>Shape settings</b> <img alt="Shape settings icon" src="../images/shape_settings_icon.png" /> icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the <b>Shape settings</b> tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm#shape_stroke" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)"><b>Stroke</b></a> type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the <b>Change Autoshape</b> menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly.</p>
|
||||
<p>On the <b>Shape Settings</b> tab, you can also use the <b>Show shadow</b> option to add a shadow to the image.</p>
|
||||
<hr />
|
||||
<h3>Adjust image advanced settings</h3>
|
||||
<p>To change the image advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the <b>Image Advanced Settings</b> option from the right-click menu or just click the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link at the right sidebar. The image properties window will open:</p>
|
||||
<p>To change the image advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the <b>Image Advanced Settings</b> option from the right-click menu or just click the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link on the right sidebar. The image properties window will open:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Image - Advanced Settings: Size" src="../images/image_properties.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Size</b> tab contains the following parameters:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Width</b> and <b>Height</b> - use these options to change the image width and/or height. If the <b>Constant proportions</b> <img alt="Constant proportions icon" src="../images/constantproportions.png" /> button is clicked (in this case it looks like this <img alt="Constant proportions icon activated" src="../images/constantproportionsactivated.png" />), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the <b>Actual Size</b> button.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Width</b> and <b>Height</b> - use these options to change the width and/or height. If the <b>Constant proportions</b> <img alt="Constant proportions icon" src="../images/constantproportions.png" /> button is clicked (in this case it looks like this <img alt="Constant proportions icon activated" src="../images/constantproportionsactivated.png" />), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the <b>Actual Size</b> button.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Image - Advanced Settings: Rotation" src="../images/image_properties_4.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Rotation</b> tab contains the following parameters:</p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -122,7 +122,7 @@
|
|||
The <b>Horizontal</b> section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Alignment</b> (left, center, right) <b>relative to</b> character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,</li>
|
||||
<li>Absolute <b>Position</b> measured in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified at the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab) <b>to the right of</b> character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,</li>
|
||||
<li>Absolute <b>Position</b> measured in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified on the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab) <b>to the right of</b> character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Relative position</b> measured in percent <b>relative to</b> the left margin, margin, page or right margin.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -130,15 +130,15 @@
|
|||
The <b>Vertical</b> section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Alignment</b> (top, center, bottom) <b>relative to</b> line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,</li>
|
||||
<li>Absolute <b>Position</b> measured in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified at the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab) <b>below</b> line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,</li>
|
||||
<li>Absolute <b>Position</b> measured in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified on the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab) <b>below</b> line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Relative position</b> measured in percent <b>relative to</b> the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Move object with text</b> controls whether the image moves as the text to which it is anchored moves.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Allow overlap</b> controls whether two images overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Move object with text</b> ensures that the image moves along with the text to which it is anchored.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Allow overlap</b> makes is possible for two images to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Image - Advanced Settings" src="../images/image_properties_3.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Alternative Text</b> tab allows to specify a <b>Title</b> and <b>Description</b> which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Alternative Text</b> tab allows specifying a <b>Title</b> and <b>Description</b> which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the image contains.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</html>
|
||||
|
|
@ -17,11 +17,11 @@
|
|||
<p>To insert page numbers into your document,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Header/Footer</b> <img alt="Header/Footer icon" src="../images/headerfooter.png" /> icon at the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Header/Footer</b> <img alt="Header/Footer icon" src="../images/headerfooter.png" /> icon on the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>choose the <b>Insert Page Number</b> submenu,</li>
|
||||
<li>select one of the following options:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>To put a page number to each page of your document, select the page number position on the page.</li>
|
||||
<li>To add a page number to each page of your document, select the page number position on the page.</li>
|
||||
<li>To insert a page number at the current cursor position, select the <b>To Current Position</b> option.
|
||||
<p class="note">
|
||||
<b>Note</b>: to insert a current page number at the current cursor position you can also use the <em>Ctrl+Shift+P</em> key combination.
|
||||
|
|
@ -33,17 +33,17 @@
|
|||
<p>To insert the total number of pages in your document (e.g. if you want to create the <em>Page X of Y</em> entry):</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>put the cursor where you want to insert the total number of pages,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Header/Footer</b> <img alt="Header/Footer icon" src="../images/headerfooter.png" /> icon at the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Header/Footer</b> <img alt="Header/Footer icon" src="../images/headerfooter.png" /> icon on the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>select the <b>Insert number of pages</b> option.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<hr />
|
||||
<p>To edit the page number settings,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>double-click the page number added,</li>
|
||||
<li>change the current parameters at the right sidebar:
|
||||
<li>change the current parameters on the right sidebar:
|
||||
<p><img alt="Right Sidebar - Header and Footer Settings" src="../images/right_headerfooter.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>Set the <b>Position</b> of page numbers on the page as well as relative to the top and bottom of the page.</li>
|
||||
<li>Set the <b>Position</b> of page numbers on the page accordingly to the top and bottom of the page.</li>
|
||||
<li>Check the <b>Different first page</b> box to apply a different page number to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any number to it at all. </li>
|
||||
<li>Use the <b>Different odd and even pages</b> box to insert different page numbers for odd and even pages. </li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Link to Previous</b> option is available in case you've previously added <a href="../UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">sections</a> into your document.
|
||||
|
|
@ -51,9 +51,10 @@
|
|||
By default, this box is checked, so that unified numbering is applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the <b>Same as Previous</b> label.
|
||||
Uncheck the <b>Link to Previous</b> box to use different page numbering for each section of the document. The <b>Same as Previous</b> label will no longer be displayed.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Same as previous label" src="../images/sameasprevious_label.png" /></p></li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Page Numbering</b> section allows to adjust page numbering options across different <a href="../UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">sections</a> of the document.
|
||||
The <b>Continue from previous section</b> option is selected by default and allows to keep continuous page numbering after a section break.
|
||||
If you want to start page numbering with a specific number in the current section of the document, select the <b>Start at</b> radio button and enter the necessary starting value in the field on the right. </li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Page Numbering</b> section allows adjusting page numbering options throughout different <a href="../UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">sections</a> of the document.
|
||||
The <b>Continue from previous section</b> option is selected by default and makes it possible to keep continuous page numbering after a section break.
|
||||
If you want to start page numbering with a specific number in the current section of the document, select the <b>Start at</b> radio button and enter the required starting value in the field on the right.
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,32 +14,34 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Insert symbols and characters</h1>
|
||||
<p>During working process you may need to insert a symbol which is not on your keyboard. To insert such symbols into your document, use the <img alt="Symbol table icon" src="../images/vector.png" /><b>Insert symbol</b> option and follow these simple steps:</p>
|
||||
<p>To insert a special symbol which can not be typed on the keybord, use the <img alt="Symbol table icon" src="../images/vector.png" /> <b>Insert symbol</b> option and follow these simple steps:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>place the cursor at the location where a special symbol has to be inserted,</li>
|
||||
<li>place the cursor where a special symbol should be inserted,</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
click the <img alt="Symbol table icon" src="../images/vector.png" /> <b>Symbol</b>,
|
||||
<p><img alt="Insert symbol sidebar " src="../images/insert_symbol_window.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Symbol</b> dialog box appears from which you can select the appropriate symbol,</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Symbol</b> dialog box will appear, and you will be able to select the required symbol,</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<p>use the <b>Range</b> section to quickly find the nesessary symbol. All symbols are divided into specific groups, for example, select 'Currency Symbols' if you want to insert a currency character.</p>
|
||||
<p>If this character is not in the set, select a different font. Many of them also have characters other than the standard set.</p>
|
||||
<p>Or, enter the Unicode hex value of the symbol you want into the <b>Unicode hex value field</b>. This code can be found in the <b>Character map</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Previously used symbols are also displayed in the <b>Recently used symbols</b> field,</p>
|
||||
<p>If the required character is not in the set, select a different font. Many of them also have characters which differ from the standard set.</p>
|
||||
<p>Or enter the Unicode hex value of the required symbol you want into the <b>Unicode hex value field</b>. This code can be found in the <b>Character map</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can also use the <b>Special characters</b> tab to choose a special character from the list.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Insert symbol sidebar " src="../images/insert_symbol_window2.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The previously used symbols are also displayed in the <b>Recently used symbols</b> field,</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>click <b>Insert</b>. The selected character will be added to the document.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>Insert ASCII symbols</h2>
|
||||
<p>ASCII table is also used to add characters.</p>
|
||||
<p>To do this, hold down ALT key and use the numeric keypad to enter the character code.</p>
|
||||
<p>The ASCII table is also used to add characters.</p>
|
||||
<p>To do this, hold down the ALT key and use the numeric keypad to enter the character code.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: be sure to use the numeric keypad, not the numbers on the main keyboard. To enable the numeric keypad, press the Num Lock key.</p>
|
||||
<p>For example, to add a paragraph character (§), press and hold down ALT while typing 789, and then release ALT key.</p>
|
||||
<p>For example, to add a paragraph character (§), press and hold down ALT while typing 789, and then release the ALT key.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>Insert symbols using Unicode table</h2>
|
||||
<p>Additional charachters and symbols might also be found via Windows symbol table. To open this table, do one of the following:</p>
|
||||
<h2>Insert symbols using the Unicode table</h2>
|
||||
<p>Additional charachters and symbols can also be found in the Windows symbol table. To open this table, do of the following:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>in the Search field write 'Character table' and open it,</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -47,7 +49,7 @@
|
|||
<p><img alt="Insert symbol windpow" src="../images/insert_symbols_windows.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>In the opened <b>Character Map</b>, select one of the <b>Character sets</b>, <b>Groups</b> and <b>Fonts</b>. Next, click on the nesessary characters, copy them to clipboard and paste in the right place of the document.</p>
|
||||
<p>In the opened <b>Character Map</b>, select one of the <b>Character sets</b>, <b>Groups</b> and <b>Fonts</b>. Next, click on the required characters, copy them to the clipboard and paste where necessary.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</html>
|
||||
|
|
@ -17,9 +17,9 @@
|
|||
<h3>Insert a table</h3>
|
||||
<p>To insert a table into the document text,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>place the cursor where you want the table to be put,</li>
|
||||
<li>place the cursor where the table should be added,</li>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Table icon" src="../images/table.png" /> <b>Table</b> icon at the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Table icon" src="../images/table.png" /> <b>Table</b> icon on the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>select the option to create a table:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><p>either a table with predefined number of cells (10 by 8 cells maximum)</p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
|
|||
<p>To select a certain cell, move the mouse cursor to the left side of the necessary cell so that the cursor turns into the black arrow <img alt="Select cell" src="../images/selectcellpointer.png" />, then left-click.</p>
|
||||
<p>To select a certain row, move the mouse cursor to the left border of the table next to the necessary row so that the cursor turns into the horizontal black arrow <img alt="Select row" src="../images/selectrowpointer.png" />, then left-click.</p>
|
||||
<p>To select a certain column, move the mouse cursor to the top border of the necessary column so that the cursor turns into the downward black arrow <img alt="Select column" src="../images/selectcolumnpointer.png" />, then left-click.</p>
|
||||
<p>It's also possible to select a cell, row, column or table using options from the contextual menu or from the <b>Rows & Columns</b> section at the right sidebar.</p>
|
||||
<p>It's also possible to select a cell, row, column or table using options from the contextual menu or from the <b>Rows & Columns</b> section on the right sidebar.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note">
|
||||
<b>Note</b>: to move around in a table you can use <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#workwithtables" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">keyboard shortcuts</a>.
|
||||
</p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -52,20 +52,20 @@
|
|||
<h3>Adjust table settings</h3>
|
||||
<p>Some of the table properties as well as its structure can be altered using the right-click menu. The menu options are:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Cut, Copy, Paste</b> - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Cut, Copy, Paste</b> - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Select</b> is used to select a row, column, cell, or table.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Insert</b> is used to insert a row above or row below the row where the cursor is placed as well as to insert a column at the left or right side from the column where the cursor is placed.
|
||||
<p>It's also possible to insert several rows or columns. If you select the <b>Several Rows/Columns</b> option, the <b>Insert Several</b> window opens. Select the <b>Rows</b> or <b>Columns</b> option from the list, specify the number of rows/column you want to add, choose where they should be added: <b>Above the cursor</b> or <b>Below the cursor</b> and click <b>OK</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>It's also possible to insert several rows or columns. If you select the <b>Several Rows/Columns</b> option, the <b>Insert Several</b> window will appear. Select the <b>Rows</b> or <b>Columns</b> option from the list, specify the number of rows/column you want to add, choose where they should be added: <b>Above the cursor</b> or <b>Below the cursor</b> and click <b>OK</b>.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Delete</b> is used to delete a row, column, table or cells. If you select the <b>Cells</b> option, the <b>Delete Cells</b> window will open, where you can select if you want to <b>Shift cells left</b>, <b>Delete entire row</b>, or <b>Delete entire column</b>.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Merge Cells</b> is available if two or more cells are selected and is used to merge them.
|
||||
<p>
|
||||
It's also possible to merge cells by erasing a boundary between them using the eraser tool. To do this, click the <img alt="Table icon" src="../images/table.png" /> <b>Table</b> icon at the top toolbar, choose the <b>Erase Table</b> option. The mouse cursor will turn into the eraser <img alt="Mouse Cursor when erasing borders" src="../images/eraser_tool.png" />. Move the mouse cursor over the border between the cells you want to merge and erase it.
|
||||
It's also possible to merge cells by erasing a boundary between them using the eraser tool. To do this, click the <img alt="Table icon" src="../images/table.png" /> <b>Table</b> icon on the top toolbar, choose the <b>Erase Table</b> option. The mouse cursor will turn into the eraser <img alt="Mouse Cursor when erasing borders" src="../images/eraser_tool.png" />. Move the mouse cursor over the border between the cells you want to merge and erase it.
|
||||
</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Split Cell...</b> is used to open a window where you can select the needed number of columns and rows the cell will be split in.
|
||||
<p>
|
||||
It's also possible to split a cell by drawing rows or columns using the pencil tool. To do this, click the <img alt="Table icon" src="../images/table.png" /> <b>Table</b> icon at the top toolbar, choose the <b>Draw Table</b> option. The mouse cursor will turn into the pencil <img alt="Mouse Cursor when drawing a table" src="../images/pencil_tool.png" />. Draw a horizontal line to create a row or a vertical line to create a column.
|
||||
It's also possible to split a cell by drawing rows or columns using the pencil tool. To do this, click the <img alt="Table icon" src="../images/table.png" /> <b>Table</b> icon on the top toolbar, choose the <b>Draw Table</b> option. The mouse cursor will turn into the pencil <img alt="Mouse Cursor when drawing a table" src="../images/pencil_tool.png" />. Draw a horizontal line to create a row or a vertical line to create a column.
|
||||
</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Distribute rows</b> is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same height without changing the overall table height.</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -78,7 +78,7 @@
|
|||
</ul>
|
||||
<hr />
|
||||
<p><img class="floatleft"alt="Right Sidebar - Table Settings" src="../images/right_table.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>You can also change the table properties at the right sidebar:</p>
|
||||
<p>You can also change the table properties on the right sidebar:</p>
|
||||
<ul style="margin-left: 280px;">
|
||||
<li><p><b>Rows</b> and <b>Columns</b> are used to select the table parts that you want to be highlighted.</p>
|
||||
<p>For rows:</p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -104,45 +104,45 @@
|
|||
</ul>
|
||||
<hr />
|
||||
<h3>Adjust table advanced settings</h3>
|
||||
<p>To change the advanced table properties, click the table with the right mouse button and select the <b>Table Advanced Settings</b> option from the right-click menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link at the right sidebar. The table properties window will open:</p>
|
||||
<p>To change the advanced table properties, click the table with the right mouse button and select the <b>Table Advanced Settings</b> option from the right-click menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link on the right sidebar. The table properties window will open:</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Table - Advanced Settings" src="../images/table_properties_1.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Table</b> tab allows to change properties of the entire table.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Table</b> tab allows changing the properties of the entire table.</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Table Size</b> section contains the following parameters:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<b>Width</b> - by default, the table width is automatically adjusted to fit the page width, i.e. the table occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. You can check this box and specify the necessary table width manually.
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Measure in</b> - allows to specify if you want to set the table width in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified at the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab) or in <b>Percent</b> of the overall page width.
|
||||
<li><b>Measure in</b> allows specifying the table width in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified on the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab) or in <b>Percent</b> of the overall page width.
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: you can also adjust the table size manually changing the row height and column width. Move the mouse cursor over a row/column border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border. You can also use the <img alt="Table - Column Width Marker" src="../images/columnwidthmarker.png" /> markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width and the <img alt="Table - Row Height Marker" src="../images/rowheightmarker.png" /> markers on the vertical ruler to change the row height.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Automatically resize to fit contents</b> - enables automatic change of each column width in accordance with the text within its cells.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Automatically resize to fit contents</b> - allows automatically change the width of each column in accordance with the text within its cells.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Default Cell Margins</b> section allows to change the space between the text within the cells and the cell border used by default.</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Options</b> section allows to change the following parameter:
|
||||
<li>The <b>Default Cell Margins</b> section allows changing the space between the text within the cells and the cell border used by default.</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Options</b> section allows changing the following parameter:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Spacing between cells</b> - the cell spacing which will be filled with the <b>Table Background</b> color.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Table - Advanced Settings" src="../images/table_properties_5.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Cell</b> tab allows to change properties of individual cells. First you need to select the cell you want to apply the changes to or select the entire table to change properties of all its cells.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Cell</b> tab allows changing the properties of individual cells. First you need to select the required cell or select the entire table to change the properties of all its cells.</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
The <b>Cell Size</b> section contains the following parameters:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Preferred width</b> - allows to set a preferred cell width. This is the size that a cell strives to fit to, but in some cases it may not be possible to fit to this exact value. For example, if the text within a cell exceeds the specified width, it will be broken into the next line so that the preferred cell width remains unchanged, but if you insert a new column, the preferred width will be reduced.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Measure in</b> - allows to specify if you want to set the cell width in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified at the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab) or in <b>Percent</b> of the overall table width.
|
||||
<li><b>Preferred width</b> - allows setting the preferred cell width. This is the size that a cell strives to fit, but in some cases, it may not be possible to fit this exact value. For example, if the text within a cell exceeds the specified width, it will be broken into the next line so that the preferred cell width remains unchanged, but if you insert a new column, the preferred width will be reduced.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Measure in</b> - allows specifying the cell width in absolute units i.e. <b>Centimeters</b>/<b>Points</b>/<b>Inches</b> (depending on the option specified on the <b>File</b> -> <b>Advanced Settings...</b> tab) or in <b>Percent</b> of the overall table width.
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: you can also adjust the cell width manually. To make a single cell in a column wider or narrower than the overall column width, select the necessary cell and move the mouse cursor over its right border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow, then drag the border. To change the width of all the cells in a column, use the <img alt="Table - Column Width Marker" src="../images/columnwidthmarker.png" /> markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Cell Margins</b> section allows to adjust the space between the text within the cells and the cell border. By default, standard values are used (the default values can also be altered at the <b>Table</b> tab), but you can uncheck the <b>Use default margins</b> box and enter the necessary values manually.</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Cell Margins</b> allows adjusting the space between the text within the cells and the cell border. By default, the standard values are used (the default, these values can also be altered on the <b>Table</b> tab), but you can uncheck the <b>Use default margins</b> box and enter the necessary values manually.</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
The <b>Cell Options</b> section allows to change the following parameter:
|
||||
The <b>Cell Options</b> section allows changing the following parameter:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Wrap text</b> option is enabled by default. It allows to wrap text within a cell that exceeds its width onto the next line expanding the row height and keeping the column width unchanged.</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Wrap text</b> option is enabled by default. It allows wrapping the text within a cell that exceeds its width onto the next line expanding the row height and keeping the column width unchanged.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
|
|
@ -152,21 +152,21 @@
|
|||
<li>
|
||||
<b>Border</b> parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the way it will be displayed in the cells.
|
||||
<p class="note">
|
||||
<b>Note</b>: in case you select not to show table borders clicking the <img alt="No borders" src="../images/noborders.png" /> button or deselecting all the borders manually on the diagram, they will be indicated by a dotted line in the document.
|
||||
To make them disappear at all, click the <b>Nonprinting characters</b> <img alt="Nonprinting characters" src="../images/nonprintingcharacters.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the <b>Hidden Table Borders</b> option.
|
||||
<b>Note</b>: in case you choose not to show the table borders by clicking the <img alt="No borders" src="../images/noborders.png" /> button or deselecting all the borders manually on the diagram, they will be indicated with a dotted line in the document.
|
||||
To make them disappear at all, click the <b>Nonprinting characters</b> <img alt="Nonprinting characters" src="../images/nonprintingcharacters.png" /> icon on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the <b>Hidden Table Borders</b> option.
|
||||
</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Cell Background</b> - the color for the background within the cells (available only if one or more cells are selected or the <b>Allow spacing between cells</b> option is selected at the <b>Table</b> tab).</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Table Background</b> - the color for the table background or the space background between the cells in case the <b>Allow spacing between cells</b> option is selected at the <b>Table</b> tab.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Table Background</b> - the color for the table background or the space background between the cells in case the <b>Allow spacing between cells</b> option is selected on the <b>Table</b> tab.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p id="position"><img alt="Table - Advanced Settings" src="../images/table_properties_4.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Table Position</b> tab is available only if the <b>Flow table</b> option at the <b>Text Wrapping</b> tab is selected and contains the following parameters:</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Table Position</b> tab is available only if the <b>Flow table</b> option on the <b>Text Wrapping</b> tab is selected and contains the following parameters:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Horizontal</b> parameters include the table <b>alignment</b> (left, center, right) <b>relative to</b> margin, page or text as well as the table <b>position to the right of</b> margin, page or text.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Vertical</b> parameters include the table <b>alignment</b> (top, center, bottom) <b>relative to</b> margin, page or text as well as the table <b>position below</b> margin, page or text.</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Options</b> section allows to change the following parameters:
|
||||
<li>The <b>Options</b> section allows changing the following parameters:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Move object with text</b> controls whether the table moves as the text into which it is inserted moves.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Move object with text</b> ensures that the table moves with the text.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Allow overlap</b> controls whether two tables are merged into one large table or overlap if you drag them near each other on the page.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -179,12 +179,12 @@
|
|||
After you select the wrapping style, the additional wrapping parameters can be set both for inline and flow tables:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>For the inline table, you can specify the table <b>alignment</b> and <b>indent from left</b>.</li>
|
||||
<li>For the flow table, you can specify the <b>distance from text</b> and table <b>position</b> at the <b>Table Position</b> tab.</li>
|
||||
<li>For the flow table, you can specify the <b>distance from text</b> and table <b>position</b> on the <b>Table Position</b> tab.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Table - Advanced Settings" src="../images/table_properties_6.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Alternative Text</b> tab allows to specify a <b>Title</b> and <b>Description</b> which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the table.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Alternative Text</b> tab allows specifying the <b>Title</b> and <b>Description</b> which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the table.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,36 +14,37 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Insert text objects</h1>
|
||||
<p>To make your text more emphatic and draw attention to a specific part of the document, you can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows to enter text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows to apply some text effects).</p>
|
||||
<p>To make your text more emphatic and draw attention to a specific part of the document, you can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows entering text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows applying some effects to the text).</p>
|
||||
<h3>Add a text object</h3>
|
||||
<p>You can add a text object anywhere on the page. To do that:</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>select the necessary text object type:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>to add a text box, click the <img alt="Text Box icon" src="../images/inserttexticon.png" /> <b>Text Box</b> icon at the top toolbar, then click where you want to insert the text box, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text.
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: it's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the <img alt="Shape icon" src="../images/insertautoshape.png" /> <b>Shape</b> icon at the top toolbar and selecting the <img alt="Insert Text autoshape" src="../images/text_autoshape.png" /> shape from the <b>Basic Shapes</b> group.</p>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
to add a text box, click the <img alt="Text Box icon" src="../images/inserttexticon.png" /> <b>Text Box</b> icon on the top toolbar, then click where the text box should be added, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text.
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: it's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the <img alt="Shape icon" src="../images/insertautoshape.png" /> <b>Shape</b> icon on the top toolbar and selecting the <img alt="Insert Text autoshape" src="../images/text_autoshape.png" /> shape from the <b>Basic Shapes</b> group.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>to add a Text Art object, click the <img alt="Text Art icon" src="../images/inserttextarticon.png" /> <b>Text Art</b> icon at the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added at the current cursor position. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text.</li>
|
||||
<li>to add a Text Art object, click the <img alt="Text Art icon" src="../images/inserttextarticon.png" /> <b>Text Art</b> icon on the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added at the current cursor position. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the document.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it).</p>
|
||||
<p>As an inserted text object represents a rectangular frame with text in it (Text Art objects have invisible text box borders by default) and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties.</p>
|
||||
<p>As the inserted text object represents a rectangular frame with text in it (Text Art objects have invisible text box borders by default), and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties.</p>
|
||||
<p>To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the <b>Delete</b> key on the keyboard. The text within the text box will also be deleted.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Format a text box</h3>
|
||||
<p>Select the text box clicking on its border to be able to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines.</p>
|
||||
<p>Select the text box by clicking on its border to be able to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Text box selected" src="../images/textbox_boxselected.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>to <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm#shape_resize" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">resize, move, rotate</a> the text box use the special handles on the edges of the shape.</li>
|
||||
<li>to <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm#shape_resize" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">resize, move, rotate</a> the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape.</li>
|
||||
<li>to edit the text box <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm#shape_fill" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">fill</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm#shape_stroke" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">stroke</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm#shape_wrapping" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">wrapping style</a> or <b>replace</b> the rectangular box with a different shape, click the <b>Shape settings</b> <img alt="Shape settings icon" src="../images/shape_settings_icon.png" /> icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options.</li>
|
||||
<li>to <b>align</b> the text box on the page, <b>arrange</b> text boxes as related to other objects, <b>rotate or flip</b> a text box, change a <b>wrapping style</b> or access the shape <b>advanced settings</b>, right-click on the text box border and use the <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm#shape_rightclickmenu" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">contextual menu options</a>. To learn more on how to arrange and align objects you can refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</li>
|
||||
<li>to <b>align</b> the text box on the page, <b>arrange</b> text boxes as related to other objects, <b>rotate or flip</b> a text box, change a <b>wrapping style</b> or access the shape <b>advanced settings</b>, right-click on the text box border and use the <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm#shape_rightclickmenu" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">contextual menu options</a>. To learn more on how to arrange and align objects, please refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<h3>Format the text within the text box</h3>
|
||||
<p>Click the text within the text box to be able to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines.</p>
|
||||
<p>Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Text selected" src="../images/textbox_textselected.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: it's also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color and decoration styles) can be applied to a previously selected portion of the text separately.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: it's also possible to change the text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In thus case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color and decoration styles) can be applied to the previously selected text fragment separately.</p>
|
||||
<p>To <b>rotate</b> the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the <b>Text Direction</b> option and then choose one of the available options: <b>Horizontal</b> (is selected by default), <b>Rotate Text Down</b> (sets a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or <b>Rotate Text Up</b> (sets a vertical direction, from bottom to top).</p>
|
||||
<p>To <b>align the text vertically</b> within the text box, right-click the text, select the <b>Vertical Alignment</b> option and then choose one of the available options: <b>Align Top</b>, <b>Align Center</b> or <b>Align Bottom</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Other formatting options that you can apply are the same as the ones for regular text. Please refer to the corresponding help sections to learn more about the necessary operation. You can:</p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -57,11 +58,11 @@
|
|||
<h3>Edit a Text Art style</h3>
|
||||
<p>Select a text object and click the <b>Text Art settings</b> <img alt="Text Art settings icon" src="../images/textart_settings_icon.png" /> icon on the right sidebar.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Text Art setting tab" src="../images/right_textart.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>Change the applied text style selecting a new <b>Template</b> from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size etc.</p>
|
||||
<p>Change the applied text style by selecting a new <b>Template</b> from the gallery. You can also change the basic style by selecting a different font type, size etc.</p>
|
||||
<p>Change the font <b>Fill</b>. You can choose the following options:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<b>Color Fill</b> - select this option to specify the solid color you want to fill the inner space of letters with.
|
||||
<b>Color Fill</b> - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of letters.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Color Fill" src="../images/fill_color.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p id="color">Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available <a href="../UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">color sets</a> or specify any color you like:</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,19 +14,19 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Set paragraph line spacing</h1>
|
||||
<p>In Document Editor, you can set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph as well as the margins between the current and the preceding or the subsequent paragraph.</p>
|
||||
<p>In the Document Editor, you can set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph as well as the margins between the current paragraph and the previous one or the subsequent paragraphs.</p>
|
||||
<p>To do that,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>put the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or all the text in the document by pressing the <b>Ctrl+A</b> key combination,</li>
|
||||
<li>use the corresponding fields at the right sidebar to achieve the desired results:
|
||||
<li>place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text by pressing the <b>Ctrl+A</b> key combination,</li>
|
||||
<li>use the corresponding fields on the right sidebar to achieve the desired results:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Line Spacing</b> - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among three options: <b>at least</b> (sets the minimum line spacing that is needed to fit the largest font or graphic on the line), <b>multiple</b> (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), <b>exactly</b> (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Paragraph Spacing</b> - set the amount of space between paragraphs.
|
||||
<li><b>Line Spacing</b> - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among three options: <b>at least</b> (sets the minimum line spacing that is needed to fit the largest font or graphic in the line), <b>multiple</b> (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), <b>exactly</b> (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Paragraph Spacing</b> defines the amount of spacing between paragraphs.
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Before</b> - set the amount of space before the paragraph.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>After</b> - set the amount of space after the paragraph.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Before</b> defines the amount of spacing before the paragraph.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>After</b> defines the amount of spacing after the paragraph.</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<b>Don't add interval between paragraphs of the same style</b> - check this box in case you don't need any space between paragraphs of the same style.
|
||||
<b>Don't add interval between paragraphs of the same style</b> - please check this box if you don't need any spacing between paragraphs of the same style.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Right Sidebar - Paragraph Settings" src="../images/right_paragraph.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
|
|
@ -34,9 +34,9 @@
|
|||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>These parameters can also be found in the <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window. To open the <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window, right-click the text and choose the <b>Paragraph Advanced Settings</b> option from the menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> option at the right sidebar. Then switch to the <b>Indents & Spacing</b> tab and go to the <b>Spacing</b> section.</p>
|
||||
<p>These parameters can also be found in the <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window. To open the <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window, right-click the text and choose the <b>Paragraph Advanced Settings</b> option from the menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> option on the right sidebar. Then switch to the <b>Indents & Spacing</b> tab and go to the <b>Spacing</b> section.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Paragraph Advanced Settings - Indents & Spacing" src="../images/paradvsettings_indents.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the <b>Paragraph line spacing</b> <img alt="Paragraph line spacing" src="../images/linespacing.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar selecting the needed value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines.</p>
|
||||
<p>To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the <b>Paragraph line spacing</b> <img alt="Paragraph line spacing" src="../images/linespacing.png" /> icon on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar selecting the required value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</html>
|
||||
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load diff
|
|
@ -14,64 +14,64 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Show/hide nonprinting characters</h1>
|
||||
<p>Nonprinting characters help you edit a document. They indicate the presence of various types of formatting, but they do not print with the document, even when they are displayed on the screen.</p>
|
||||
<p>To show or hide nonprinting characters, click the <b>Nonprinting characters</b> <img alt="Nonprinting characters" src="../images/nonprintingcharacters.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar. Alternatively, you can use the <em>Ctrl+Shift+Num8</em> key combination.</p>
|
||||
<p>Nonprinting characters help you edit a document. They indicate the presence of various types of formatting elements, but they cannot be printed with the document even if they are displayed on the screen.</p>
|
||||
<p>To show or hide nonprinting characters, click the <b>Nonprinting characters</b> <img alt="Nonprinting characters" src="../images/nonprintingcharacters.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab on the top toolbar. Alternatively, you can use the <em>Ctrl+Shift+Num8</em> key combination.</p>
|
||||
<p>Nonprinting characters include:</p>
|
||||
<table>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Spaces</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Space" src="../images/space.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Inserted when you press the <b>Spacebar</b> on the keyboard. It creates a space between characters.</td>
|
||||
<td>Inserted when you press the <b>Spacebar</b> on the keyboard. They create a space between characters.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Tabs</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Tab" src="../images/tab.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Inserted when you press the <b>Tab</b> key. It's used to advance the cursor to the next tab stop.</td>
|
||||
<td>Inserted when you press the <b>Tab</b> key. They are used to advance the cursor to the next tab stop.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Paragraph marks (i.e. hard returns)</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Hard return" src="../images/hard.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Inserted when you press the <b>Enter</b> key. It ends a paragraph and adds a bit of space after it. It contains information about the paragraph formatting.</td>
|
||||
<td>Inserted when you press the <b>Enter</b> key. They ends a paragraph and adds a bit of space after it. They also contain information about the paragraph formatting.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Line breaks (i.e. soft returns)</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Soft return" src="../images/soft.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Inserted when you use the <b>Shift+Enter</b> key combination. It breaks the current line and puts lines of text close together. Soft return is primarily used in titles and headings.</td>
|
||||
<td>Inserted when you use the <b>Shift+Enter</b> key combination. They break the current line and put the text lines close together. Soft return are primarily used in titles and headings.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Nonbreaking spaces</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Nonbreaking space" src="../images/nonbreakspace.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Inserted when you use the <b>Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar</b> key combination. It creates a space between characters which can't be used to start a new line.</td>
|
||||
<td>Inserted when you use the <b>Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar</b> key combination. They create a space between characters which can't be used to start a new line.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Page breaks</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Page break" src="../images/pagebreak.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Inserted when you use the <img alt="Breaks icon" src="../images/pagebreak1.png" /> <b>Breaks</b> icon at the <b>Insert</b> or <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and then select the <b>Insert Page Break</b> option, or select the <b>Page break before</b> option in the right-click menu or advanced settings window.</td>
|
||||
<td>Inserted when you use the <img alt="Breaks icon" src="../images/pagebreak1.png" /> <b>Breaks</b> icon on the <b>Insert</b> or <b>Layout</b> tabs of the top toolbar and then select one of the <b>Insert Page Break</b> submenu options (the section break indicator differs depending on which option is selected: Next Page, Continuous Page, Even Page or Odd Page).</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Section breaks</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Section break" src="../images/sectionbreak.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Inserted when you use the <img alt="Breaks icon" src="../images/pagebreak1.png" /> <b>Breaks</b> icon at the <b>Insert</b> or <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and then select one of the <b>Insert Section Break</b> submenu options (the section break indicator differs depending on which option is selected: Next Page, Continuous Page, Even Page or Odd Page).</td>
|
||||
<td>Inserted when you use the <img alt="Breaks icon" src="../images/pagebreak1.png" /> <b>Breaks</b> icon on the <b>Insert</b> or <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and then select one of the <b>Insert Section Break</b> submenu options (the section break indicator differs depending on which option is selected: Next Page, Continuous Page, Even Page or Odd Page).</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Column breaks</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Column break" src="../images/columnbreak.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>Inserted when you use the <img alt="Breaks icon" src="../images/pagebreak1.png" /> <b>Breaks</b> icon at the <b>Insert</b> or <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and then select the <b>Insert Column Break</b> option.</td>
|
||||
<td>Inserted when you use the <img alt="Breaks icon" src="../images/pagebreak1.png" /> <b>Breaks</b> icon on the <b>Insert</b> or <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar and then select the <b>Insert Column Break</b> option.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>End-of-cell and end-of row markers in tables</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Markers in tables" src="../images/cellrow.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>These markers contain formatting codes for the individual cell and row, respectively.</td>
|
||||
<td>Contain formatting codes for an individual cell and a row, respectively.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Small black square in the margin to the left of a paragraph</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Black square" src="../images/square.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>It indicates that at least one of the paragraph options was applied, e.g. <b>Keep lines together</b>, <b>Page break before</b>.</td>
|
||||
<td>Indicates that at least one of the paragraph options was applied, e.g. <b>Keep lines together</b>, <b>Page break before</b>.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td>Anchor symbols</td>
|
||||
<td><img alt="Anchor symbol" src="../images/anchor.png" /></td>
|
||||
<td>They indicate the position of floating objects (those with a wrapping style other than <b>Inline</b>), e.g. images, autoshapes, charts. You should select an object to make its anchor visible.</td>
|
||||
<td>Indicate the position of floating objects (objects whose wrapping style is different from <b>Inline</b>), e.g. images, autoshapes, charts. You should select an object to make its anchor visible.</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -18,16 +18,16 @@
|
|||
<div class="onlineDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>In the <em>online editor</em></p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>File</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>File</b> tab on the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>select the <b>Create New</b> option. <!--Here you can choose whether to create a <b>blank</b> text document or use one of the available document <b>templates</b>: contract, letter, list, or plan.--></li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<div class="desktopDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>In the <em>desktop editor</em></p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>in the main program window, select the <b>Document</b> menu item from the <b>Create new</b> section of the left sidebar - a new file will open in a new tab,</li>
|
||||
<li>in the main program window, select the <b>Document</b> menu item from the <b>Create new</b> section on the left sidebar - a new file will open in a new tab,</li>
|
||||
<li>when all the necessary changes are made, click the <b>Save</b> <img alt="Save icon" src="../images/save.png" /> icon in the upper left corner or switch to the <b>File</b> tab and choose the <b>Save as</b> menu item. </li>
|
||||
<li>in the file manager window, select the file location, specify its name, choose the format you want to save the document to (DOCX, Document template (DOTX), ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, PDF or PDFA) and click the <b>Save</b> button.</li>
|
||||
<li>in the file manager window, select the file location, specify its name, choose the required format for saving (DOCX, Document template (DOTX), ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, PDF or PDFA) and click the <b>Save</b> button.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -35,18 +35,18 @@
|
|||
<h4>To open an existing document</h4>
|
||||
<p>In the <em>desktop editor</em></p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>in the main program window, select the <b>Open local file</b> menu item at the left sidebar,</li>
|
||||
<li>choose the necessary document from the file manager window and click the <b>Open</b> button.</li>
|
||||
<li>in the main program window, select the <b>Open local file</b> menu item on the left sidebar,</li>
|
||||
<li>choose the required document from the file manager window and click the <b>Open</b> button.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>You can also right-click the necessary document in the file manager window, select the <b>Open with</b> option and choose the necessary application from the menu. If the office documents files are associated with the application, you can also open documents by double-clicking the file name in the file explorer window.</p>
|
||||
<p>All the directories that you have accessed using the desktop editor will be displayed in the <b>Recent folders</b> list so that you can quickly access them afterwards. Click the necessary folder to select one of the files stored in it.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can also right-click the required document in the file manager window, select the <b>Open with</b> option and choose the necessary application from the menu. If text documents are associated with the application you need, you can also open them by double-clicking the file name in the file explorer window.</p>
|
||||
<p>All the directories that you have navigated through using the desktop editor will be displayed in the <b>Recent folders</b> list so that you can quickly access them afterwards. Click the required folder to select one of the files stored there.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h4>To open a recently edited document </h4>
|
||||
<div class="onlineDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>In the <em>online editor</em></p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>File</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>File</b> tab on the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>select the <b>Open Recent...</b> option,</li>
|
||||
<li>choose the document you need from the list of recently edited documents.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
|
|
@ -54,12 +54,12 @@
|
|||
<div class="desktopDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>In the <em>desktop editor</em></p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>in the main program window, select the <b>Recent files</b> menu item at the left sidebar,</li>
|
||||
<li>in the main program window, select the <b>Recent files</b> menu item on the left sidebar,</li>
|
||||
<li>choose the document you need from the list of recently edited documents.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<p>To open the folder where the file is stored <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures"> in a new browser tab in the <em>online version</em>,</span> <span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">in the file explorer window in the <em>desktop version</em>,</span> click the <img alt="Open file location" src="../images/gotodocuments.png" /> <b>Open file location</b> icon on the right side of the editor header. Alternatively, you can switch to the <b>File</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the <b>Open file location</b> option.</p>
|
||||
<p>To open the folder, where the file is stored, <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures"> in a new browser tab in the <em>online editor</em></span> <span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">in the file explorer window in the <em>desktop editor</em>,</span> click the <img alt="Open file location" src="../images/gotodocuments.png" /> <b>Open file location</b> icon on the right side of the editor header. Alternatively, you can switch to the <b>File</b> tab on the top toolbar and select the <b>Open file location</b> option.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</html>
|
||||
|
|
@ -14,19 +14,19 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Insert page breaks</h1>
|
||||
<p>In Document Editor, you can add a page break to start a new page, insert a blank page and adjust pagination options.</p>
|
||||
<p>To insert a page break at the current cursor position click the <img alt="Breaks icon" src="../images/pagebreak1.png" /> <b>Breaks</b> icon at the <b>Insert</b> or <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar or click the arrow next to this icon and select the <b>Insert Page Break</b> option from the menu. You can also use the <b>Ctrl+Enter</b> key combination.</p>
|
||||
<p>To insert a blank page at the current cursor position click the <img alt="Blank page icon" src="../images/blankpage.png" /> <b>Blank Page</b> icon at the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar. This inserts two page breaks that creates a blank page.</p>
|
||||
<p>In the Document Editor, you can add a page break to start a new page, insert a blank page and adjust pagination options.</p>
|
||||
<p>To insert a page break at the current cursor position click the <img alt="Breaks icon" src="../images/pagebreak1.png" /> <b>Breaks</b> icon on the <b>Insert</b> or <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar or click the arrow next to this icon and select the <b>Insert Page Break</b> option from the menu. You can also use the <b>Ctrl+Enter</b> key combination.</p>
|
||||
<p>To insert a blank page at the current cursor position click the <img alt="Blank page icon" src="../images/blankpage.png" /> <b>Blank Page</b> icon on the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar. This action inserts two page breaks that create a blank page.</p>
|
||||
<p>To insert a page break before the selected paragraph i.e. to start this paragraph at the top of a new page:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>click the right mouse button and select the <b>Page break before</b> option in the menu, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the right mouse button, select the <b>Paragraph Advanced Settings</b> option in the menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link at the right sidebar, and check the <b>Page break before</b> box at the <b>Line & Page Breaks</b> tab of the opened <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window.
|
||||
<li>click the right mouse button, select the <b>Paragraph Advanced Settings</b> option in the menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link on the right sidebar, and check the <b>Page break before</b> box at the <b>Line & Page Breaks</b> tab of the opened <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window.
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>To keep lines together so that only whole paragraphs will be moved to the new page (i.e. there will be no page break between the lines within a single paragraph),</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>click the right mouse button and select the <b>Keep lines together</b> option in the menu, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the right mouse button, select the <b>Paragraph Advanced Settings</b> option in the menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link at the right sidebar, and check the <b>Keep lines together</b> box at the <b>Line & Page Breaks</b> in the opened <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window.</li>
|
||||
<li>click the right mouse button, select the <b>Paragraph Advanced Settings</b> option on the menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link at the right sidebar, and check the <b>Keep lines together</b> box at the <b>Line & Page Breaks</b> in the opened <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>The <b>Line & Page Breaks</b> tab of the <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window allows you to set two more pagination options:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,11 +14,11 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Change paragraph indents</h1>
|
||||
<p>In Document Editor, you can change the first line offset from the left part of the page as well as the paragraph offset from the left and right sides of the page.</p>
|
||||
<p> the Document Editor, you can change the first line offset from the left side of the page as well as the paragraph offset from the left and right sides of the page.</p>
|
||||
<p>To do that,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>put the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or all the text in the document by pressing the <b>Ctrl+A</b> key combination,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the right mouse button and select the <b>Paragraph Advanced Settings</b> option from the menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link at the right sidebar,</li>
|
||||
<li>place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text by pressing the <b>Ctrl+A</b> key combination,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the right mouse button and select the <b>Paragraph Advanced Settings</b> option from the menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link on the right sidebar,</li>
|
||||
<li>in the opened <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window, switch to the <b>Indents & Spacing</b> tab and set the necessary parameters in the <b>Indents</b> section:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Left</b> - set the paragraph offset from the <b>left</b> side of the page specifying the necessary numeric value,</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -30,15 +30,15 @@
|
|||
<p><img alt="Paragraph Advanced Settings - Indents & Spacing" src="../images/paradvsettings_indents.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>To quickly change the paragraph offset from the left side of the page, you can also use the respective icons at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar: <b>Decrease indent</b> <img alt="Decrease indent" src="../images/decreaseindent.png" /> and <b>Increase indent</b> <img alt="Increase indent" src="../images/increaseindent.png" />.</p>
|
||||
<p>To quickly change the paragraph offset from the left side of the page, you can also use the corresponding icons on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar: <b>Decrease indent</b> <img alt="Decrease indent" src="../images/decreaseindent.png" /> and <b>Increase indent</b> <img alt="Increase indent" src="../images/increaseindent.png" />.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can also use the horizontal <b>ruler</b> to set indents.</p>
|
||||
<img alt="Ruler - Indent markers" src="../images/indents_ruler.png" />
|
||||
<p>Select the necessary paragraph(s) and drag the indent markers along the ruler.</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>First Line Indent</b> marker <img alt="First Line Indent marker" src="../images/firstline_indent.png" /> is used to set the offset from the left side of the page for the first line of the paragraph.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Hanging Indent</b> marker <img alt="Hanging Indent marker" src="../images/hanging.png" /> is used to set the offset from the left side of the page for the second line and all the subsequent lines of the paragraph.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Left Indent</b> marker <img alt="Left Indent marker" src="../images/leftindent.png" /> is used to set the entire paragraph offset from the left side of the page.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Right Indent</b> marker <img alt="Right Indent marker" src="../images/right_indent.png" /> is used to set the paragraph offset from the right side of the page.</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>First Line Indent</b> marker <img alt="First Line Indent marker" src="../images/firstline_indent.png" /> is used to set an offset from the left side of the page for the first line of the paragraph.</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Hanging Indent</b> marker <img alt="Hanging Indent marker" src="../images/hanging.png" /> is used to set an offset from the left side of the page for the second line and all the subsequent lines of the paragraph.</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Left Indent</b> marker <img alt="Left Indent marker" src="../images/leftindent.png" /> is used to set an offset for the entire paragraph from the left side of the page.</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Right Indent</b> marker <img alt="Right Indent marker" src="../images/right_indent.png" /> is used to set a paragraph offset from the right side of the page.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -15,14 +15,14 @@
|
|||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Save/<span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">download/</span>print your document</h1>
|
||||
<h3>Saving</h3>
|
||||
<p class="onlineDocumentFeatures">By default, online <b>Document Editor</b> automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you work on it preventing your data loss in case of the unexpected program closing. If you co-edit the file in the <b>Fast</b> mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the <b>Strict</b> mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the <b>Autosave</b> feature on the <a href="../HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Advanced Settings</a> page.</p>
|
||||
<p class="onlineDocumentFeatures">By default, online <b>Document Editor</b> automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you work on it to prevent your data loss in case the program closes unexpectedly. If you co-edit the file in the <b>Fast</b> mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the <b>Strict</b> mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If necessary, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the <b>Autosave</b> feature on the <a href="../HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Advanced Settings</a> page.</p>
|
||||
<p>To save your current document manually in the current format and location,</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>press the <b>Save</b> <img alt="Save icon" src="../images/save.png" /> icon in the left part of the editor header, or</li>
|
||||
<li>use the <b>Ctrl+S</b> key combination, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>File</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the <b>Save</b> option.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p class="note desktopDocumentFeatures"><b>Note</b>: in the <em>desktop version</em>, to prevent data loss in case of the unexpected program closing you can turn on the <b>Autorecover</b> option at the <a href="../HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Advanced Settings</a> page. </p>
|
||||
<p class="note desktopDocumentFeatures"><b>Note</b>: in the <em>desktop version</em>, to prevent data from loss in case program closes unexpectedly, you can turn on the <b>Autorecover</b> option on the <a href="../HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Advanced Settings</a> page.</p>
|
||||
<div class="desktopDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p>In the <em>desktop version</em>, you can save the document with another name, in a new location or format,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
|
|
@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
|
|||
<li>use the <b>Ctrl+P</b> key combination, or</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>File</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the <b>Print</b> option.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>It's also possible to print a selected text passage using the <b>Print Selection</b> option from the contextual menu.</p>
|
||||
<p>It's also possible to print a selected text passage using the <b>Print Selection</b> option from the contextual menu both in the <b>Edit</b> and <b>View</b> modes (<b>Right Mouse Button Click</b> and choose option <b>Print selection</b>).</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="desktopDocumentFeatures">In the <em>desktop version</em>, the file will be printed directly.</span> <span class="onlineDocumentFeatures">In the <em>online version</em>, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing.</span></p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,24 +14,24 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Insert section breaks</h1>
|
||||
<p>Section breaks allow you to apply a different layout or formatting for the certain parts of your document. For example, you can use individual <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">headers and footers</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">page numbering</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">footnotes format</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">margins, size, orientation, or column number</a> for each separate section.</p>
|
||||
<p>Section breaks allow you to apply different layouts or formatting styles to a certain part of your document. For example, you can use individual <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">headers and footers</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">page numbering</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">footnotes format</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">margins, size, orientation, or column number</a> for each separate section.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: an inserted section break defines formatting of the preceding part of the document.</p>
|
||||
<p>To insert a section break at the current cursor position:</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Breaks icon" src="../images/pagebreak1.png" /> <b>Breaks</b> icon at the <b>Insert</b> or <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <img alt="Breaks icon" src="../images/pagebreak1.png" /> <b>Breaks</b> icon on the <b>Insert</b> or <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
|
||||
<li>select the <b>Insert Section Break</b> submenu</li>
|
||||
<li>select the necessary section break type:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Next Page</b> - to start a new section from the next page</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Continuous Page</b> - to start a new section at the current page</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Continuous Page</b> - to start a new section on the current page</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Even Page</b> - to start a new section from the next even page</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Odd Page</b> - to start a new section from the next odd page</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>Added section breaks are indicated in your document by a double dotted line: <img alt="Section break" src="../images/sectionbreak.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>If you do not see the inserted section breaks, click the <img alt="Nonprinting Characters icon" src="../images/nonprintingcharacters.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar to display them.</p>
|
||||
<p>To remove a section break select it with the mouse and press the <b>Delete</b> key. Since a section break defines formatting of the preceding section, when you remove a section break, this section formatting will also be deleted. The document part that preceded the removed section break acquires the formatting of the part that followed it.</p>
|
||||
<p>The added section breaks are indicated in your document with a double dotted line: <img alt="Section break" src="../images/sectionbreak.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>If you do not see the inserted section breaks, click the <img alt="Nonprinting Characters icon" src="../images/nonprintingcharacters.png" /> icon on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar to display them.</p>
|
||||
<p>To remove a section break, select it with the mouse and press the <b>Delete</b> key. Since a section break defines formatting of the previous section, when you remove a section break, this section formatting will also be deleted. When you delete a section break, the text before and after the break is combined into one section. The new combined section will use the formatting from the section that followed the section break.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</html>
|
||||
|
|
@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
|
|||
<!DOCTYPE html>
|
||||
<html>
|
||||
<head>
|
||||
<title>Set up paragraph outline level</title>
|
||||
<title>Set up a paragraph outline level</title>
|
||||
<meta charset="utf-8" />
|
||||
<meta name="description" content="Set up paragraph outline level" />
|
||||
<link type="text/css" rel="stylesheet" href="../editor.css" />
|
||||
|
|
@ -15,10 +15,10 @@
|
|||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Set up paragraph outline level</h1>
|
||||
|
||||
<p>Outline level means the paragraph level in the document structure. The following levels are available: <em>Basic Text</em>, <em>Level 1</em> - <em>Level 9</em>. Outline level can be specified in different ways, for example, by using <a href="../UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">heading styles</a>: once you assign a heading style (<em>Heading 1</em> - <em>Heading 9</em>) to a paragraph, it acquires a corresponding outline level. If you assign a level to a paragraph using the paragraph advanced settings, the paragraph acquires the structure level only while its style remains unchanged. The outline level can also be changed at the <a href="../UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm#navigation" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)"><b>Navigation</b></a> panel on the left using the contextual menu options.</p>
|
||||
<p>An outline level is the paragraph level in the document structure. The following levels are available: <em>Basic Text</em>, <em>Level 1</em> - <em>Level 9</em>. The outline level can be specified in different ways, for example, by using <a href="../UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">heading styles</a>: once you assign a heading style (<em>Heading 1</em> - <em>Heading 9</em>) to a paragraph, it acquires yje corresponding outline level. If you assign a level to a paragraph using the paragraph advanced settings, the paragraph acquires the structure level only while its style remains unchanged. The outline level can be also changed in the <a href="../UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm#navigation" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)"><b>Navigation</b></a> panel on the left using the contextual menu options.</p>
|
||||
<p>To change a paragraph outline level using the paragraph advanced settings,</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>right-click the text and choose the <b>Paragraph Advanced Settings</b> option from the contextual menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> option at the right sidebar,</li>
|
||||
<li>right-click the text and choose the <b>Paragraph Advanced Settings</b> option from the contextual menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> option on the right sidebar,</li>
|
||||
<li>open the <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window, switch to the <b>Indents & Spacing</b> tab,</li>
|
||||
<li>select the necessary outline level from the <b>Outline level</b> list.</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>OK</b> button to apply the changes.</li>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -14,12 +14,12 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Set page parameters</h1>
|
||||
<p>To change page layout, i.e. set page orientation and size, adjust margins and insert columns, use the corresponding icons at the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
|
||||
<p>To change page layout, i.e. set page orientation and size, adjust margins and insert columns, use the corresponding icons on the <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: all these parameters are applied to the entire document. If you need to set different page margins, orientation, size, or column number for the separate parts of your document, please refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</p>
|
||||
<h3 id="orientation">Page Orientation</h3>
|
||||
<p>Change the current orientation type clicking the <img alt="Orientation icon" src="../images/orientation.png" /> <b>Orientation</b> icon. The default orientation type is <b>Portrait</b> that can be switched to <b>Album</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Change the current orientation by type clicking the <img alt="Orientation icon" src="../images/orientation.png" /> <b>Orientation</b> icon. The default orientation type is <b>Portrait</b> that can be switched to <b>Album</b>.</p>
|
||||
<h3 id="size">Page Size</h3>
|
||||
<p>Change the default A4 format clicking the <img alt="Size icon" src="../images/pagesize.png" /> <b>Size</b> icon and selecting the needed one from the list. The available preset sizes are:</p>
|
||||
<p>Change the default A4 format by clicking the <img alt="Size icon" src="../images/pagesize.png" /> <b>Size</b> icon and selecting the required format from the list. The following preset sizes are available:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>US Letter (21,59cm x 27,94cm)</li>
|
||||
<li>US Legal (21,59cm x 35,56cm)</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -35,34 +35,34 @@
|
|||
<li>Envelope Choukei 3 (11,99cm x 23,49cm)</li>
|
||||
<li>Super B/A3 (33,02cm x 48,25cm)</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>You can also set a special page size by selecting the <b>Custom Page Size</b> option from the list. The <b>Page Size</b> window will open where you'll be able to select the necessary <b>Preset</b> (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Envelope Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) or set custom <b>Width</b> and <b>Height</b> values. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. When ready, click <b>OK</b> to apply the changes.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can also set a special page size by selecting the <b>Custom Page Size</b> option from the list. The Page Size window will open where you'll be able to select the required <b>Preset</b> (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Envelope Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) or set custom <b>Width</b> and <b>Height</b> values. Enter new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using the arrow buttons. When you finish, click <b>OK</b> to apply the changes.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Custom Page Size" src="../images/custompagesize.png" /></p>
|
||||
<h3 id="margins">Page Margins</h3>
|
||||
<p>Change default margins, i.e. the blank space between the left, right, top and bottom page edges and the paragraph text, clicking the <img alt="Margins icon" src="../images/pagemargins.png" /> <b>Margins</b> icon and selecting one of the available presets: <b>Normal</b>, <b>US Normal</b>, <b>Narrow</b>, <b>Moderate</b>, <b>Wide</b>. You can also use the <b>Custom Margins</b> option to set your own values in the <b>Margins</b> window that opens. Enter the necessary <b>Top</b>, <b>Bottom</b>, <b>Left</b> and <b>Right</b> page margin values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons.</p>
|
||||
<p>Change the default margins, i.e. the blank space between the left, right, top and bottom page edges and the paragraph text, by clicking the <img alt="Margins icon" src="../images/pagemargins.png" /> <b>Margins</b> icon and selecting one of the available presets: <b>Normal</b>, <b>US Normal</b>, <b>Narrow</b>, <b>Moderate</b>, <b>Wide</b>. You can also use the <b>Custom Margins</b> option to set your own values in the Margins window. Enter the required <b>Top</b>, <b>Bottom</b>, <b>Left</b> and <b>Right</b> page margin values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Custom Margins" src="../images/custommargins.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p><b>Gutter position</b> is used to set up additional space on the left or top of the document. Gutter option might come in handy to make sure bookbinding does not cover text. In <b>Margins</b> window enter the necessary gutter position into the entry fields and choose where it should be placed in.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: Gutter position function cannot be used when <b>Mirror margins</b> option is checked.</p>
|
||||
<p>In <b>Multiple pages</b> drop-down menu choose <b>Mirror margins</b> option to to set up facing pages for double-sided documents. With this option checked, <b>Left</b> and <b>Right</b> margins turn into <b>Inside</b> and <b>Outside</b> margins respectively.</p>
|
||||
<p><b>Gutter position</b> is used to set up additional space on the left side of the document or at its top. The <b>Gutter</b> option is helpful to make sure that bookbinding does not cover the text. In the <b>Margins</b> enter the required gutter position into the entry fields and choose where it should be placed in.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the <b>Gutter position</b> cannot be used when the <b>Mirror margins</b> option is checked.</p>
|
||||
<p>In the <b>Multiple pages</b> drop-down menu, choose the <b>Mirror margins</b> option to set up facing pages for double-sided documents. With this option checked, <b>Left</b> and <b>Right</b> margins turn into <b>Inside</b> and <b>Outside</b> margins respectively.</p>
|
||||
<p>In <b>Orientation</b> drop-down menu choose from <b>Portrait</b> and <b>Landscape</b> options.</p>
|
||||
<p>All applied changes to the document will be displayed in the <b>Preview</b> window.</p>
|
||||
<p>When ready, click <b>OK</b>. The custom margins will be applied to the current document and the <b>Last Custom</b> option with the specified parameters will appear in the <img alt="Margins icon" src="../images/pagemargins.png" /> <b>Margins</b> list so that you can apply them to some other documents.</p></p>
|
||||
<p>When you finish, click <b>OK</b>. The custom margins will be applied to the current document and the <b>Last Custom</b> option with the specified parameters will appear in the <img alt="Margins icon" src="../images/pagemargins.png" /> <b>Margins</b> list so that you will be able to apply them to other documents.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can also change the margins manually by dragging the border between the grey and white areas on the rulers (the grey areas of the rulers indicate page margins):</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Margins Adjustment" src="../images/margins.png" /></p>
|
||||
<h3 id="columns">Columns</h3>
|
||||
<p>Apply a multi-column layout clicking the <img alt="Columns icon" src="../images/insertcolumns.png" /> <b>Columns</b> icon and selecting the necessary column type from the drop-down list. The following options are available:</p>
|
||||
<p>Apply a multi-column layout by clicking the <img alt="Columns icon" src="../images/insertcolumns.png" /> <b>Columns</b> icon and selecting the necessary column type from the drop-down list. The following options are available:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Two</b> <img alt="Two columns icon" src="../images/twocolumns.png" /> - to add two columns of the same width,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Three</b> <img alt="Three columns icon" src="../images/threecolumns.png" /> - to add three columns of the same width,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Left</b> <img alt="Left column icon" src="../images/leftcolumn.png" /> - to add two columns: a narrow column on the left and a wide column on the right,</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Right</b> <img alt="Right column icon" src="../images/rightcolumn.png" /> - to add two columns: a narrow column on the right and a wide column on the left.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>If you want to adjust column settings, select the <b>Custom Columns</b> option from the list. The <b>Columns</b> window will open where you'll be able to set necessary <b>Number of columns</b> (it's possible to add up to 12 columns) and <b>Spacing between columns</b>. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Check the <b>Column divider</b> box to add a vertical line between the columns. When ready, click <b>OK</b> to apply the changes.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you want to adjust column settings, select the <b>Custom Columns</b> option from the list. The <b>Columns</b> window will appear, and you'll be able to set the required <b>Number of columns</b> (you can add up to 12 columns) and <b>Spacing between columns</b>. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Check the <b>Column divider</b> box to add a vertical line between the columns. When you finish, click <b>OK</b> to apply the changes.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Custom Columns" src="../images/customcolumns.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>To exactly specify where a new column should start, place the cursor before the text that you want to move into the new column, click the <img alt="Breaks icon" src="../images/pagebreak1.png" /> <b>Breaks</b> icon at the top toolbar and then select the <b>Insert Column Break</b> option. The text will be moved to the next column.</p>
|
||||
<p>Added column breaks are indicated in your document by a dotted line: <img alt="Column break" src="../images/columnbreak.png" />. If you do not see the inserted column breaks, click the <img alt="Nonprinting Characters icon" src="../images/nonprintingcharacters.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar to display them. To remove a column break select it with the mouse and press the <b>Delete</b> key.</p>
|
||||
<p>To exactly specify where a new column should start, place the cursor before the text that you want to move to the new column, click the <img alt="Breaks icon" src="../images/pagebreak1.png" /> <b>Breaks</b> icon on the top toolbar and then select the <b>Insert Column Break</b> option. The text will be moved to the next column.</p>
|
||||
<p>The inserted column breaks are indicated in your document with a dotted line: <img alt="Column break" src="../images/columnbreak.png" />. If you do not see the inserted column breaks, click the <img alt="Nonprinting Characters icon" src="../images/nonprintingcharacters.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab on the top toolbar to make them visible. To remove a column break select it with the mouse and press the <b>Delete</b> key.</p>
|
||||
<p>To manually change the column width and spacing, you can use the horizontal ruler.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Column spacing" src="../images/columnspacing.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>To cancel columns and return to a regular single-column layout, click the <img alt="Columns icon" src="../images/insertcolumns.png" /> <b>Columns</b> icon at the top toolbar and select the <b>One</b> <img alt="One column icon" src="../images/onecolumn.png" /> option from the list.</p>
|
||||
<p>To cancel columns and return to a regular single-column layout, click the <img alt="Columns icon" src="../images/insertcolumns.png" /> <b>Columns</b> icon on the top toolbar and select the <b>One</b> <img alt="One column icon" src="../images/onecolumn.png" /> option from the list.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</html>
|
||||
|
|
@ -14,14 +14,14 @@
|
|||
<input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<h1>Set tab stops</h1>
|
||||
<p>In Document Editor, you can change tab stops i.e. the position the cursor advances to when you press the <b>Tab</b> key on the keyboard.</p>
|
||||
<p>In the Document Editor, you can change tab stops. A tab stop is a term used to describe the location where the cursor stops after the <b>Tab</b> key is pressed.</p>
|
||||
<p>To set tab stops you can use the horizontal ruler:</p>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>Select the necessary tab stop type clicking the <img alt="Left Tab Stop button" src="../images/tabstopleft.png" /> button in the upper left corner of the working area. The following three tab types are available:
|
||||
<li>Select the necessary tab stop type by clicking the <img alt="Left Tab Stop button" src="../images/tabstopleft.png" /> button in the upper left corner of the working area. The following three tab types are available:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Left</b> <img alt="Left Tab Stop button" src="../images/tabstopleft.png" /> - lines up your text by the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the <img alt="Left Tab Stop marker" src="../images/tabstopleft_marker.png" /> marker.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Center</b> <img alt="Center Tab Stop button" src="../images/tabstopcenter.png" /> - centers the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the <img alt="Center Tab Stop marker" src="../images/tabstopcenter_marker.png" /> marker.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Right</b> <img alt="Right Tab Stop button" src="../images/tabstopright.png" /> - lines up your text by the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the <img alt="Right Tab Stop marker" src="../images/tabstopright_marker.png" /> marker.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Left Tab Stop</b> <img alt="Left Tab Stop button" src="../images/tabstopleft.png" /> lines up the text to the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop while you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler with the <img alt="Left Tab Stop marker" src="../images/tabstopleft_marker.png" /> <b>Left Tab Stop</b> marker.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Center Tab Stop</b> <img alt="Center Tab Stop button" src="../images/tabstopcenter.png" /> centers the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler with the <img alt="Center Tab Stop marker" src="../images/tabstopcenter_marker.png" /> <b>Center Tab Stop</b> marker.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Right Tab Stop</b> <img alt="Right Tab Stop button" src="../images/tabstopright.png" /> lines up the text to the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop while you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler with the <img alt="Right Tab Stop marker" src="../images/tabstopright_marker.png" /> <b>Right Tab Stop</b> marker.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>Click on the bottom edge of the ruler where you want to place the tab stop. Drag it along the ruler to change its position. To remove the added tab stop drag it out of the ruler.
|
||||
|
|
@ -29,15 +29,16 @@
|
|||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<hr />
|
||||
<p>You can also use the paragraph properties window to adjust tab stops. Click the right mouse button, select the <b>Paragraph Advanced Settings</b> option in the menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link at the right sidebar, and switch to the <b>Tabs</b> tab in the opened <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can also use the paragraph properties window to adjust tab stops. Click the right mouse button, select the <b>Paragraph Advanced Settings</b> option in the menu or use the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link on the right sidebar, and switch to the <b>Tabs</b> tab in the opened <b>Paragraph - Advanced Settings</b> window.</p>
|
||||
<img alt="Paragraph Properties - Tabs tab" src="../images/paradvsettings_tab.png" />
|
||||
<p>You can set the following parameters:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>Default Tab</b> is set at 1.25 cm. You can decrease or increase this value using the arrow buttons or enter the necessary one in the box.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Tab Position</b> - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons and press the <b>Specify</b> button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below. If you've previously added some tab stops using the ruler, all these tab positions will also be displayed in the list.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Default Tab</b> is set at 1.25 cm. You can decrease or increase this value by using the arrow buttons or entering the required value in the box.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Tab Position</b> is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the required value in this box, adjust it more precisely by using the arrow buttons and press the <b>Specify</b> button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below. If you've previously added some tab stops using the ruler, all these tab positions will also be displayed in the list.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Alignment</b> - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the <b>Left</b>, <b>Center</b> or <b>Right</b> option from the drop-down list and press the <b>Specify</b> button.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Leader</b> - allows to choose a character used to create a leader for each of the tab positions. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between tabs. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the leader type from the drop-down list and press the <b>Specify</b> button.
|
||||
<p>To delete tab stops from the list select a tab stop and press the <b>Remove</b> or <b>Remove All</b> button.</p>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<b>Leader</b> - allows choosing a character to create a leader for each tab positions. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between tabs. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the leader type from the drop-down list and press the <b>Specify</b> button.
|
||||
<p>To delete tab stops from the list, select a tab stop and press the <b>Remove</b> or <b>Remove All</b> button.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -23,8 +23,8 @@
|
|||
<li>A data source used for the mail merge must be an <b>.xlsx</b> spreadsheet stored on your portal. Open an existing spreadsheet or create a new one and make sure that it meets the following requirements.
|
||||
<p>The spreadsheet should have a header row with the column titles, as values in the first cell of each column will designate merge fields (i.e. variables that you can insert into the text). Each column should contain a set of actual values for a variable. Each row in the spreadsheet should correspond to a separate record (i.e. a set of values that belongs to a certain recipient). During the merge process, a copy of the main document will be created for each record and each merge field inserted into the main text will be replaced with an actual value from the corresponding column. If you are goung to send results by email, the spreadsheet must also include a column with the recipients' email addresses.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>Open an existing text document or create a new one. It must contain the main text which will be the same for each version of the merged document. Click the <b>Mail Merge</b> <img alt="Mail Merge icon" src="../images/mailmergeicon.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Select Data Source</b> window will open. It displays the list of all your <b>.xlsx</b> spreadsheets stored in the <b>My Documents</b> section. To navigate between other <b>Documents</b> module sections use the menu in the left part of the window. Select the file you need and click <b>OK</b>.</li>
|
||||
<li>Open an existing text document or create a new one. It must contain the main text which will be the same for each version of the merged document. Click the <b>Mail Merge</b> <img alt="Mail Merge icon" src="../images/mailmergeicon.png" /> icon on the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</li>
|
||||
<li>The <b>Select Data Source</b> window will open. It displays the list of all your <b>.xlsx</b> spreadsheets stored in the <b>My Documents</b> section. To navigate between other <b>Documents</b> module sections, use the menu on the left part of the window. Select the required file and click <b>OK</b>.</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<p>Once the data source is loaded, the <b>Mail Merge setting</b> tab will be available on the right sidebar.</p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Mail Merge setting tab" src="../images/right_mailmerge.png" /></p>
|
||||
|
|
@ -34,17 +34,20 @@
|
|||
<li>Click the <b>Edit recipients list</b> button on the top of the right sidebar to open the <b>Mail Merge Recipients</b> window, where the content of the selected data source is displayed.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Mail Merge Recipients window" src="../images/mailmergerecipients.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>Here you can add new information, edit or delete the existing data, if necessary. To simplify working with data, you can use the icons on the top of the window:
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
In the opened window, you can add new information, edit or delete the existing data if necessary. To simplify working with data, you can use the icons at the top of the window:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><img alt="Copy" src="../images/copy.png" /> and <img alt="Paste" src="../images/paste.png" /> - to copy and paste the copied data</li>
|
||||
<li><img alt="Undo" src="../images/undo1.png" /> and <img alt="Redo" src="../images/redo1.png" /> - to undo and redo undone actions</li>
|
||||
<li><img alt="Sort Lowest to Highest icon" src="../images/sortatoz.png" /> and <img alt="Sort Highest to Lowest icon" src="../images/sortztoa.png" /> - to sort your data within a selected range of cells in ascending or descending order</li>
|
||||
<li><img alt="Filter icon" src="../images/sortandfilter.png" /> - to enable the filter for the previously selected range of cells or to remove the applied filter</li>
|
||||
<li><img alt="Clear Filter icon" src="../images/clearfilter.png" /> - to clear all the applied filter parameters
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: to learn more on how to use the filter you can refer to the <b>Sort and filter data</b> section of the <b>Spreadsheet Editor</b> help.</p>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<img alt="Clear Filter icon" src="../images/clearfilter.png" /> - to clear all the applied filter parameters
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: to learn more on how to use the filter, please refer to the <b>Sort and filter data</b> section of the <b>Spreadsheet Editor</b> help.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><img alt="Search icon" src="../images/searchicon.png" /> - to search for a certain value and replace it with another one, if necessary
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: to learn more on how to use the <b>Find and Replace</b> tool you can refer to the <b>Search and Replace Functions</b> section of the <b>Spreadsheet Editor</b> help.</p>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<img alt="Search icon" src="../images/searchicon.png" /> - to search for a certain value and replace it with another one, if necessary
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: to learn more on how to use the Find and Replace tool, please refer to the <b>Search and Replace Functions</b> section of the <b>Spreadsheet Editor</b> help.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
|
|
@ -53,38 +56,40 @@
|
|||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Insert merge fields and check the results</b>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>Place the mouse cursor in the text of the main document where you want a merge field to be inserted, click the <b>Insert Merge Field</b> button at the right sidebar and select the necessary field from the list. The available fields correspond to the data in the first cell of each column of the selected data source. Add all the fields you need anywhere in the document.
|
||||
<li>Place the mouse cursor where the merge field should be inserted, click the <b>Insert Merge Field</b> button on the right sidebar and select the necessary field from the list. The available fields correspond to the data in the first cell of each column of the selected data source. All the required fields can be added anywhere.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Merge Fields section" src="../images/mergefields.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>Turn on the <b>Highlight merge fields</b> switcher at the right sidebar to make the inserted fields more noticeable in the document text.
|
||||
<li>Turn on the <b>Highlight merge fields</b> switcher on the right sidebar to make the inserted fields more noticeable in the text.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Main document with inserted fields" src="../images/insertedfields.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>Turn on the <b>Preview results</b> switcher at the right sidebar to view the document text with the merge fields replaced with actual values from the data source. Use the arrow buttons to preview versions of the merged document for each record.
|
||||
<li>Turn on the <b>Preview results</b> switcher on the right sidebar to view the text with the merge fields replaced with actual values from the data source. Use the arrow buttons to preview the versions of the merged document for each record.
|
||||
<p><img alt="Preview results" src="../images/previewinsertedfields.png" /></p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>To delete an inserted field, disable the <b>Preview results</b> mode, select the field with the mouse and press the <b>Delete</b> key on the keyboard. </li>
|
||||
<li>To replace an inserted field, disable the <b>Preview results</b> mode, select the field with the mouse, click the <b>Insert Merge Field</b> button at the right sidebar and choose a new field from the list.</li>
|
||||
<li>To replace an inserted field, disable the <b>Preview results</b> mode, select the field with the mouse, click the <b>Insert Merge Field</b> button on the right sidebar and choose a new field from the list.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Specify the merge parameters</b>
|
||||
<ol>
|
||||
<li>Select the merge type. You can start mass mailing or save the result as a file in the PDF or Docx format to be able to print or edit it later. Select the necessary option from the <b>Merge to</b> list:
|
||||
<li>Select the merge type. You can start mass mailing or save the result as a PDF or Docx file to print or edit it later. Select the necessary option from the <b>Merge to</b> list:
|
||||
<p><img alt="Merge type selection" src="../images/mergeto.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>PDF</b> - to create a single document in the PDF format that includes all the merged copies so that you can print them later</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Docx</b> - to create a single document in the Docx format that includes all the merged copies so that you can edit individual copies later</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Email</b> - to send the results to recipients by email
|
||||
<li><b>PDF</b> - to create a single PDF document that includes all the merged copies that can be printed later</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Docx</b> - to create a single Docx document that includes all the merged copies that can be edited individually later</li>
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<b>Email</b> - to send the results to recipients by email
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the recipients' email addresses must be specified in the loaded data source and you need to have at least one email account connected in the <b>Mail</b> module on your portal.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>Choose the records you want to apply the merge to:
|
||||
<li>Choose all the required records to be applied:
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><b>All records</b> (this option is selected by default) - to create merged documents for all records from the loaded data source</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Current record</b> - to create a merged document for the record that is currently displayed</li>
|
||||
<li><b>From</b> ... <b>To</b> - to create merged documents for a range of records (in this case you need to specify two values: the number of the first record and the last record in the desired range)
|
||||
<li>
|
||||
<b>From</b> ... <b>To</b> - to create merged documents for a range of records (in this case you need to specify two values: the number of the first record and the last record in the desired range)
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the maximum allowed quantity of recipients is 100. If you have more than 100 recipients in your data source, please, perform the mail merge by stages: specify the values from 1 to 100, wait until the mail merge process is over, then repeat the operation specifying the values from 101 to N etc.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
|
|
@ -93,20 +98,20 @@
|
|||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>If you've decided to save the merge results as a file,
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Download</b> button to store the file anywhere on your PC. You'll find the downloaded file in your default <em>Downloads</em> folder.</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Save</b> button to save the file on your portal. In the <b>Folder for save</b> window that opens, you can change the file name and specify the folder where you want to save the file. You can also check the <b>Open merged document in new tab</b> box to check the result once the merge process is finished. Finally, click <b>Save</b> in the <b>Folder for save</b> window.</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Download</b> button to save the file on your PC. You'll find the downloaded file in your default <em>Downloads</em> folder.</li>
|
||||
<li>click the <b>Save</b> button to save the file on your portal. In the opened <b>Folder for save</b> window, you can change the file name and specify the folder where you want to save the file. You can also check the <b>Open merged document in new tab</b> box to check the result when the merge process is finished. Finally, click <b>Save</b> in the <b>Folder for save</b> window.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
<li>If you've selected the <b>Email</b> option, the <b>Merge</b> button will be available on the right sidebar. After you click it, the <b>Send to Email</b> window will open:
|
||||
<p><img alt="Send to Email window" src="../images/sendtoemail.png" /></p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li>In the <b>From</b> list, select the mail account you want to use for sending mail, if you have several accounts connected in the <b>Mail</b> module.</li>
|
||||
<li>In the <b>To</b> list, select the merge field corresponding to email addresses of the recipients, if it was not selected automatically.</li>
|
||||
<li>In the <b>From</b> list, select the required mail account if you have several accounts connected to the <b>Mail</b> module.</li>
|
||||
<li>In the <b>To</b> list, select the merge field corresponding to the email addresses of the recipients if this option was not selected automatically.</li>
|
||||
<li>Enter your message subject in the <b>Subject Line</b> field.</li>
|
||||
<li>Select the mail format from the list: <b>HTML</b>, <b>Attach as DOCX</b> or <b>Attach as PDF</b>. When one of the two latter options is selected, you also need to specify the <b>File name</b> for attachments and enter the <b>Message</b> (the text of your letter that will be sent to recipients).</li>
|
||||
<li>Click the <b>Send</b> button.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>Once the mailing is over you'll receive a notification to your email specified in the <b>From</b> field.</p>
|
||||
<p>Once the mailing is over, you'll receive a notification to your email specified in the <b>From</b> field.</p>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
</li>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -18,30 +18,30 @@
|
|||
<h3>General Information</h3>
|
||||
<p>The document information includes a number of the file properties which describe the document. Some of these properties are updated automatically, and some of them can be edited.</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li class ="onlineDocumentFeatures"><b>Location</b> - the folder in the <b>Documents</b> module where the file is stored. <b>Owner</b> - the name of the user who have created the file. <b>Uploaded</b> - the date and time when the file has been created. These properties are available in the <em>online version</em> only.</li>
|
||||
<li class ="onlineDocumentFeatures"><b>Location</b> - the folder in the <b>Documents</b> module where the file is stored. <b>Owner</b> - the name of the user who has created the file. <b>Uploaded</b> - the date and time when the file has been created. These properties are available in the <em>online version</em> only.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Statistics</b> - the number of pages, paragraphs, words, symbols, symbols with spaces.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Title</b>, <b>Subject</b>, <b>Comment</b> - these properties allow to simplify your documents classification. You can specify the necessary text in the properties fields.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Title</b>, <b>Subject</b>, <b>Comment</b> - these properties allow yoy to simplify your documents classification. You can specify the necessary text in the properties fields.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Last Modified</b> - the date and time when the file was last modified.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Last Modified By</b> - the name of the user who have made the latest change in the document if a document has been shared and it can be edited by several users.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Application</b> - the application the document was created with.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Author</b> - the person who have created the file. You can enter the necessary name in this field. Press <em>Enter</em> to add a new field that allows to specify one more author.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Last Modified By</b> - the name of the user who has made the latest change to the document. This option is available if the document has been shared and can be edited by several users.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Application</b> - the application the document has been created with.</li>
|
||||
<li><b>Author</b> - the person who has created the file. You can enter the necessary name in this field. Press <em>Enter</em> to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>If you changed the file properties, click the <b>Apply</b> button to apply the changes.</p>
|
||||
<div class="onlineDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: Online Editors allow you to change the document name directly from the editor interface. To do that, click the <b>File</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the <b>Rename...</b> option, then enter the necessary <b>File name</b> in a new window that opens and click <b>OK</b>.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: The online Editors allow you to change the name of the document directly in the editor interface. To do that, click the <b>File</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the <b>Rename...</b> option, then enter the necessary <b>File name</b> in a new window that will appear and click <b>OK</b>.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<div class="onlineDocumentFeatures">
|
||||
<h3>Permission Information</h3>
|
||||
<p>In the <em>online version</em>, you can view the information about permissions to the files stored in the cloud.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: this option is not available for users with the <b>Read Only</b> permissions.</p>
|
||||
<p>To find out, who have rights to view or edit the document, select the <b>Access Rights...</b> option at the left sidebar.</p>
|
||||
<p>To find out who have rights to view or edit the document, select the <b>Access Rights...</b> option on the left sidebar.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can also change currently selected access rights by pressing the <b>Change access rights</b> button in the <b>Persons who have rights</b> section.</p>
|
||||
<h3>Version History</h3>
|
||||
<p>In the <em>online version</em>, you can view the version history for the files stored in the cloud.</p>
|
||||
<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: this option is not available for users with the <b>Read Only</b> permissions.</p>
|
||||
<p>To view all the changes made to this document, select the <b>Version History</b> option at the left sidebar. It's also possible to open the history of versions using the <img alt="Version History icon" src="../images/versionhistoryicon.png" /> <b>Version History</b> icon at the <b>Collaboration</b> tab of the top toolbar. You'll see the list of this document versions (major changes) and revisions (minor changes) with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For document versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. <em>ver. 2</em>). To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it at the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author name on the left sidebar. You can use the <b>Restore</b> link below the selected version/revision to restore it. <!--To hide the list of the revisions within a certain version, use the <img alt="Collapse icon" src="../images/collapse.png" /> icon next to the version. To display revisions again, use the <img alt="Expand icon" src="../images/expand.png" /> icon.--> </p>
|
||||
<p>To view all the changes made to this document, select the <b>Version History</b> option at the left sidebar. It's also possible to open the history of versions using the <img alt="Version History icon" src="../images/versionhistoryicon.png" /> <b>Version History</b> icon on the <b>Collaboration</b> tab of the top toolbar. You'll see the list of this document versions (major changes) and revisions (minor changes) with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For document versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. <em>ver. 2</em>). To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author's name on the left sidebar. You can use the <b>Restore</b> link below the selected version/revision to restore it. <!--To hide the list of the revisions within a certain version, use the <img alt="Collapse icon" src="../images/collapse.png" /> icon next to the version. To display revisions again, use the <img alt="Expand icon" src="../images/expand.png" /> icon.--> </p>
|
||||
<p><img alt="Version History" src="../images/versionhistory.png" /></p>
|
||||
<p>To return to the document current version, use the <b>Close History</b> option on the top of the version list.</p>
|
||||
<p>To return to the current version of the document, use the <b>Close History</b> option on the top of the version list.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
<p>To close the <b>File</b> panel and return to document editing, select the <b>Close Menu</b> option.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
Binary file not shown.
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 157 B After Width: | Height: | Size: 423 B |
Binary file not shown.
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 170 B After Width: | Height: | Size: 425 B |
Binary file not shown.
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 4.5 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 4.5 KiB |
Binary file not shown.
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 6.1 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 6.8 KiB |
Binary file not shown.
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 105 B |
Binary file not shown.
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 5.7 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 8 KiB |
BIN
apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/date_time.png
Normal file
BIN
apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/date_time.png
Normal file
Binary file not shown.
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 6.6 KiB |
Binary file not shown.
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 316 B |
Binary file not shown.
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 5.8 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 7.5 KiB |
Binary file not shown.
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 3.5 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 3.4 KiB |
Binary file not shown.
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 8.1 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 8.4 KiB |
Binary file not shown.
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 6.7 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 6.6 KiB |
Binary file not shown.
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 6.6 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 4.1 KiB |
Binary file not shown.
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 2.7 KiB |
Binary file not shown.
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 189 B After Width: | Height: | Size: 963 B |
Binary file not shown.
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 22 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 14 KiB |
Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show more
Loading…
Reference in a new issue